Adv pricing user_guide

Oracle® Advanced Pricing
User's Guide
Release 12.1
Part No. E13427-04

August 2010

Oracle Advanced Pricing User's Guide, Release 12.1

Part No. E13427-04

Copyright © 2004, 2010, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Primary Author: John Salvini, Padma Rao

Contributing Author: Rajendra Badadare, Ranjana Bagri, Pradeep Bansal, Vishwajit Bhave, Rajeshwari
Chellam, Amy Cui, T. Geresh, Sripriya Gopal, Vivek Gulati, Dharmender Gupta, Nitin Hase, Natarajan
Kannan, Nirmal Kumar, Justin Kuo, Nithya Lakshmanan, Vivian Lee, Shu-Hui Lin, Maria Viglionese
Matheny, Steven Mosura, Tom Myers, Rajmohan Nair, Vinod Narayanan, Sameer Phatarpekar, Sumeet
Rijhsinghani, Nisha Samaga, Naresh Sharma, Boon Tea, Giridhar Tippireddy, Linda Xu, Li Yang, Shankar
Kattamanchi

Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks
of their respective owners.

This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on
use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your
license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license,
transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse
engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is
prohibited.

The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If
you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.

If this software or related documentation is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf
of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:

U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS
Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government
customers are "commercial computer software" or "commercial technical data" pursuant to the applicable
Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication,
disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the
applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the
additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle
USA, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.

This software is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not
developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may
create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software in dangerous applications, then you shall be
responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy and other measures to ensure the safe use of
this software. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this
software in dangerous applications.

This software and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products and services
from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all
warranties of any kind with respect to third party content, products and services. Oracle Corporation and its
affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third
party content, products or services.

Contents

Send Us Your Comments

Preface

1 Oracle Advanced Pricing
Overview of Oracle Advanced Pricing..................................................................................... 1-1
Pricing Security......................................................................................................................... 1-6
Using Oracle Advanced Pricing in the HTML Interface.......................................................... 1-7
Pricing Components................................................................................................................ 1-10

2 Price Lists
Overview of Price Lists............................................................................................................. 2-2
Creating a Price List................................................................................................................... 2-5
Creating Price List Lines......................................................................................................... 2-10
Defining Price Breaks for a Price List Line.............................................................................2-18
Defining Price Breaks with Block Pricing.............................................................................. 2-21
Finding Price List Lines........................................................................................................... 2-25
Creating a GSA Price List........................................................................................................ 2-25
Maintaining Price Lists .......................................................................................................... 2-30
Adding Items to a Price List.................................................................................................... 2-31
Adjusting Prices for a Price List.............................................................................................. 2-34
Copying a Price List................................................................................................................. 2-36
Copying a Price List Line........................................................................................................ 2-38
Oracle Advanced Pricing Home page (HTML Interface) ...................................................... 2-39
Using Price Lists in the HTML User Interface........................................................................2-42
Creating a Price List (HTML Interface)...................................................................................2-43

iii

Creating Price List Lines (HTML Interface)........................................................................... 2-49
Searching for Price Lists (HTML Interface)............................................................................ 2-55
Searching for Price List Lines (HTML Interface)....................................................................2-57
Updating a Price List (HTML Interface)................................................................................. 2-58
Updating Price List Lines (HTML Interface).......................................................................... 2-60
Archiving, Deleting, and Purging Price List Information......................................................2-62
Using the Price List Maintenance feature (HTML Interface)................................................. 2-62
Searching for Price Lists and Price List Lines (HTML Interface)...........................................2-63
Making Detail Changes across a Selected Group of Lines.................................................... 2-67
Making Bulk Changes across a Selected Group of Lines.......................................................2-70

3 Modifiers
Overview of Modifiers.............................................................................................................. 3-1
Modifier Concepts..................................................................................................................... 3-2
Creating a Modifier List.......................................................................................................... 3-12
Creating List-Level Qualifiers................................................................................................ 3-18
Creating Modifier Lines.......................................................................................................... 3-21
Using Accumulated Range Breaks.......................................................................................... 3-48
Attaching Pricing Attributes to Modifier Lines..................................................................... 3-51
Excluding Items from a Modifier............................................................................................ 3-53
Creating Line-Level Qualifiers............................................................................................... 3-55
Copying a Modifier List.......................................................................................................... 3-58
Copying a Modifier Line......................................................................................................... 3-61
Using Modifiers in the HTML User Interface........................................................................ 3-62
Creating a Modifier List (HTML Interface)............................................................................ 3-64
Creating Modifier Lines (HTML Interface)............................................................................ 3-71
Defining Controls for Modifier Lines (HTML Interface)...................................................... 3-72
Creating a Discount Modifier Line (HTML Interface)........................................................... 3-75
Creating a Price Break Modifier Line (HTML Interface)....................................................... 3-78
Creating a Promotional Goods Modifier Line (HTML Interface).......................................... 3-83
Creating a Surcharge Modifier Line (HTML Interface)......................................................... 3-87
Searching for Modifier Lists (HTML Interface)..................................................................... 3-90
Updating a Modifier (HTML Interface).................................................................................. 3-92
Updating a Modifier Line (HTML Interface)......................................................................... 3-94
Redeeming Accruals................................................................................................................ 3-98
Changing Modifier Incompatibility..................................................................................... 3-100
Archiving and Purging Modifiers ........................................................................................ 3-103
Using the Pricing Organizer..................................................................................................3-103
Finding Modifiers (Pricing Organizer)................................................................................. 3-105
Overview of Promotional Limits.......................................................................................... 3-109

iv

Creating Limits...................................................................................................................... 3-111
Viewing Limit Balances and Transaction Details................................................................ 3-118
Updating an Existing Limit Balance..................................................................................... 3-121
Adjusting the Limit Amount.................................................................................................3-123

4 Formulas
Overview of Formulas............................................................................................................... 4-1
Creating a Pricing Formula....................................................................................................... 4-2
Finding Formula Factor Lines................................................................................................... 4-9
Updating Formula Prices......................................................................................................... 4-10

5 Qualifiers and Qualifier Groups
Overview of Qualifiers............................................................................................................. 5-1
Creating Qualifiers (HTML Interface)...................................................................................... 5-4
Updating a Qualifier (HTML Interface)................................................................................... 5-8
Deleting a Qualifier (HTML Interface).................................................................................... 5-8
Appending a Qualifier Group (HTML Interface).................................................................... 5-8
Creating a Qualifier Group....................................................................................................... 5-9
Using Qualifier Grouping Numbers...................................................................................... 5-12
Using Qualifier Grouping Numbers Across Qualifier Groups............................................. 5-16
Finding a Qualifier Group...................................................................................................... 5-18
Modifying or Deleting Qualifier Groups............................................................................... 5-19
Qualifier Group Effect when Merging Customers in Oracle Receivables............................ 5-19

6 Multicurrency Conversion Lists
Overview of Multicurrency Conversion Lists ......................................................................... 6-1
Creating a Multicurrency Conversion List............................................................................... 6-6
Example of Multicurrency Price List Usage............................................................................6-14
Updating the Multicurrency Conversion List........................................................................ 6-19

7 Agreements
Overview of Creating Agreements........................................................................................... 7-1
Creating Agreements................................................................................................................. 7-3
Revising an Existing Agreement............................................................................................. 7-12
Finding Agreements................................................................................................................ 7-13
Deleting Agreements............................................................................................................... 7-14

8 Archiving and Purging Pricing Entities
Overview of Archiving and Purging Pricing Entities.............................................................. 8-1

v

Archiving Pricing Entities......................................................................................................... 8-2
Purging Pricing Entities............................................................................................................ 8-8

9 Pricing Engine Request Viewer
Overview of the Pricing Engine Request Viewer .................................................................... 9-1
Viewing Information in the Pricing Engine Request Viewer.................................................. 9-2

10 Price Books
Overview of Price Books......................................................................................................... 10-1
Creating Price Books............................................................................................................... 10-2
Viewing Price Books............................................................................................................. 10-10
Creating Delta Price Books................................................................................................... 10-14

11 Reports and Concurrent Programs
Overview of Reports and Concurrent Programs.................................................................... 11-1
Accrual Details Report............................................................................................................ 11-2
Attribute Mapping Rules Error Report................................................................................... 11-3
Build Attribute Mapping Rules Program............................................................................... 11-4
Build Formula Package Program.............................................................................................11-5
Cross Order Volume Load....................................................................................................... 11-6
Cross Order Volume Report.................................................................................................... 11-7
Modifier Details Report.......................................................................................................... 11-8
Price Lists Report..................................................................................................................... 11-9
Pricing Formulas Report....................................................................................................... 11-10
Purge Pricing Engine Requests Program.............................................................................. 11-11
QP: Bulk Import of Price List Program................................................................................. 11-12
QP: Maintains the Denormalized Data in QP Qualifiers.................................................... 11-16
QP: Pattern Upgrade.............................................................................................................. 11-17
QP: Security Control with Views Conversion ..................................................................... 11-18
Qualifier Grouping report.................................................................................................... 11-18
Update Price Lists with Multicurrency Conversion Criteria............................................... 11-19
Update Promotional Limit Balances program...................................................................... 11-21

A Formula Scenarios
Formula Scenarios..................................................................................................................... A-1

B Modifier Scenarios
Modifier Scenarios.................................................................................................................... B-1
Discount.................................................................................................................................... B-2

vi

Surcharge................................................................................................................................... B-5
Price Break................................................................................................................................. B-7
Other Item Discount................................................................................................................. B-9
Promotional Goods................................................................................................................. B-11
Coupon Issue........................................................................................................................... B-14
Item Upgrade........................................................................................................................... B-16
Terms Substitution................................................................................................................. B-17
Freight and Special Charges................................................................................................... B-18
New Price................................................................................................................................ B-22

C Windows and Navigation Paths
Windows and Navigation Paths............................................................................................... C-1

Index

vii

Send Us Your Comments

Oracle Advanced Pricing User's Guide, Release 12.1
Part No. E13427-04

Oracle welcomes customers' comments and suggestions on the quality and usefulness of this document.
Your feedback is important, and helps us to best meet your needs as a user of our products. For example:
• Are the implementation steps correct and complete?
• Did you understand the context of the procedures?
• Did you find any errors in the information?
• Does the structure of the information help you with your tasks?
• Do you need different information or graphics? If so, where, and in what format?
• Are the examples correct? Do you need more examples?

If you find any errors or have any other suggestions for improvement, then please tell us your name, the
name of the company who has licensed our products, the title and part number of the documentation and
the chapter, section, and page number (if available).
Note: Before sending us your comments, you might like to check that you have the latest version of the
document and if any concerns are already addressed. To do this, access the new Oracle E-Business Suite
Release Online Documentation CD available on My Oracle Support and www.oracle.com. It contains the
most current Documentation Library plus all documents revised or released recently.
Send your comments to us using the electronic mail address: appsdoc_us@oracle.com
Please give your name, address, electronic mail address, and telephone number (optional).
If you need assistance with Oracle software, then please contact your support representative or Oracle
Support Services.
If you require training or instruction in using Oracle software, then please contact your Oracle local office
and inquire about our Oracle University offerings. A list of Oracle offices is available on our Web site at
www.oracle.com.

ix

Preface

Intended Audience
Welcome to Release 12.1 of the Oracle Advanced Pricing User's Guide.
This guide assumes users have a working knowledge of the following:
• Principles and customary practices of the business area.

• Oracle Advanced Pricing
Oracle suggests that users who have never used Oracle Advanced Pricing attend
one or more of the Oracle Applications training classes available through Oracle
University.

• Oracle Self Service Web Applications
To learn more about Oracle Self Service Web Applications, read the Oracle
Self-Service Web Applications Implementation Manual.

• Oracle Applications graphical user interface
To learn more about the Oracle Applications graphical user interface, read the
Oracle E-Business Suite User's Guide.

Other Information Sources
You can choose from many sources of information, including documentation, training,
and support services, to increase your knowledge and understanding of Oracle
Advanced Pricing.
When this manual refers to other Oracle Applications documentation, use only the
Release 12 versions of those guides.

xi

Online Documentation
All Oracle Applications documentation is available online (HTML or PDF).
• PDF Documentation: See the Online Documentation CD for current PDF
documentation for your product with each release. This Documentation CD is also
available on My Oracle Support and is updated frequently.

• Online Help: You can refer to Oracle Applications Help for current HTML online
help for your product. Oracle provides patchable online help, which you can apply
to your system for updated implementation and end user documentation. No
system downtime is required to apply online help.

• Release Content Document: See the Release Content Document for descriptions of
new features available by release. The Release Content Document is available on
My Oracle Support.

See Related Information Sources on page xiii for more Oracle E-Business Suite product
information.

Deaf/Hard of Hearing Access to Oracle Support Services
To reach Oracle Support Services, use a telecommunications relay service (TRS) to call
Oracle Support at 1.800.223.1711. An Oracle Support Services engineer will handle
technical issues and provide customer support according to the Oracle service request
process. Information about TRS is available at
http://www.fcc.gov/cgb/consumerfacts/trs.html, and a list of phone numbers is
available at http://www.fcc.gov/cgb/dro/trsphonebk.html.

Documentation Accessibility
Our goal is to make Oracle products, services, and supporting documentation accessible
to all users, including users that are disabled. To that end, our documentation includes
features that make information available to users of assistive technology. This
documentation is available in HTML format, and contains markup to facilitate access by
the disabled community. Accessibility standards will continue to evolve over time, and
Oracle is actively engaged with other market-leading technology vendors to address
technical obstacles so that our documentation can be accessible to all of our customers.
For more information, visit the Oracle Accessibility Program Web site at
http://www.oracle.com/accessibility/.

Accessibility of Code Examples in Documentation
Screen readers may not always correctly read the code examples in this document. The
conventions for writing code require that closing braces should appear on an otherwise

xii

empty line; however, some screen readers may not always read a line of text that
consists solely of a bracket or brace.

Accessibility of Links to External Web Sites in Documentation
This documentation may contain links to Web sites of other companies or organizations
that Oracle does not own or control. Oracle neither evaluates nor makes any
representations regarding the accessibility of these Web sites.

Structure
1 Oracle Advanced Pricing
2 Price Lists
3 Modifiers
4 Formulas
5 Qualifiers and Qualifier Groups
6 Multicurrency Conversion Lists
7 Agreements
8 Archiving and Purging Pricing Entities
9 Pricing Engine Request Viewer
10 Price Books
11 Reports and Concurrent Programs
A Formula Scenarios
B Modifier Scenarios
C Windows and Navigation Paths

Related Information Sources
Oracle Advanced Pricing shares business and setup information with other Oracle
Applications products. Therefore, you may want to refer to other guides when you set
up and use Oracle Advanced Pricing. You can read the guides online by choosing
Library from the expandable menu on your HTML help window, by reading from the
Oracle Applications Document Library CD included in your media pack, or by using a
Web browser with a URL that your system administrator provides. If you require
printed guides, you can purchase them from the Oracle Store at
http://oraclestore.oracle.com.

Integration Repository
The Oracle Integration Repository is a compilation of information about the service
endpoints exposed by the Oracle E-Business Suite of applications. It provides a
complete catalog of Oracle E-Business Suite's business service interfaces. The tool lets
users easily discover and deploy the appropriate business service interface for
integration with any system, application, or business partner.
The Oracle Integration Repository is shipped as part of the E-Business Suite. As your
instance is patched, the repository is automatically updated with content appropriate

xiii

for the precise revisions of interfaces in your environment.

Guides Related to All Products

Oracle E-Business Suite User's Guide
This guide explains how to navigate, enter data, query, and run reports using the user
interface (UI) of Oracle E-Business Suite. This guide also includes information on setting
user profiles, as well as running and reviewing concurrent requests.

Guides Related to This Product

Oracle Advanced Pricing Implementation Guide
This manual contains the information you need to set up, implement, and administer
Oracle Advanced Pricing and related functionality such as pricing security.

Oracle Order Management User's Guide
This guide describes how to enter sales orders and returns, copy existing sales orders,
schedule orders, release orders, create price lists and discounts for orders, and create
reports.

Installation and System Administration

Oracle Advanced Pricing Implementation Guide
This manual contains the information you need to set up, implement, and administer
Oracle Advanced Pricing.

Oracle E-Business Suite Concepts
This book is intended for all those planning to deploy Oracle E-Business Suite Release
12, or contemplating significant changes to a configuration. After describing the Oracle
E-Business Suite architecture and technology stack, it focuses on strategic topics, giving
a broad outline of the actions needed to achieve a particular goal, plus the installation
and configuration choices that may be available.

Oracle E-Business Suite Installation Guide: Using Rapid Install
This book is intended for use by anyone who is responsible for installing or upgrading
Oracle E-Business Suite. It provides instructions for running Rapid Install either to carry
out a fresh installation of Oracle E-Business Suite Release 12, or as part of an upgrade
from Release 11i to Release 12. The book also describes the steps needed to install the
technology stack components only, for the special situations where this is applicable.

xiv

Oracle Applications Upgrade Guide: Release 11i to Release 12.1.1
Refer to this guide if you are upgrading your Oracle applications. This guide describes
the upgrade process and lists database and product-specific upgrade tasks. You must be
either at Release 10.7 (NCA, SmartClient, or character mode) or Release 11.0, to upgrade
to Release 11i. You cannot upgrade to Release 11i or newer releases directly from
releases prior to 10.7.

Oracle E-Business Suite System Administrator's Guide Documentation Set
This documentation set provides planning and reference information for the Oracle
E-Business Suite System Administrator. Oracle E-Business Suite System Administrator's
Guide - Configuration contains information on system configuration steps, including
defining concurrent programs and managers, enabling Oracle Applications Manager
features, and setting up printers and online help. Oracle E-Business Suite System
Administrator's Guide - Maintenance provides information for frequent tasks such as
monitoring your system with Oracle Applications Manager, administering Oracle
E-Business Suite Secure Enterprise Search, managing concurrent managers and reports,
using diagnostic utilities including logging, managing profile options, and using alerts.
Oracle E-Business Suite System Administrator's Guide - Security describes User
Management, data security, function security, auditing, and security configurations.

Oracle Alert User's Guide
This guide explains how to define periodic and event alerts to monitor the status of
Oracle Applications data.

Oracle E-Business Suite Developer's Guide
This guide contains the coding standards followed by the Oracle E-Business Suite
development staff. It describes the Oracle Application Object Library components
needed to implement the Oracle E-Business Suite user interface described in the Oracle
E-Business Suite User Interface Standards for Forms-Based Products. It provides information
to help you build your custom Oracle Forms Developer forms so that they integrate
with Oracle E-Business Suite. In addition, this guide has information for customizations
in features such as concurrent programs, flexfields, messages, and logging.

Other Implementation Documentation

Oracle Workflow Administrator's Guide
This guide explains how to complete the setup steps necessary for any Oracle
Applications product that includes workflow-enabled processes, as well as how to
monitor the progress of runtime workflow processes.

xv

Oracle Workflow User's Guide
This guide explains how Oracle Applications users can view and respond to workflow
notifications and monitor the progress of their workflow processes.

Oracle Workflow API Reference
This guide describes the APIs provided for developers and administrators to access
Oracle Workflow.

Oracle E-Business Suite Flexfields Guide
This guide provides flexfields planning, setup, and reference information for the Oracle
E-Business Suite implementation team, as well as for users responsible for the ongoing
maintenance of Oracle E-Business Suite product data. This guide also provides
information on creating custom reports on flexfields data.

Oracle eTechnical Reference Manuals
Each eTechnical Reference Manual (eTRM) contains database diagrams and a detailed
description of database tables, forms, reports, and programs for a specific Oracle
Applications product. This information helps users convert data from existing
applications, integrate Oracle Applications data with non-Oracle applications, and write
custom reports for Oracle Applications products. Oracle eTRM is available on My
Oracle Support.

Oracle Applications Message Manual
This manual describes all Oracle Applications messages. The guide is available in
HTML format on the documentation CD-ROM.

Training and Support

Training
Oracle offers a complete set of training courses to help users and their staff master
Oracle Advanced Pricing and reach full productivity quickly. These courses are
organized into functional learning paths, so users take only those courses appropriate to
their jobs or areas of responsibility. You have a choice of educational environments. You
can attend courses offered by Oracle University at any one of our many education
centers, you can arrange for our trainers to teach at your facility, or you can use Oracle
Learning Network (OLN), Oracle University's online education utility. In addition,
Oracle training professionals can tailor standard courses or develop custom courses to
meet your needs. For example, you may want to use your organization structure,
terminology, and data as examples in a customized training session delivered at your
own facility.

xvi

Support
From on-site support to central support, our team of experienced professionals provides
the help and information needed to keep Oracle Advanced Pricing working for all
users. This team includes the technical representative, account manager, and Oracle's
large staff of consultants and support specialists with expertise in your business area,
managing an Oracle server, and your hardware and software environment.

Do Not Use Database Tools to Modify Oracle E-Business Suite Data
Oracle STRONGLY RECOMMENDS that you never use SQL*Plus, Oracle Data
Browser, database triggers, or any other tool to modify Oracle E-Business Suite data
unless otherwise instructed.
Oracle provides powerful tools you can use to create, store, change, retrieve, and
maintain information in an Oracle database. But if you use Oracle tools such as
SQL*Plus to modify Oracle E-Business Suite data, you risk destroying the integrity of
your data and you lose the ability to audit changes to your data.
Because Oracle E-Business Suite tables are interrelated, any change you make using an
Oracle E-Business Suite form can update many tables at once. But when you modify
Oracle E-Business Suite data using anything other than Oracle E-Business Suite, you
may change a row in one table without making corresponding changes in related tables.
If your tables get out of synchronization with each other, you risk retrieving erroneous
information and you risk unpredictable results throughout Oracle E-Business Suite.
When you use Oracle E-Business Suite to modify your data, Oracle E-Business Suite
automatically checks that your changes are valid. Oracle E-Business Suite also keeps
track of who changes information. If you enter information into database tables using
database tools, you may store invalid information. You also lose the ability to track who
has changed your information because SQL*Plus and other database tools do not keep a
record of changes.

xvii

1
Oracle Advanced Pricing

This chapter covers the following topics:
• Overview of Oracle Advanced Pricing
• Pricing Security
• Using Oracle Advanced Pricing in the HTML Interface
• Pricing Components

Overview of Oracle Advanced Pricing
Oracle Advanced Pricing supports e-business applications by providing a flexible
pricing engine that executes pricing and promotional calculations for Oracle Order
Management and other Oracle Applications. This application is licensed as Oracle
Advanced Pricing.

Note: For more information on implementation steps, setup
procedures, and profile options, see: Oracle Advanced Pricing
Implementation Guide.

Oracle Advanced Pricing provides the flexibility to meet the needs of complex pricing
situations for a range of demanding industry business requirements which include:
• Consumer goods, telecommunications, services, high technology, automotive
businesses, and aerospace/defense businesses that sell to other businesses.

• Telemarketing, mail order catalog, and web store businesses that sell directly to
consumers.

Oracle Advanced Pricing provides advanced pricing capabilities that enable you to set
up your pricing information and to model complex data relationships to determine the
correct price.
With Oracle Advanced Pricing, you can perform the following functions:

Oracle Advanced Pricing 1-1

• Create a list price for an item or item hierarchy.

• Set a list price based on volume breaks.

• Assign security privileges to pricing users to control their view or maintain access
to price lists and modifiers. You can also control which operating units can use
price lists or modifiers.

• Define price breaks using block pricing to evaluate prices as a single block. For
example, if item weight is between 5 and 15 pounds, then the price is $5. If the
weight is between 16 and 30 pounds, then the price is $10.

• Maintain price lists by performing tasks such as searching across a single or
multiple price lists and updating the price, formula, or effective dates of price list
lines.

• Usage pricing and counter pricing: calculate price based on usage brackets.

• Use price breaks.

• Set a list price and discounts at multiple levels of flattened hierarchies and use
precedence to select the right price or discount.

• Define a formula to dynamically calculate the price based on a simple or a complex
formula or to create a price relation (for example, the price of item A is the price of
Item B + $20).

• Create multiple currency conversion criteria for a single base currency price list.

• Set up General Services Administration (GSA) prices.

• Define pricing agreements.

• Get a price or discount from an external source (for example, my price =
competitor's price - 5 percent).

• Set a percent/fixed/lump sum discount or surcharge.

• Apply N-Dimensional Pricing (for example, if the width is between 2 and 4 and
thickness is between 1 and 3, then multiply the price by 0.3).

• Apply a benefit/surcharge based on the total volume of multiple order lines of the
same order.

• Set up deals and promotions.
• Buy one get one free.

1-2 Oracle Advanced Pricing User's Guide

• Coupon issue (spend more than $1,000 and get a coupon valued at $100 for a
future purchase).

• Other item discount (for example, buy A and B, and get 20 percent off on C).

• Item upgrade (for example, for the price of a 12-oz. shampoo, get a 16-oz.
shampoo).

• Term substitution (spend more than $100 and get upgraded to air shipment).

• Set discounts as to be accrued.

• Set up freight and special charges.

• Mark discounts as exclusive or incompatible to each other.

• Create cascading discounts (discounts to be applied on subtotals).

• Set spending and usage constraints to stop application of a promotion when the
limit is reached.

• Query on multiple modifier criteria across all modifier setups.

• Create your own eligibility conditions by grouping the qualifiers.

• Define your own qualifier and qualifier mapping rules (for example, if today =
Sunday, then give a 10 percent discount).

• View the criteria that the engine uses to select price and modifiers for a pricing
request.

Oracle Advanced Pricing and its pricing engine work through open, business object
oriented application programming interfaces (APIs). For more information about APIs,
see Oracle Order Management Open Interfaces, API, & Electronic Messaging Guide.

General Pricing Concepts
The pricing engine receives transaction information, prepares pricing requests, selects
price lists and modifier lists, and applies price adjustments (benefits) to the transaction.
The pricing engine, which appears in the diagram shown later in this section, evaluates
the following questions to determine a price:
• Who qualifies for prices and benefits?

• What is the product hierarchy and what pricing attributes pertain to this item or
service?


• How should I adjust the order price or order line price?

Who Qualifies?
Pricing qualifiers control who is eligible for certain prices (price lists) and benefits
(modifiers).
Some examples of qualifiers are:
• Customer Class = VIP

• Order Type = Special

Who Qualifies?
What is the Product Hierarchy and the Pricing Attributes?
The product hierarchy andpricing attributes control what is being priced or modified on a
price list or modifier list.
An example of a product hierarchy with pricing attributes is All plastic items of grade B
quality get a 50 percent discount.
How Should I Adjust the Price?
Pricing modifiers control how a modifiers affect the final price (selling price).
Some examples of modifiers are:
• Receive discount of 2 percent

• Buy 1, get 1 free

• Get 480-ml shampoo for the same price as 360-ml shampoo

• Get a coupon for 100 currency units if you buy more than 1,000 currency units

Pricing Engine
The advanced, flexible pricing engine performs pricing and benefit calculations for
Oracle Order Management products and Oracle Customer Relationship Management
products through open APIs.
The pricing engine performs the following functions:
• Prepares the price request structure
The calling applications submit price requests, which the pricing engine configures
into a pricing request structure. The pricing request structure provides information
about all the qualifiers and product pricing attributes.

• Selects applicable price lists and modifier lists
This function selects which price lists are eligible for the current pricing request. It
uses the qualifiers and pricing attributes to select an eligible list of prices or
modifiers that it can apply to the pricing request lines according to the certain rules.


• Determines base list price
This function takes the validated price list lines and applies them to the pricing
request lines. You can specify the list price on a price list as unit price, percent price,
or formula.

• Applies benefits and adjustments (from modifier lists) to list price to determine
selling price
This function takes the validated modifier list lines and applies them to the pricing
request lines to provide price adjustments, such as discounts, price breaks,
surcharges, coupons, item and term substitutions, and other item discounts.
Discount and surcharge modifiers affect the selling price; freight charge modifiers
do not affect the selling price.

• Calculates final selling price

This pricing overview diagram shows the relationship of the main pricing concepts
described previously in the text:
• A sales order

• The qualifier hierarchy

• The pricing request

• The pricing engine

• The list price and adjustments

• The setup entities: price lists, qualifiers, modifiers, products, formulas, and pricing
attributes


Pricing Overview

Pricing Security
In Oracle Applications, a basic level of security called functional security is used to
manage users' access to each application and to control their access to windows,
functions, and reports within an application.
Typically, the System Administrator administers functional security and assigns system
access at the responsibility or user level. See the Oracle E-Business Suite System
Administrator's Guide Documentation Setfor more information about functional security.
Oracle Advanced Pricing provides an additional level of security (in addition to the
existing functional security) called pricing security. Pricing security can be used to


restrict pricing activities such as updating and viewing pricing entities to users granted
specific access privileges. Pricing security is set up and maintained in the HTML user
interface (UI) by a user who is assigned the Oracle Pricing Administrator responsibility.
See the Oracle Advanced Pricing Implementation Guide, Pricing Security section, for more
information on pricing security.
Security Privileges
Security privileges enable you to define who can access each pricing entity and the level
of access permitted: View Only or Maintain. The Pricing Administrator is typically
responsible for setting up security privileges. For more information on security
privileges and other security features, see Oracle Advanced Pricing Implementation Guide.

Related Topics
Oracle Advanced Pricing Implementation Guide, Pricing Security

Using Oracle Advanced Pricing in the HTML Interface
For many pricing features, Oracle Advanced Pricing provides an HTML-based user
interface (UI) that features guided steps and user-friendly pages for setting up and
maintaining modifiers, price lists, and qualifiers. You can use the HTML UI to complete
many of the pricing tasks that were previously available only in the Oracle Forms-based
interface.
To access the HTML UI, select the Oracle Pricing User responsibility and click the Home
link to display the Oracle Advanced Pricing Home page.

Note: The HTML UI is available only in Oracle Advanced Pricing.

The following examples compare the HTML UI and Forms-based UI used in Oracle
Advanced Pricing. The first example shows an Oracle Advanced Pricing HTML page
used to create a price list.


Example of Oracle Advanced Pricing HTML Format: Create Price List Page

The second example shows an Oracle Advanced Pricing Forms-based window used to
create a price list.


Example of Oracle Advanced Pricing Forms-based Format: Advanced Pricing - Price Lists
Window

You can use the HTML UI to complete the following common pricing tasks:
• Create price lists, price list lines, and price break lines for price lists.

• Create the following modifier list types:
• Deal List

• Discount List

• Promotional Goods

• Surcharge List

• Create the following modifier line types:
• Discount

• Surcharge

• Price Break



• Maintain price lists in the Price List Maintenance feature.

• Create qualifiers for price lists and modifiers.

• Search for price lists and modifiers.

Cross-Format Compatibility
Pricing entities such as price lists, modifiers, or qualifiers created in one format, such as
the HTML UI, can be maintained in the other. For example, if you created a price list in
the Forms-based UI, you could update and maintain that price list in the HTML UI.
For features unavailable in HTML, you can still use the Forms-based UI to set up and
maintain pricing functions and features, as in previous releases. If an entity cannot be
created in HTML, for example, qualifier groups, then you must use the Forms-based UI
for these tasks.

Related Topics
Oracle Advanced Pricing Home page (HTML Interface), page 2-39
Using Modifiers in the HTML User Interface, page 3-62
Using Price Lists in the HTML User Interface, page 2-2
Creating Qualifiers (HTML Interface), page 5-4
Using the Price List Maintenance feature (HTML Interface), page 2-62

Pricing Components

Qualifiers and Qualifier Groups
Qualifiers control who receives benefits, and can be used to assign list prices, discounts,
and promotions to:
• Specific customers

• Customer groups

• Order types

• Order amount

• Specific customer or group of customers

Qualifier groups allow you to group multiple conditions and to assign them to a single
benefit. For more information, see Oracle Advanced Pricing User's Guide, Qualifiers.


Attributes and Attribute Mapping
Pricing attributes control the items being priced or modified on a price list or modifier
list.
Qualifier and product attributes are used to define customer or product hierarchies:
• A product hierarchy element defines product pricing characteristics, such as a
product item, item number, category, or brand.

• A customer hierarchy element defines customer pricing characteristics, such as
customer name or customer number.

Attribute mapping enables you to extend your pricing capabilities by using data from a
wide variety of nonstandard sources to drive your pricing actions. The data sources for
the qualifiers and pricing attributes can be from within or outside of Oracle
Applications. Using the attribute management feature, you can complete the following
tasks:
• Create new contexts and attributes.

• Update existing contexts and attribute properties.

• Disable existing attributes.

For information about creating new contexts and attributes, attribute management,
mapping rules, and associated functionality, see the Oracle Advanced Pricing

Price Lists
Price lists contain prices and currencies associated with products and services. Each
price list contains basic header information with one or more item lines. Price lists can
have:
• Prices for specific products and services or for product groups

• Prices as absolute values, percents of other prices, or as formulas

• Prices applicable to the entire organization or to one operating unit

• Negative prices

Service Items
The pricing engine prices service items in the same way that it prices inventory items.
You can price service items as follows:
• Unit price: Set a list price for the service item.


• Percent price: Set a percentage; the price of the service item is that percentage of the
serviceable item list price.

For more information, see Oracle Advanced Pricing User's Guide, Price Lists.

Modifier Lists
Pricing modifiers control how the pricing engine can modify the pricing requests and
pricing request lines. You can select from the following modifier list types and then add
modifier lines to define the actual adjustments or benefit such as a 10 percent discount:
• Deal

• Discount List

• Freight and Special Charge List

• Promotion

• Surcharge List

The following table shows scenarios with examples of the qualifiers, modifiers, and
pricing attributes that support them:

Scenario Qualifier Modifier Product Pricing
Hierarchy attribute

XYZ Customer = XYZ 10% discount Null Null
Corporation gets Corporation
10% discount on
all the products

If Order_Type = Order Type = 15% surcharge Electronic items Null
Return and Return
customer class =
Retail then apply Customer Class
15% surcharge = Retail
for all electronic
items.

Grade B motor Null $20.00 discount Motor oil Grade B
oil gets $20 off

For more information on modifier list and line types and using modifiers, see Oracle
Advanced Pricing User's Guide, Overview of Modifiers, page 3-1.


Formulas
Pricing formulas allow the pricing engine to determine item prices based on the
following:
• A combination of pricing attributes and factors based on the value of a pricing
attribute

• The list price on the price list line to which the formula is attached

• The list price on any specific price list line

• A numeric constant

• A customizable function

You can also attach a formula to a modifier line to calculate discounts. A price list line
uses two types of formulas:
• Static: Specify the formula and execute a concurrent process that calculates absolute
price values.

• Dynamic: Specify the formula, and the pricing engine uses the formula in its
calculations each time that someone orders the product.

For more information, see Oracle Advanced Pricing User's Guide, Formulas, page 4-1.

List Prices
Decide whether your prices are at an individual product level, at the product hierarchy,
or both. Also, determine the precedence levels in your organization. Determine if you
base list prices on the volume purchased. Plan the number of price lists. To get a better
performance, minimize the number of price lists and price list lines by using a
combination of qualifiers, modifiers, pricing attributes, and formulas.

Modifier Types
Categorize your discounts and promotions into the appropriate modifier types. Each
modifier type produces different results: for example, the Other Item Discount requires
the customer to order the original item as a prerequisite to offering the discount;
however, the Promotional Goods discount adds a new line to the order.

Buckets
The pricing engine may calculate different selling prices depending on how you group
your discounts into buckets. Plan your cascading discounts so that you can assign
discounts to buckets based on the subtotal on which each discount needs to be applied.


Phases
The pricing phase assigned to a modifier determines when the adjustment or benefit of
the modifier is applied. For example, a modifier assigned to the List Line Adjustment
phase is applied after leaving the order line, while a modifier assigned to the All Lines
Adjustment phase is applied only after the order line is saved.
Decide to which event and phase each discount and promotion belongs. You should
place:
• Line-level discounts in the Line Adjustments phase

• A promotion such as Buy items A and B and get a discount on Item C in the All
Lines phase

• Modifiers to apply when orders ship in a ship event
Phases are also associated with order events. To apply a discount only when an
order is shipped, assign the modifier to a phase that runs in the SHIP event.

Suppose you create a Discount modifier (10 percent discount) and assigned it to the All
Lines Adjustment phase. Then suppose a sales order for Item AS54888 (with list price
$200) and an ordered quantity of 1 qualifies for that modifier. If the order line is entered
but not saved, only the list price ($200) is retrieved. However, when the order line is
saved or you move to the next line, the modifier assigned to the All Lines Adjustment
phase is applied and the price changes to $190.
See the Oracle Advanced Pricing Implementation Guide for more information on pricing
phases.

Incompatibility Groups and Exclusivity
Assigning modifier lines to an incompatibility group enables the pricing engine to use
incompatibility processing to resolve incompatibility between multiple eligible modifier
lines. If an incompatibility occurs, the pricing engine reviews the modifier lines in the
incompatibility group (assigned for a specific phase), evaluates their precedence value
from highest to lowest priority, and then selects the modifier line with the highest
priority. In Precedence processing, the lower value has the higher precedence (number
1 has the highest priority). The precedence value is evaluated from both the product
precedence and qualifier precedence. The highest precedence (lowest value) is
determined based on the precedence values in the qualifier and product precedence
fields. For more information, see Oracle Advanced Pricing Implementation Guide,
Incompatibility Groups and Exclusivity.

Modifier Levels
Categorize the modifiers into line, group line, and order modifiers. How the pricing
engine treats a modifier can change, depending on your classification.


Automatic, Override, Asked for, and Accrual Flags
It is important that you understand how the pricing engine operates with these flags so
that you can set them to reflect your business needs. Analyze all of your discounts,
promotions, and charges in terms of these features.

Other Setups
Precedence preferences, profile options, break types, and pricing attributes control the
behavior of the pricing engine. Determine the values for these settings that reflect your
business needs.

Precedence Setups
Evaluate default precedence values for qualifiers and product hierarchy-related
attributes and change them to reflect your business needs. When incompatibility is
encountered between price lists or modifier lists, the pricing engine attempts to resolve
the incompatibility by ordering the qualifier attributes and product attributes from
highest to lowest priority (number 1 is the highest priority).
For more information, see Oracle Advanced Pricing Implementation Guide, Precedence and
Best Price.

Units of Measure
Decide the pricing units of measure for each item. The pricing units of measure
determine if the pricing engine selects a modifier.
The list price in the order unit of measure overrides the precedence. When the pricing
engine processes a pricing request, it first chooses eligible price list lines whose unit of
measure matches the calling unit of measure. If multiple price list lines with matching
units of measure exist, the pricing engine chooses the price list line with the greatest
precedence (the lower the number, the greater the precedence). If no price list lines with
matching units of measure exist, the pricing engine looks for price list lines with a
selected primary unit of measure flag for that item, and then it chooses the best
precedence price list line (attributes are defined with a precedence value to resolve
incompatibility).
For more information, see Oracle Advanced Pricing Implementation Guide, Unit of
Measure.


2
Price Lists

• Overview of Price Lists
• Creating a Price List
• Creating Price List Lines
• Defining Price Breaks for a Price List Line
• Defining Price Breaks with Block Pricing
• Finding Price List Lines
• Creating a GSA Price List
• Maintaining Price Lists
• Adding Items to a Price List
• Adjusting Prices for a Price List
• Copying a Price List
• Copying a Price List Line
• Oracle Advanced Pricing Home page (HTML Interface)
• Using Price Lists in the HTML User Interface
• Creating a Price List (HTML Interface)
• Creating Price List Lines (HTML Interface)
• Searching for Price Lists (HTML Interface)
• Searching for Price List Lines (HTML Interface)
• Updating a Price List (HTML Interface)
• Updating Price List Lines (HTML Interface)
• Archiving, Deleting, and Purging Price List Information
• Using the Price List Maintenance feature (HTML Interface)

Price Lists 2-1

• Searching for Price Lists and Price List Lines (HTML Interface)
• Making Detail Changes across a Selected Group of Lines
• Making Bulk Changes across a Selected Group of Lines

Overview of Price Lists
Price lists are essential to ordering products because each item entered on an order
must have a price. Price lists, like modifiers, consist of a header region that defines
general information such as effective dates and currency, and price list lines that define
item and/or item category prices. For price list lines, you can define price breaks, pricing
attributes, and qualifiers.

Note: You can only view or update a price list for your pricing
transaction entity and source system. Therefore, the profile options QP:
Pricing Transaction Entity profile and QP: Source System Code must
match the pricing transaction entity for the price list. For example, if
updating an intercompany price list, the profile options should be set to
QP: Pricing Transaction Entity = Intercompany Transaction (INTCOM)
and QP: Source System Code = Oracle Inventory (INV).

Using Price Lists in the HTML User Interface
Oracle Advanced Pricing provides an HTML-based user interface (UI) that features
guided steps, user-friendly pages, and shortcut links for setting up and maintaining
modifiers, price lists, and qualifiers.
You can use this HTML format for many tasks that were previously available only
using the Oracle Forms-based interface. Tasks that can be completed in HTML are
identified by (HTML Interface) in the task title, for example, Creating a Price List
(HTML Interface).

Price List Terms
The following defines common price list terms that you will see when setting up and
maintaining price lists:
• Effective Dates: Use starting and ending dates to prepare price lists ahead of when
they are valid and to ensure they are not used until their start dates.

Important: You cannot create a future-dated price list that has the
same name as an existing price list. For example, suppose you have
a price list named Price List A, with effective dates 01-Jan-2006 to
31-Dec-2006, and you want to create a second price list named Price


List A, effective 01-Jan-2007 to 31-Dec-2007. The system will not
allow you to create the second price list because a price list with the
same name already exists.

• Inactive Price Lists: You can temporarily or permanently inactivate a price list by
deselecting the Active check box. For inactive price lists, you can still complete the
following actions:
• Query the inactive price list.

• Update it.

• Base a formula on an inactive price list.

Note: The pricing engine does select inactive price lists when
doing a pricing request. Other applications can call an inactive
price list and use relevant information.

• Currency: If you have global customers or do pricing in different currencies, the
multi-currency feature enables you to maintain a single price list for multiple
currencies. For more information on multi-currency price lists, see Overview of
Multicurrency Conversion Lists, page 6-1.

• Round To: The Round To value defines the number of places to the right or left of
the decimal point to which the pricing engine rounds prices from price lists and
modifiers from modifier lists:
• A positive number such as 2 indicates the number of places to the left of the
decimal point. For example, a round to factor of 2 indicates rounding to the
nearest hundreds so 107 rounds to 100.

• A negative number such as -3 indicates number of places to the right of the
decimal point. For example, a round to factor of -3 indicates rounding to the
nearest thousands so 1.1445 rounds to 1.145.

The pricing engine rounds the base price and all discount amounts before using
them in calculations.
You can limit the rounding factor value by the number of positions you specify in
the extended precision format of the price list's currency. The value returned
depends on the value that was set for the profile option QP: Unit Price Precision
Type:
• Standard: The rounding factor defaults to the currency's precision value. You
can override the rounding factor to any value greater than or equal to the

Price Lists 2-3

currency's precision value.

• Extended: The rounding factor defaults to the currency's extended precision
value. You can override the rounding factor to any value greater than or equal
to the currency's extended precision value.

Note: If multicurrency is enabled, the Round To field will be
disabled and will reflect the Round To value defined for the
Multi-Currency Conversion window.

The profile option QP: Selling Price Rounding Options affects the rounding of
adjustments. For more information on this and other profile options, see Oracle
Advanced Pricing Implementation Guide, Profile Options.

• Secondary Price List: The pricing engine uses secondary price lists when it cannot
determine the price for an item using the price list assigned to an order. Primary
and secondary price lists have the same currency.

Note: You can only add a secondary price list one you enter the
currency for the primary price list. This ensures that the secondary
price list has the same currency as the primary price list.

If the item you are ordering is not in the primary price list, the pricing engine looks
for the price on any attached secondary price list. If the item is found, the pricing
engine uses the highest precedence secondary price list (the secondary price list
with the lowest value in the precedence field).
If an item appears in both the primary and a secondary price list with the same
effective dates, the pricing engine uses the primary price list to price the item. If an
item appears on the primary price list but is not active (the effective end date has
passed), the pricing engine uses the price on the secondary price list.

Note: The pricing engine does not evaluate qualifiers on secondary
price lists; however, some user setups may require them to be
evaluated. In these cases, the System Administrator must change
the profile QP: Qualify Secondary Price Lists to Yes. See Oracle
Advanced Pricing Implementation Guide, Profile Options for more
information.

• Agreement Price List: Oracle Advanced Pricing allows you to establish agreements
with your customers that define the prices, payment terms, and freight terms that
you negotiate.
There are two methods by which you can manage agreements:


• Standard agreements which use standard price lists (PRL)

• Pricing agreements which use agreement price lists (AGR)

Note: If you are unable to query or update the price list after
saving or exiting from the window, consult with your Pricing
Administrator for access privileges. Your security access
privilege may not allow you to access the price list windows.

Related Topics
Oracle Advanced Pricing Implementation Guide, Pricing Security
Using Oracle Advanced Pricing in the HTML Interface, page 1-7

Creating a Price List
Price lists consist of a header region where you can define general information such as
effective dates and currency, and price list lines that define item and/or item category
prices. You can define and maintain multiple price lists.

Note: Oracle Advanced Pricing also provides an HTML-based user
interface for setting up and maintaining price lists. See Creating a Price
List (HTML Interface), page 2-43.
If you are using the multicurrency conversion feature, see Overview of
Multicurrency Conversion Lists, page 6-1.

You can define the following types of prices for price list lines:
• Unit price: A fixed price.

• Percent Price: A price which is a percent of the price of another item.

• Formula: Multiple pricing entities and constant values related by arithmetic
operators. For example, you define the price of an item to be a percentage price of
another price list line.

• Price Break: If the price of an item varies with the quantity ordered, you can define
bracket pricing or price breaks. The following table displays an example of a price
break setup:

Price Lists 2-5

Example of Price Setup

Price Break Attribute Value Value From Value To Unit Price

1 Item A11111 0 11 $50
Number

2 Item A11111 11 100 $45
Number

Service Items
You can price service items as follows:
• Unit price: You set a list price for the service item.

• Percent price: You set a percentage; the price of the service item is that percentage
of the serviceable item list price. For more information on using service items in
price lists, see Service Items, page 2-48.

Qualifier Grouping Number Options
You can attach both qualifiers and qualifier groups to a price list. When you attach
qualifier groups, all the qualifiers in the qualifier group are attached. You can use
qualifier grouping numbers to indicate to the pricing engine how to evaluate the
qualifiers. For more information on qualifier groups, see Using Qualifier Grouping
Numbers, page 5-12 and Using Qualifier Grouping Numbers across Qualifier Groups,
page 5-16.

To create a price list:
1. Navigate to the Advanced Pricing - Price Lists window.


Advanced Pricing - Price Lists window

2. Enter a Name for the price list.

Note: The price list Name should be unique across PTEs (Pricing
Transaction Entities) otherwise an error occurs. For example, if a
price list named Corporate is created in the Order Management
PTE, an error message displays if you create a Corporate price list
in the Purchasing PTE.

3. Select the Mobile Download box if you are using an Oracle Mobile application and
want to download specific price lists onto a mobile device such as a laptop
computer. The default value is No.
You can select or clear the Mobile Download box either when creating or updating
a price list.

4. To activate the price list, select the Active box.

5. Enter a Description of the price list.

6. Select a price list Currency.

7. Enter a Round To value that is applied to the price list. A positive number indicates
the number of places to the left of the decimal point. A negative number indicates
number of places to the right of the decimal point. The default is -2. The pricing

Price Lists 2-7

engine rounds the base price and all discount amounts before using them in
calculations.
The value returned depends on the value that was set for the profile option QP:
Unit Price Precision Type:
• Standard: The rounding factor defaults to the currency's precision value. You
can override the rounding factor to any value greater than or equal to the
currency's precision value.

• Extended: The rounding factor defaults to the currency's extended precision
value. You can override the rounding factor to any value greater than or equal
to the currency's extended precision value.

8. Enter the starting and ending Effective Dates for the price list. The Start Date
defaults to the current date.

• You cannot create a future-dated price list that has the same
name as an existing price list. For example, suppose you have a
price list named Price List A, with effective dates 01-Jan-2006 to
31-Dec-2006, and you want to create a second price list named
Price List A, effective 01-Jan-2007 to 31-Dec-2007. The system
will not allow you to create the second price list because a price
list with the same name already exists.

• The effective dates of a QUALIFIER (when attached at the
header-level of a modifier or price list) determine the effective
dates for the associated price or modifier list. For example,
suppose you create a price list with an effective start date of
23-NOV-2005 and no end date. Then you create a qualifier at
the header level with effective dates of 10-NOV-2005 and
12-NOV-2005 for customer Computer Service and Rentals.
However, after 12-NOV-2005, the price list will not be valid for
Computer Service and Rentals or any other customer because
the price list has expired.

9. The Global box field is visible only when pricing security is turned on. The Global
box is selected by default. If cleared, then the Operating Unit field is displayed for
the price list.

10. Operating Unit: Restricts the usage of the price list to the named operating unit.

If multiorg access is not enabled, the operating unit defaults from profile MO:
Operating Unit. This operating unit field cannot be updated by users. If multiorg
access is enabled, operating unit default from profile MO: Default Operating Unit.
Users can override this default and select an operating unit that they have access to


as defined by MO: Security Profile.

11. Select the default Payment Terms.

12. Select the default Freight Terms and Freight Carrier.

In the Other Tab
13. Select the Other tab.

Advanced Pricing - Price Lists window: Other tab

14. The Other tab displays the following information, and if applicable, details about
the related Sales Agreement:
• List Source Document Number: The number of the sales agreement associated
with the price list.

• List Source Code: Displays the code for the price list source (BSO will be the
source code for sales agreement).

• Pricing Transaction Entity: Displays the name of the pricing transaction entity
creating the price list. This field cannot be updated.

• Source System Code: Displays the code name for the source system creating the
price list such as QP for pricing. This field cannot be updated.

Price Lists 2-9

Note: The Pricing Transaction Entity and Source System fields
display for all price lists regardless of whether there is a related
Sales Agreement.

• Shareable box: Indicates if the modifier is shared or not. If non-shareable (the
default), then this modifier is specific to that agreement and cannot be used
with other sales agreements.
If shared, the modifier is not exclusive to the sales agreement and can be
selected for use with other agreements. Source Document Number: This is the
Number of the sales agreement associated with the price list.
Once you have completed entries in the price list header, you can add price list
lines that define the actual items and list prices for the price list.

Related Topics
Creating Price List Lines, page 2-10

Creating Price List Lines
In the List Lines tab of the price list, you can add price list lines to define the actual
items on the price list and their list prices.

To create price list lines:
1. Select the List Lines tab in the Advanced Pricing - Price Lists window.


Advanced Pricing - Price Lists window: List Lines tab

2. Select Item from the Product Context field.

3. Select a Product Attribute for the Item such as Item Number, Item Category, or All
Items.

Note: Use All Items to apply the same price to all items in your
product hierarchy.

4. Enter a Product Value for the selected product attribute.

5. The UOM (unit of measure) field defaults from the item master of the validation
organization. You can change it to any valid unit of measure for that item.

6. Select the Primary UOM box to select the primary pricing unit of measure for the
item.
For example, an item (such as item A11111) in a price list may have two price list
lines: one with a UOM of Each (EA)--the primary UOM--and the other with a UOM
of Boxes. The pricing engine uses the pricing Primary UOM and the Oracle
Inventory UOM conversion information to price an order whose unit of measure
does not have a price list line. If an order for item A11111 is placed in the unit of
measure Case (CS), the pricing engine accesses the unit of measure conversion
tables to convert Case to Each (EA).

Price Lists 2-11

7. Select one of the following Line Types:
• Price Break Header: To set up price breaks for the price break header. Fro more
information, see Defining Price Breaks for a Price List Line, page 2-18

• Price List Line: To enter a base list price for the item.

8. Select an Application Method:
• Unit Price: For inventory items and item categories.

• Percent Price: For service items. You will only see Percent Price as an
Application Method if the price list line is a service item.

• Block Price: For information on setting up price breaks with Block Price, see
Defining Price Breaks with Block Pricing (for application method Block Price),
page 2-21.

9. Enter a Value which is typically the base list price of the item. The Value field is
grayed out if you are creating price breaks.

Note: If the QP: Price Rounding profile option is set to Enforce
Currency Precision, and you enter a list price greater than the
precision amount allows, you will be unable to save the price list.
An error message only displays when you try to save the price list,
not when you first enter the list price.

10. Select either a Static Formula or Dynamic Formula. If Price Header is selected as the
Line Type, you cannot select a formula.
• For Static Formulas, run the Build Formula Package program to calculate the
value. The result of the calculation changes the Value.

• For Dynamic Formulas, you only need to enter Value if the formula includes
list price as one of the formula components. At pricing time, the pricing engine
calculates the price of the item using the formula. If the formula does not return
a price, the engine uses the value of Price as the price.

11. Enter the Start Date and End Dates for the price list line. The dates should be within
the effective start and end dates of the price list.
This Precedence value defaults based on the product attribute selected. The pricing
engine uses precedence values to resolve conflicts if more than one price list line is
selected from a price list.

12. Save your work.


To define pricing attributes:
1. Click Pricing Attributes in the List Lines tab to display the Pricing Attributes
window.

Pricing Attributes window

2. Select a Product Context and Product Attribute/Value for the selected item.

3. Select an Operator value.

4. Enter Value From/To.

5. Save your work.

Note: The pricing attributes are joined as AND conditions since
they apply to one price list line.

To select a secondary price list:
1. In the Secondary Price List tab, select a Secondary Price List. For more information,
see Secondary Price List, page 2-4.

Price Lists 2-13

Advanced Pricing - Price Lists window

If the item you are ordering is not in the primary price list, the pricing engine looks
for the price on any attached secondary price list. If the item is found, the pricing
engine uses the highest precedence secondary price list (the secondary price list
with the lowest value in the Precedence field).

2. Save your work.

Note: The pricing engine does not evaluate qualifiers on secondary
price lists; however, some user setups may require them to be
evaluated. In these cases, the System Administrator must change
the profile QP: Qualify Secondary Price Lists to Yes. See Oracle
Advanced Pricing Implementation Guide, Profile Options for more
information.

To create qualifiers:
1. Select the Qualifiers tab.


Advanced Pricing - Price Lists window: Qualifiers tab

2. Enter a qualifier Grouping Number. Qualifier lines with the same grouping number
generate an AND condition and qualifiers with different grouping numbers
generate an OR condition.
For more information on qualifier grouping numbers, see Using Qualifier Grouping
Numbers, page 5-12.

3. Select the Qualifier Context.

4. Select the Qualifier Attribute. For example, if you selected Qualifier Context =
Volume, then all the qualifier attributes for volume are listed (except Order Amount
which cannot be used).

5. Value From/Value To: If you define a Value From/To range using negative
numbers, enter the range from lowest to highest value. For example, to define a
Volume Order Amount between -99999 to -1, enter the Value From = -99999 and the
Value To = -1.

6. Applies To Party Hierarchy: This check box is enabled only for attributes that are
based on Oracle TCA (Trading Community Architecture) Parties and Party
Hierarchy Enabled flag has been selected for this attribute on attribute management
setups. See the Oracle Advanced Pricing Implementation Guide for more details.
Hierarchies consist of tiered relationships where one party is ranked above another
such as in a corporate hierarchy where different companies are related as parent,

Price Lists 2-15

subsidiary, headquarters, division and so on. Here is an example of a hierarchy for
a fictitious company XYZ Corporation:
---XYZ Global
-----XYZ US (Global Subsidiary of XYZ Global)
-------XYZ HQ (Global Subsidiary of XYZ Global)
----------XYZ Branch (Division of XYZ HQ)
If Applies To Party Hierarchy is selected, then the modifier adjustment or price list
(depending on what the qualifier is set up for) would be available to the parent
party selected in the Attribute field and its subsidiaries. So, for example, if Applies
To Party Hierarchy is selected for XYZ Global, then the qualifier would also apply
to its related subsidiaries: XYZ US, XYZ HQ, and XYZ Branch. This saves you time
from creating multiple qualifiers one for each subsidiary or division.

7. Enter an Operator and Value From/To. Enter Value To only when the Operator is
BETWEEN.

Note: Some list of values for qualifiers (such as Customer) may
have large value sets that may prolong your query. To reduce the
number of items that display in the list of values, enter additional
search criteria in the field. You can set the profile option QP:
Valueset Lookup Filter to avoid seeing a system warning about
queries.
The Value From Meaning field displays additional details of the
qualifier when you query a qualifier after saving it. For example, if
the context is CUSTOMER and the attribute is Ship To, the Value
From field displays the customer name and Value From Meaning
field displays the site use location for the customer. If the
context/attribute combination has no additional details, Value From
and Value From Meaning are identical.

8. Enter a range for the Start/End Dates. If a qualifier has effective dates, then the
pricing entity (such as a price list) will be applied if the conditions of the qualifier
are met within the specified dates. Once the qualifier expires, the pricing engine
will not evaluate that pricing entity. The alternative is to delete the qualifier from
the list.
For example, suppose you create a price list with an effective start date of
23-NOV-2005 and no end date; then you create a qualifier at the header level with
effective dates from 10-NOV-2005 to 12-NOV-2005 for customer Computer Service
and Rentals. However, after 12-NOV-2005, the price list will not be valid for
Computer Service and Rentals or any other customer and the price list becomes
expired.


To copy qualifier groups (to the price list):
1. In the Qualifiers tab (Price Lists window), click Copy Group to display the Qualifier
Groups window:

Qualifier Groups window

2. Select the qualifier group(s) whose qualifiers you want for the price list.

Warning: When a qualifier group for a price list is copied, any
qualifier lines within that group that have Order Amount or Price
List defined as attributes are not copied over.

3. Select one of the grouping options: Retain Grouping Numbers Across Qualifier
Groups or Generate Unique Grouping Numbers Across Qualifier Groups. For more
information, see Using Qualifier Grouping Numbers across Qualifier Groups, page
5-16.

4. Click OK to copy the qualifiers from the selected group(s) to the price list. The
qualifiers display in the Qualifiers tab. The name of the originating Group
associated with the qualifier displays in the Group field.

Note: After selecting the qualifier groups, confirm that the
grouping numbers display the correct combination of AND and OR

Price Lists 2-17

conditions.

5. Save your work.

Defining Price Breaks for a Price List Line
You can use price breaks (bracket pricing) to define prices that vary with the quantity
ordered. For example, if you buy up to 10 items the price is $20 per item, but if you buy
more that 10 items, you get a lower price per unit.

Note: If you define a price for an Item Category, then all items within
the category are eligible for the price break.

The following table displays an example of a price break setup:

Price Pricing Pricing Value Price Application Recurring
Break Context Attribute From-To Method Value

1 Volume Item Quantity 0-11 $50 Unit Price --

2 Volume Item Quantity 11-99999 $45 Unit Price --

Note: To use price breaks, the following values must be selected in the
Price Lists window:
• Line Type: Price Break Header

• Application Method: Unit Price or Block Price

To define price breaks:
1. Complete your entries in the List Lines tab (selected fields described):
• Line Type: Price Break Header

• Price Break Type: When setting up price breaks, you can define either point or
range breaks:
• Point break
Defines prices based on the price bracket in which the total quantity falls.
For example, if you ordered 16 units of Item A11111, the total quantity falls


into the Price Break 2 bracket where the unit price is $45. So the total price
is calculated as follows:
Total price = 16 * $45 each = $720

• Range break
Defines prices based on the ranges of the defined price breaks. For each
range, the engine calculates a price and sums across all ranges to obtain the
list price.
For example, if you ordered 16 units of Item A11111, the unit price from
each price (Price Breaks 1 and 2) is applied as follows:

Price Break Line Quantity Unit Price Initial
Extended
Amount

Price Break 1 11 $50.00 $550.00

Price Break 2 5 $45.00 $225.00

To calculate the unit selling price, the sum of the initial extended amount is
used :
1. Initial extended price: $550.00 + $225.00 = $775.00

2. Unit selling price: 775.00/16 = $48.44

2. Click Price Breaks in the List Lines tab of the Price Lists window to display the Price
Breaks window.

Price Lists 2-19

Price Breaks window

3. Define each price break:
• Pricing Context: Volume (default value).

• Pricing Attribute: Item Quantity (default value). Optionally, select a different
value.

• Value From and Value To
Price ranges for breaks must start with 0 with no gaps between breaks. If you
leave the Value To field blank, a value of 999999.. (15 digits long) defaults in the
database, but does not display in the Value To field.

• Price
• For inventory items and item categories, enter the base list price of the item.

• For service items: If the Application Method is Unit Price, enter the base list
price of the item. If the Application Method is Percent Price, enter a percent
of another item's price.

• Application Method



• Block Price: Using block pricing, you can apply a lumpsum price rather
than a per unit price to a price list line. Block pricing also allows pricing
setups that price by recurring values within blocks. For information on
setting up price breaks with Block Price, see Defining Price Breaks with
Block Pricing (for application method Block Price), page 2-21.

Note: Block Price can only be selected if the line type is
Price Break Header (PBH) and Block Price is selected as the
Application Method for the price list line.

For more information, see Application Method, page 3-4.

• Formula: Enter the value of the dynamic formula to be attached to the price
break header (PBH) line. At pricing time, the pricing engine calculates the price
of the item using the formula.
Notes
• A formula can be attached to the PBH line only when the Application
Method is Unit Price.

• You can only attach dynamic formulas to a PBH line, not static formulas.

• Recurring Value: Optionally, enter a Recurring Value for a block price. For
example, if the Recurring Value is 100, then the range is priced for every 100
items within the block.

Note: The Recurring Value field is enabled when the following
values are selected:
• Break type is Range.

• The application method of Block Price is selected for both
the price list line and price break line.

Related Topics
Defining Price Breaks with Block Pricing (for application method Block Price), page 2-
21

Defining Price Breaks with Block Pricing
Using block pricing, you can apply a lumpsum price rather than a per unit price to a
price list line. Block pricing also provides flexibility when the unit of measure (UOM) of
the header is different from the pricing attributes of each break range.

Price Lists 2-21

• In non-block pricing price breaks, the UOM of the break range lines is the same as
that of the header.

• In block pricing, the break ranges can have different units of measure than the
header. Lastly, block pricing also allows pricing setups that price by recurring
values within blocks.

In regular breaks, lines have the application method of unit price (for inventory items)
and percent price (for service items only). For block pricing breaks, unit price or percent
price is replaced by block price to differentiate between the line UOM and the header
UOM. Like regular breaks, block pricing can be defined for either Point or Range price
types.
When the break type is Range, and application method is BLOCK, you can define a
recurring value for that block. For example, if the Recurring Value is 100, then the range
is priced for every 100 items within the block.

Note: If the recurring value does not divide evenly into the block, the
resulting price is a prorated amount, not a flat rate, of the block price.

The following examples show how price breaks with block pricing could be used:
• Shipments between 100 and 200 lbs cost a flat rate of $50, regardless of the UOM.
Without block pricing, the rate would be calculated by multiplying $50 against the
unit quantity. So, a 100 lb shipment would be calculated at $5,000 (100 lbs X $50)
instead of $50.00.

• For the first 1 to 100 the price is always fixed at a total amount or lump sum. After
that, charge is by the unit: for example, each hour based on a price break.

• $10 for every hundred items until 1200. After that, $5 for every 50 items until 2,000.
After that, $0.30 per unit.

• $10 for every hundred until 1200 items. After that, $30 for every hundred in
addition to the cost of the first 1200. For example, with block pricing you would be
able to create a price list and price setup, where the total cost for 1300 units will be
$150 ($120 for the first 1200, $30 for every additional 100 units).

Note: The Block application method can only be selected if the price
list line type is Price Header (PBH).

Example 1: Example of Block Price Using a Recurring Value
You can apply a block price and have the price repeat for defined intervals (the
recurring value); for example, to charge $10 per 100 items up to 1,000 items. In this
example, the recurring value is 100.


Note: You cannot use Recurring Value if the Price Type is Point.

When a recurring value is used with price breaks, the Block price repeats for every
interval defined by the Recurring Value column. In this example, for the first 1200 units,
the price is $10 for each 100 units up to 1200 units.
For over 1200 units and more, you could create a second price to define a price of $30
for each 100 units.
Therefore, if 1,300 units were purchased, the total cost would be $150, which is
calculated as follows:
• Block price 1: Price for first 1200 (1200/100= 12 X $10): $120 (first price break)

• Block price 2: Price for each additional block of 100 units beginning with 1201 units:
$30 (second price break)

Example 2: Using Block price and Unit price with Price Breaks
For additional pricing flexibility, a Block Price and Break Unit Price can be applied in a
price break. This is commonly found in minimum price scenarios.
Example 2a)
A $100 flat price is charged for 1 to 100 minutes of cellular phone usage, after which the
customer is billed a Break Unit Price of $1.00 per minute. This can be done by setting up
a Block Price with a recurring value: for example, $10 per 100 minutes, and then
applying a Break Unit Price of $1.00 for each minute over 100 minutes.
Example 2b)
• Block Price: $10 for every 100 units (the recurring value) up to 1,200 units (first price
break)

• Block Price: $5 for every 50 units (the recurring value) from 1,200 up to 2,000 units
(second price break)

• Break Unit Price: $0.30 per unit above 2,000 units (third price break)

The following tables displays the Block Price and Break Unit Price setup in the Price
Lists window.
This table displays the Block Price setup:

Item UOM Line Type Price Type Application
Method

ALL Each (EA) Price Header Range Block Price

This table displays the Per Unit pricing setup:

Price Lists 2-23

Pricing Pricing Value Price Application Recurring
Context Attribute From-To Method Value

Volume Item 0 - 1,200 $10 Block Price 100
Quantity

Volume Item 1,200 - 2,000 $5 Block Price 50
Quantity

Volume Item 2,000 - $0.30 Break Unit Null
Quantity 999,999 Price

Block Price with Application Method of BLOCK PRICE and BREAK UNIT PRICE
If BLOCK PRICE is selected as the application method in the price header for a price list
(this is possible only with Range breaks), you can select the following application
methods for the price lines:
• BLOCK PRICE

• BREAK UNIT PRICE

When the BREAK UNIT PRICE application method is used in the line, the price
specified is the break unit price per attribute. For example, if the price is based on the
price attribute Item Weight, the price to be specified is price per unit weight.
When setting up the price break, the price provided should be the break unit attribute
price. The break unit price for the ordered item is calculated by multiplying the BREAK
UNIT PRICE with the sourced Volume Attribute value divided by the ordered quantity.
For example: if the Item Weight in lbs is used as the Volume Attribute in the following
price breaks ($10 is the price per lb.):

Pricing Value from Value to Price Application
Attribute method

Item Weight 0 50 10 Break unit price

Item Weight 50 100 8 Break unit price

The Item Weight is sourced from the total line weight of a sales order line. For example,
if a sales order is entered for three items each weighing 2 lbs, then the unit list price
returned from the preceding price would be: [10 X 6]/3 = $20. Six is the total line weight
(2 x 3) lbs.


In the preceding context, the pricing attribute and its sourcing are important factors;
therefore, it is important to ensure that the appropriate pricing attribute is used when
setting up Break Unit Price lines to get the correct results.
If any Volume attribute that sources a constant value is used, the list price in a sales
order varies with the ordered quantity even though the ordered quantity falls in the
same break. It is recommended to use sourced volume attributes whose value changes
with the ordered quantity such as Item Weight, Item Volume, and Item Quantity.
These considerations apply when using cross order volume attributes too. For example,
if the cross-order volume pricing attribute Period 1 Item Amount is used in the line, the
break unit price will be the price per unit period 1 amount.
Unless there is specific business requirement, it is not recommended to use Cross Order
Volume attributes with BLOCK PRICE at the Header level and BREAK UNIT PRICE for
the line. Instead, consider using UNIT PRICE at the Header level for such scenarios.

Related Topics
Defining Price Breaks for a Price List Line, page 2-18

Finding Price List Lines
When querying price list lines, use the Find Price List Lines window to find specific
price list lines. You can select the product attribute context (for example, Item), then
select the product attribute (for example, Item Number) and a specific product attribute
value (for example, Product A) to refine your search results.
In the Find Price List Lines window, you can search using the following combinations:
• Item

• All Items

• Item Number or Item Category

• Product Value

Note: You cannot query or search by Product Description. If you search
using the Find Price List Lines window instead of using a
query-by-example on the Advanced Pricing - Price Lists window, you
may reduce your search time.

Creating a GSA Price List
A General Services Administration (GSA) designation identifies a price list belonging to
a United States government customer. For products on the GSA price list, a fixed price

Price Lists 2-25

must be used and defined on the GSA contract.
You can create a GSA price list for your GSA customers. The items on the GSA price list
cannot be sold to commercial customers for a price equal to or less than the government
price. Therefore, the price offered to the government must be the minimum in the
market. A GSA violation occurs when a non-United States government customer is
offered a price equal to or less than the GSA Price. You can set up multiple GSA price
lists that are effective during the same period.

To create a GSA price list:
1. Navigate to the Define Modifier - Define GSA Price window. In this window, you
can set up a GSA price list and GSA prices.

Define Modifier - Define GSA Price window: Main Tab

2. Complete your entries in the Main tab:
• Type: select Discount List.

• Active and Automatic: The Active and Automatic check boxes are selected by
default and cannot be updated.

• Global: The Global box is selected when the Pricing Security Control profile
option is set to ON. This means that the price list can be used by all operating
units for pricing transactions. If deselected, then the Operating Unit field is
displayed for the price list.


• Operating Unit: Restricts the usage of the price list to the named operating unit
(if Global box is not selected). The operating unit defaults if:
• You copy from an operating unit-specific price list.

Note: You can only copy a GSA price list using the Copy
Modifiers concurrent program.

• Your responsibility has security access to the operating unit.

If not, then the Global check box is selected instead.
If Multi-Org Access Control is enabled, this field defaults to the value of the
profile MO: Default Operating Unit. You can select another operating unit if
you have access to as defined by MO: Security Profile. Only transactions (for
example, sales orders) with the same operating unit can use that price list.

• Currency: The Currency value defaults.

3. In the Modifiers Summary tab, enter information about the modifier lines:
• Modifier No: Uniquely identifies the modifier line.

• Level: Defaults to Line, and the Modifier Type defaults to Discount.

• Start/End Dates: Enter the Start/End Dates of this GSA price list line.

Note: The Start and End Dates for the discount line must be
between the Start Date and End Date of the GSA price list. The
pricing engine uses the discount line dates to confirm that the
dates are in effect for each line.

• Override: If selected, the GSA price can be overridden for the selected price list
line. Deselect the Override box to prevent a user from overriding the GSA price
for the selected price list line.

• Pricing Phase: Defaults to List Line Adjustment and the Incompatibility Group
defaults to Level 1 Incompatibility.

• Product Attribute: Select a Product Attribute value such as Item Number, Item
Category, or All Items. Use All Items to define a modifier that applies to all
items in your product hierarchy.

• Product Attribute Value: Select a Product Attribute Value. If you select
ALL_ITEMS for Product Attribute, the Product Attribute Value is ALL.

Price Lists 2-27

• UOM (unit of measure): Select the corresponding Unit of Measure for the item
such as Each or Carton.

4. Complete your entries in the Discounts/Charges tab:
• Application Method: Defaults to New Price.

• Value: Enter the Value for the item. The value is related to the selected
Application Method. For example, if the Application Method is New Price then
the Value is expressed in currency units.

5. In the Other tab, you can view the following including details about any related
Sales Agreement:
• List Source Document Number: No value displays for GSA price list.

• List Source Code: No value displays for GSA price list.

• Pricing Transaction Entity: Displays the pricing transaction entity associated
with the GSA price list. The Pricing Transaction Entity value defaults from the
PTE that created the GSA price list. This field cannot be updated.

• Source System Code: Displays the source system code such as QP for pricing.

Note: The Pricing Transaction Entity and Source System fields
display if there is no related Sales Agreement.

• Shareable: Indicates if the GSA price list is shared or not. If non-shareable (the
default), then this GSA price list is specific to that sales agreement and cannot
be used with other sales agreements.
If shared, the GSA price list is not exclusive to the sales agreement and can be
selected for use with other agreements.

To create GSA list qualifiers:
To create qualifiers for a GSA price list, you can select a qualifier context such as
customer and then a qualifier attribute that defines the context further such as customer
name.

Note: You may be unable to select existing groups from the Qualifiers
tab because GSA price lists restrict the type of qualifiers that can be
attached.

You can select one of the following Qualifier Contexts:


• Customer: For this qualifier context, you can select either Customer name (GSA
customers only) or site as a Qualifier Attribute.

• Modifier List: For this qualifier context, you can select Price List as the Qualifier
Attribute.

Note: You can only attach customers only at the list (header) level.
You cannot assign line level qualifiers.
Do not change the qualifier sequence for the GSA qualifier in
attribute management.

1. Click List Qualifiers.

Note: Do steps 2-10 for each customer that is eligible for the GSA
price.

2. Enter the Grouping Number.

Note: Since Qualifier Context is Customer, make OR conditions by
creating each qualifier with a different grouping number.

3. Select either Customer or Modifier List for Qualifier Context.

4. Enter the Qualifier Attribute.
• If you selected Customer for the Qualifier Context, select either Customer name
(GSA customers only) or site.

• If you selected Modifier List for the Qualifier Context, select Price List as the
Qualifier Attribute.

5. Enter Operator value and the Value From/To.

6. Enter the Start/End Date.

7. The Precedence value defaults from the qualifier setup (from context and
attributes).

8. Enter the customer name in Value From.

9. Enter start date and end date for the customer.

10. Save your work.

Price Lists 2-29

Note: The start and end dates of the list qualifiers must be within
the start and end date of the modifier list.

Maintaining Price Lists
You can maintain your existing price lists by adding more inventory items, adjusting
prices within a single price list, or copying an existing price list to another price list.
For more complex tasks, such as searching across multiple price lists or adjusting prices
for the same item across many price lists, Oracle Advanced Pricing provides a price list
maintenance feature that enables you to:
• Search for price list and line information across many price lists.

• Do mass updates to price lists and price list lines.

Note: You need View Only privileges to view price list and related
windows. However, you must have Maintain privileges to make
any updates. If you are unable to access or update this window,
you may not have the appropriate access privileges. Consult your
Pricing Administrator.

The following provides an overview of the common tasks you can do to maintain price
lists and price list lines:
Adding Inventory Items to a Price List
When you add inventory items to a price list, you can specify an item status, such as
active or planned; an item category, such as hardware or software; or a range of items.
If a hierarchy category is specified, all items for that category as well as child categories
will be added to the price list. You can request the price to be either zero or the items'
costs in a specific inventory organization. Later, you can adjust the prices to your selling
price.
The process only adds items that exist in the item validation inventory organization and
that are not on the price list, even if they are inactive on the price list. To add items from
an item category, you must first define the default inventory category set. When you
add items from an item category, the process adds all items of the item category to the
price list; it does not add the item category.
Adjusting Price Lists
You can increase or decrease the list price of price list lines by an amount or percentage
within a price list. You can adjust prices for all lines on the price list, lines that belong to
an item category, lines with items of a certain status, lines created on a specified date, or
lines having a range of items.
• For information on making simple adjustments to a single price list, see Adjusting


Prices for a Price List, page 2-34.

• For information on making mass changes to a single price list or across price lists
using the Price List Maintenance feature, see Making Bulk Changes across a
Selected Group of Lines, page 2-70.

Updating Prices (manually) for Price List Lines
You can always manually change the price on an existing price list line. If you type over
the existing price, the new price is effective for new orders as soon as you save your
changes.
If you use price list line effectivity dates, you can maintain a historical record of your
prices.
Copying Price Lists
You can quickly create a new price list by copying an existing price list. Only active
price list lines (those with an effective end date later than the current date) can be
copied. You can also copy active discounts and effective dates from the original price
list.

Note: All newly copied price lists with price breaks will be defined as
continuous price breaks.

Maintain Price Lists Using the Price List Maintenance Feature
The Price List Maintenance feature enables you to search across a single or multiple
price lists, select related entities such as specific price list items, and make updates to
price list or price list lines across a single price list or multiple price lists.

Related Topics
Making Detail or Bulk Changes to Price Lists (HTML Interface), page 2-62
Searching for Price Lists (HTML Interface), page 2-55
Archiving, Deleting, and Purging Price List Information, page 2-62

Adding Items to a Price List
Use this process to add items from the item master file to price lists. You must define
the price list header information before you can add items.
You can add inventory items to a price list by selecting:
• A range of Items

• Item Category Set such as Inventory Items or Purchasing

• Item Category such as Hardware or Software (categories can be hierarchical or

Price Lists 2-31

flattened categories).

• Item Status such as Active or Planned

You can set the price to be either zero or equal to the items' costs from a specific
inventory organization. Later, you can adjust the prices to your selling price.
The process only adds existing items from the item validation inventory organization
and that are not on the price list, even if they are inactive on the price list.
To add items from an item category, you must first define the default inventory
category set. When you add items from an item category, the process adds all items of
the item category to the price list; it does not add the item category. If category set is
hierarchical, then all items within the hierarchy will be added.

• Pricing submits a concurrent process when you add inventory
items. The concurrent process only adds new items to a price list; it
does not replace existing items, even if the existing items are
ineffective.

• The add items submit request system processes but does not
validate input information. So, for example, if you enter Items from
1 to 100, the system does not validate whether Items 1 or 100 exist
in the organization.

To add items to a price list:
1. Navigate to the Add Items to Price List window.


Add Items to Price List window

2. Select the Price List to which you want to add items.
Do one or more of the following steps to select criteria of the items to be added to
your price list:

3. Enter an item or range of Items to be added to the price list. You cannot use a wild
card such as % when you specify the beginning and ending item numbers.
When you enter an item or items, the System Items window appears. It features
Low/High fields that enable you to define a range of items.
If you enter a Low value for an item such as PS-2 and click Tab, the same value
automatically defaults to the High field. However, if you then change the Low
value, and click Tab, the High field does not reflect the changed value. You must
manually change the High field to the desired value.

4. Select an Item Category Set.
If you specify only an Item Category Set, then all the items that belong to the
specified Item Category Set will be added to the specified price list.

5. To define selected items within an Item Category Set, select an Item Category.

Price Lists 2-33

6. Enter an Item Status to select items by their status.

7. Select the Set List Price Equal to Cost From check box if you have Oracle Inventory
installed and to set the list price of the inventory item equal to its cost.

Note: The list price becomes zero if:

• You clear the Set List Price Equal to Cost From check box.

• The Inventory Organization does not use the standard costing
method.

8. Enter an Inventory Organization to limit the source of the items to add to those in
the organization. If you do not enter an organization, the process uses the
organization specified in the profile option QP: Item Validation Organization.

9. Click Submit, and use the Request ID that displays to track your request status.

Adjusting Prices for a Price List
Use this process to adjust the prices for a price list. You can adjust prices for the entire
price list or selected items, item category sets, and item categories. You can define your
criteria further by selecting the item status or creation date of the items to adjust.

interface for adjusting prices on price lists. See Using the Price, page 2-
62.

For example, you can specify a category so that only the price list lines for the selected
category are adjusted. If you leave any of the fields blank, pricing adjusts the price list
regardless of that field.
You can adjust the price by either an amount or percent:
• Percent: Enter a value to adjust list prices by a certain percentage. For example,
when adjusting by a percentage, entering 10 raises list prices by 10 percent while -10
lowers list prices by 10 percent.

• Amount: Enter a value to adjust list prices by a fixed amount. For example, when
adjusting by an amount, entering 5 increases list prices by five whole units of
currency. Entering -5 decreases list prices by five whole units of currency.

While adjusting prices:
• If only the Item Category Set is specified, then all the items that belong to the
specified Item Category Set and are present in the specified price list will be


adjusted.

• If both the Item Category Set and Item Category are specified, then all the items that
belong to the specified Item Category Set and Item Category and are present in the
specified price list will be adjusted. If a hierarchical category is specified, all items
in the child categories will be adjusted.

To adjust a price list:
1. Navigate to the Adjust Price List window.

Adjust Price List window

2. Select the name of the Price List to adjust.
The default Currency and Description of the price list displays.
• To adjust prices for the complete price list only, go to step 8.

• To adjust the prices of specified items, item category sets, or item categories in a
price list, complete the following steps in the Item Prices to Adjust section.
Select only the criteria to adjust:

3. Enter an Item or range of Items whose prices you want to adjust. You cannot use
wild cards when you specify the beginning and ending item numbers.

Price Lists 2-35

Note: For System Items, the list of values (LOV) is not available. For
these items, you may need to use an API.

4. Select an Item Category Set.
When you select an Item Category Set only, all item prices in that category set are
adjusted.

5. To restrict items within a selected Item Category Set, select additional criteria in the
Item Category field.

6. Select the Item Status to include items of a specific status.

7. Enter a Creation Date to adjust the prices of items added to the price list on that
date.

8. In the Adjust By field, select Percent or Amount:
• Percent: Enter a value to adjust list prices by a certain percentage. For example,
when adjusting by a percentage, entering 10 raises list prices by 10 percent
while -10 lowers list prices by 10 percent.

• Amount: Enter a value to adjust list prices by a fixed amount. For example,
when adjusting by an amount, entering 5 increases list prices by five whole
units of currency. Entering -5 decreases list prices by five whole units of
currency.

9. Enter a Value that corresponds to the percent or amount to be adjusted.

10. Choose Submit. The request ID is displayed in the Request ID field.

Copying a Price List
You can quickly create a new price list by copying an existing price list. Only active
price list lines (those with an effective end date later than the current date) can be
copied.
You can also copy:
• active discounts from the original price list.

• the effective dates from the original price list lines.

You can copy an existing Standard price list type to a new Standard price list, or an
existing Agreement price list to a new Agreement price list. After the price list is copied,
you can create a new agreement and attach the new price list to the agreement. Since
price list names cannot be duplicated, each price list name must be unique.


• When you copy a price list, the new price list has the same currency as the original
price list. If you are using multi-currency enabled price lists, the multi-currency
conversion attached to the original will be attached to the new price list.

Note: Copying price breaks created in releases earlier than R12: When
you copy a price list, all price break lines from the original price list are
copied to the new price list. However, any price breaks created in
releases earlier than R12 are converted from non-continuous to the
standard continuous price break format (available in release R12 and
newer). Since the conversion results in changes to the price break setup
and break calculations, you should review the copied price break lines
and make any required changes to ensure correct pricing results. For
more information on price breaks and their impact on pricing
adjustments, see Continuous Price Breaks, page 3-78.

To copy a price list:
1. Navigate to the Copy Price List window.
Select one of the following options:
• To copy the entire price list, enter the new price list information in the Copy To
region.

• To copy only selected items, select the Items, Item Category Set, or Item
Category to be copied in the Copy From region. If you select Items, you can also
enter a range of Items to copy.

Note: You cannot use wild cards when you specify the
beginning and ending item numbers. For System Items, the list
of values (LOV) is not available. For these items, you may need
to use an API.

2. Complete your entries in the Copy From region:
• Price List: Select the name of the price list to be copied. This can be from either a
Standard (PRL) or Agreement (AGR) price list. The default Currency and
Description display for the selected price list.

• Item Category Set and Item Category: Select an Item Category Set and Item
Category of the items to add. When you add items from an Item Category, all
items from the item category are added to the price list; it does not add the item
category.

Price Lists 2-37

Note: You must enter both Item Category Set and Item
Category for this criteria to be effective.

• Include Discounts: Select this to copy modifiers of type Discount List (DLT).

Note: This enables users of Release 11 to copy the modifier type
of DLT (Discount List) to the new price list. When selected,
only the modifier type of Discount List is copied but not any 11
i modifiers. If you are not copying modifiers from version 11,
you do not need to select Include Discounts.

• Retain Effective Dates: Select Retain Effective Dates to copy the effective dates
from the existing price list lines to the new price list lines. Even if Select Retain
Effective Dates is selected, only the most current price list lines (current as
defined by their effective dates) will be copied. Duplicate lines that have
expired will not be copied.

Note: The process does not copy the effective dates of the price
list, only the price list lines. You must enter effective dates for
the new price list.

3. Complete your entries in the Copy To region:
• Price List: Enter the new name for the price list. It can be either a Standard
(PRL) or Agreement (AGR) price list.

• Global: If the price list you are copying from is Global (meaning available to all
operating units), then the Global Check box is selected by default. You can
deselect or select the Global value to disable or enable global access to the new
price list.

• Operating Unit: Restricts the usage of the price list to the named operating unit
(if Global box is not selected). The operating unit defaults if a) you copy from
an operating unit-specific price list and b) your responsibility has security
access to the operating unit. If not, then the Global check box is selected instead.

4. Click Submit to copy the price list or selected lines. The request ID is displayed in
the Request ID field.

Copying a Price List Line
You can duplicate an existing price list line for a price list. This saves you time from


manually re-entering a new pricing line. Although the price list information and pricing
attributes are duplicated, price details from the source line are not copied.
Price list lines will be considered duplicate unless the:
• Product value is different.

• Effective dates are different.

• Product attributes are different.

• Comparison Operator Code is different.

Note: Copying price breaks created in releases earlier than R12: When
you copy a price break line created in releases earlier than R12, the
price breaks are converted to the continuous price break format
(standard in release R12 and newer). Since the conversion results in
changes to the price break setup and break calculations, you should
review the copied price break lines and make any required changes to
ensure correct pricing results. For more information on price breaks
and their impact on pricing adjustments, see Price Breaks, page 3-78.

To copy a price list line:
1. Enter a new price list or query an existing price list.

2. Navigate to the line below the price list line to be copied.

3. Select one of the following to duplicate the line:
• Select the Shift+F6 keys.

• From the Edit menu, select Duplicate > Record Above to duplicate the price list
line.

4. You can change Product Value or Effective Dates to avoid a duplicate list line error
from occurring in the same price list.

5. Save your work.

Oracle Advanced Pricing Home page (HTML Interface)
The Oracle Advanced Pricing Home page provides centralized access to your main
pricing tasks. From this page, you can:
• Search for price lists and modifier lists.

Price Lists 2-39

• Use the Shortcuts links to quickly navigate to the pages that enable you to create
and manage price lists and modifiers.

• Use the Work Queue to view recently-created price lists and modifiers.

The following graphic shows theOracle Advanced Pricing Home page featuring the
Search, Shortcuts, and Work Queue regions:

Oracle Advanced Pricing Home page

The following section describes the tasks that can be completed from the home page:

To search for price lists and modifiers:
1. In the Search field, select the pricing entity to search for:
• Price List: To search for price lists.

• Modifier List: To search for modifier lists.

2. Select a search category, then enter additional criteria to narrow your search results.
For example, if you selected Price Lists and then Name, enter the specific name of
the price list.
• For Modifier Lists: Select Currency, Number, Type, Modifier Line Number, or
Name.

• For Price Lists: Select Name or Currency.

3. Click Go to display the search results in the Lists tab.

Note: You can only view price and modifier lists, and depending
on your security privileges, update lists.


To use the Shortcuts region:
The Shortcuts region provides the following links that enable you to quickly navigate to
the pricing task or feature you want. For example, click the Create Price List link to
create a price list. Select from the available Shortcut links:
• Create Price List: To create a new price list.

• Price List Maintenance: To maintain or update one or many price lists.

• Create Deal List: To create a Deal List.

• Create Discount List: To create a Discount List.

• Create Promotion List: To create a Promotion List.

• Create Surcharge List: To create a Surcharge List.

Click the link to display the related setup or feature pages. Additional online help for
each topic is available by clicking the Online Help icon in the destination page.

To use the Work Queue region:
In the Work Queue region, you can view modifiers or price lists that you recently
created. The Work Queue displays the price lists and modifier lists created by the user
who is logged in.
1. In the Work Queue region, select the type of pricing entity to be viewed:
• Recently Created Price Lists

• Recently Created Modifier Lists

2. Click Go to display the entities in chronological order (newest to oldest). General
information about each modifier list or price list is also listed in the table.

3. Optionally, click the Update icon to update the list, or click the Details icon to view
additional details.

Related Topics
Updating a Modifier (HTML Interface), page 3-92
Updating a Price List (HTML Interface), page 2-58

Price Lists 2-41

Using Price Lists in the HTML User Interface
You can use the HTML UI to complete many of the pricing tasks that you previously
completed in the Oracle Forms-based user interface such as:
• Searching for price lists and price list lines.

• Creating price lists.

• Creating price list lines.

• Maintaining price lists using the Price List Maintenance feature.

• Creating qualifiers for price lists.

Tasks available in HTML are identified with HTML Interface in the task title; for
example, Creating a Price List (HTML Interface).
Oracle Advanced Pricing still provides the Oracle Form-based interface for completing
tasks that are currently unavailable in the HTML interface such as creating qualifier
groups.

Note: Pricing security can affect the View and Maintain features
associated with the Update and Details icons in the HTML user
interface. For more information, see Oracle Advanced Pricing
Implementation Guide, Pricing Security.

Related Topics
Using Oracle Advanced Pricing in the HTML Interface, page 1-7
Creating a Price List (HTML Interface), page 2-43
Creating Price List Lines (HTML Interface), page 2-49
Searching for Price Lists (HTML Interface), page 2-55
Updating Price List Lines (HTML Interface), page 2-60


Creating a Price List (HTML Interface)
Price lists are essential to ordering products because each item on an order must have a
price. Each price list contains basic price list information and price list lines that define
the items and their list prices. Creating a price list in the HTML user interface is a
flow-based process that consists of the following guided steps:
1. Enter general price list information to define general information about the price list
such as the price list name, effective dates, currency, pricing controls, rounding
factor, and shipping defaults.

2. Create qualifiers that define eligibility rules for the price list. You can use qualifiers
to restrict the price list to certain customers by qualifying customers for a particular
price list. For example, the customer must be a Gold class customer to receive the
price list.

3. Review and then save the price list.

4. Add price list lines that define the items on your price list and their list prices.

interface. See Oracle Advanced Pricing Implementation Guide, Pricing
Security for more information.

To create a price list:
1. Navigate to the Create Price List: General Information page.

Price Lists 2-43

Create Price List: General Information page

2. Complete your entries in the General Information region (selected fields are
described below):
• Name and Description: Enter the Name and Description for this price list. The
price list Name should be unique across Pricing Transaction Entities (PTEs),
otherwise an error occurs. For example, if a price list named Corporate is
created in the Order Management PTE, an error message appears if you create a
Corporate price list in the Purchasing PTE.

• Pricing Transaction Entity/Source System: The Source System and Pricing
Transaction Entity values are provided by default from the profiles QP: Pricing
Transaction Entity and QP: Source System Code. For example, the Source
System default is Oracle Pricing.

• Currency: Select a base Currency for the price list, such as US dollars (USD). For
more information, see Currency, page 2-2.

• Multi-Currency Conversion: Select a Multi-currency Conversion Criteria list.
This field appears only if the profile QP: Multicurrency Enabled is set to Yes.

• Round To: Enter a Round To value for the price list. For more information, see
Round To, page 2-3.


• Freight Carrier: Select the default Freight Carrier.

• Freight Terms: Select the default Freight Terms.

• Payment Terms: Select the default Payment Terms, such as Cash On Delivery
(COD).

• Enter the effective Start Date and End Date.

• You cannot create a future-dated price list that has the
same name as an existing price list. For example, suppose
you have a price list named Price List A, with effective dates
01-Jan-2006 to 31-Dec-2006, and you want to create a
second price list named Price List A, effective 01-Jan-2007 to
31-Dec-2007. The system will not allow you to create the
second price list because a price list with the same name
already exists.

• The effective dates of the qualifier (when attached at the
header-level of a modifier or price list) determine the
effective dates for the associated price list or modifier list.
For example, suppose you create a price list with an
effective start date of 23-NOV-2005 and no end date. Then
you create a qualifier at the header level with effective
dates of 10-NOV-2005 and 12-NOV-2005 for customer
Computer Service and Rentals. However, after
12-NOV-2005, the price list will not be valid for Computer
Service and Rentals or any other customer because the price
list has expired.

• Pricing for Global Use: If the Pricing for Global Use check box is selected, then
the price list can be used by all operating units for pricing transactions. If
cleared, then the Operating Unit field appears for the price list:

Note: The Pricing for Global Use check box appears only if
pricing security is activated.

• If multi-org access is not enabled, the profile MO: Operating Unit provides
the operating unit default. This Operating Unit field cannot be updated by
users.

• If multi-org access is enabled, the profile MO: Default Operating Unit
provides the operating unit default. You can over-ride this default and
select an operating unit that you can access, as defined by MO: Security

Price Lists 2-45

Profile.

• Mobile Download: Select the Mobile Download check box if you are using an
Oracle Mobile application and want to download specific price lists onto a
mobile device such as a laptop computer. The default value is No.

Secondary Price Lists Region
3. Click Add Another Row to add a blank row where you can select a secondary price
list.

4. Click the Search icon and select the price list to be attached as a secondary price list.
The Description appears by default based on the price list selected. It is view-only.
The Precedence number is provided by default and can be updated.

Note: If the item is listed on multiple secondary price lists, the
precedence value is used to determine which secondary price list
the item is selected from.
The lower the precedence number, the higher its precedence
ranking. Therefore, a secondary price list with a Precedence value
of 100 is selected before a precedence of 200, and a value of 200 is
selected before 300, and so on.
Optionally, to delete this price list as a secondary price list, click
Delete, and then click Apply to save your changes.

5. Click Next to display the Create Price List: Qualifiers page. Qualifiers define the
eligibility rules that define who qualifies for the modifier. Define any qualifiers for
the price list.

6. When you have completed your entries, click Finish to skip the review page, or
click Next to display the Price List Review page.


Create Price List: Review page

7. In the Price List Review page, you can review the price list information before
applying the final changes. If changes are required, click the Back button to return
to the page and make your changes. If no changes are required, click Finish to save
the price list.
A Confirmation message confirms that the price list has been created and asks if
you want to add price list lines. Price list lines define the items and prices for the
price list.

Note: Once created, the price list remains in Inactive status. You
must update the price list and select the Active box to activate the
price list.

8. To add price list lines, click Yes. Click No, if you do not want to add price list lines
now. You can add price list lines in the future.

Pricing Service Items in Oracle Order Management:
Oracle Order Management passes both the serviceable item (which is the parent item in
Order Management) and the service item to the pricing engine; the pricing engine first

Price Lists 2-47

prices the serviceable item and then prices the service item.
You can price service items by:
• Unit price: Set a list price for the service item.

• Percent price: Set the price of the service item as a percentage of the serviceable item
list price. To use this method, select the Service Item check box in the Service tab
when you define the item.

Example of Oracle Order Management Service Item
This example compares how pricing calculates service pricing using unit price and
percent price methods. The following setups are used in the calculations:
• Price list setup for laptop computer:
• Product: Laptop Computer

• Application Method: Unit Price

• UOM Code: EA

• List Price: $1,000

• Price list setup for computer service: unit price and percent price setups:

-- Pricing Method: Unit price Pricing method: Percent price

Product Computer Service Computer Service

Application Unit Price Percent Price
Method

UOM Code Month Month

Price List Price: $10 Percent Price: 2

• Order line
• Product: Computer Service

• Ordered Quantity: 1

• Ordered UOM: Month

• Service Period: Year


• Service Duration: 1

• Serviceable Item: Laptop Computer

• List price calculation for computer service
• Unit price method: $10 per month * 12 months service period/duration = $120

• Percent price method: ($1,000 laptop computer * 2 percent computer service
percent price) * 12 months service period/duration = $240

Related Topics

Creating Price List Lines (HTML Interface)
You create price list lines to define the actual items on the price list and their list prices.
When setting up a price list lines, you can define the prices by the following product
levels:
• All Items (applies the same price to all items in your product hierarchy)

• Item Number such as AS54888

• Item Category such as Hardware or Software

• iStore Section

Note: You must define the price list header before you can add
price list lines.

You can use negative price, positive prices, or set the price to be zero. You can use
modifiers to adjust the prices to your selling price.
From the Price List Lines page, you can create following types of price list lines:
• Price list lines: Create a price list line and assign a unit or formula-based price to a
product.

• Price break lines: Create price breaks or bracket pricing to define prices using
different price tiers. For example, if 10 items are ordered, the price is $10 per item;
but if 12 items are ordered, then the price drops to $8 per item. If you define a price

Price Lists 2-49

break for an item category, all the items within the category are eligible for the price
break. For additional pricing flexibility, you can apply a Block Price and Break Unit
Price to a price break. You usually apply these in minimum-price scenarios.

To create a price list line:
1. Navigate to the Update Price List: Price List Lines page.

2. Click Create Price List Line to create a price list line and assign a unit or
formula-based price to a product. For example, you could add line item AS54888
with a selling price of $11 each.
Alternatively, to create a price break click, click Create Price Break Line. For steps
on creating a price break line, see To create a price break line, page 2-52.

Create Price List Line page

3. Complete your entries in the Product region:
• Product:
• Item Number: Applies the price against a particular item number.

• Item Category: Applies the same price against items in the selected item
category.


• All Items: Applies the same price to all items in your product hierarchy.
The default Product Description is based on the product selected.

• UOM and Primary UOM: Select a UOM (unit of measure) for the item, and
select the Primary UOM box to indicate if the specified UOM is the primary
unit of measure.
For example, an item such as A11111 in a price list may have two price list lines:
one with a UOM of Each (EA) - the primary UOM - and the other with a UOM
of Boxes. The pricing engine uses the pricing Primary UOM and the Oracle
Inventory UOM conversion information to price an order whose UOM does not
have a price list line. If an order for item A11111 is placed in UOM Case (CS),
the pricing engine accesses the UOM conversion tables to convert CS to EA,
which is the primary UOM.

Note: The default Precedence value is based on the Product
Level. You can change the Precedence value if desired.

4. Complete your entries in the Pricing Attributes region:
• Attribute: Select attributes to further define how you want to price the product
for the price list line. For example, if you selected toothbrush as the product,
you can use attributes such as color to define the toothbrush to be priced.

• Value From and Value To: Defines the attribute values. For example, if Color is
selected as an attribute, then the values could be some color such as Red or
White.

Note: If you define a Value From/To range using negative
numbers, enter the range from lowest to highest value. For
example, to define a Volume Order Amount between -99999 to
-1, enter the Value From = -99999 and the Value To = -1.

5. Complete your entries in the Price Detail region:
• Line Type: The default is Price List Line (read-only value).

• Application Method:
• Unit Price (default): For inventory items and item categories. This is the per
unit price of the item.

• Percent Price: For service items. Percent Price displays if the price list line is
a service item.

Price Lists 2-51

• Price: Enter a list Price.

• Formula Type: If using a formula to calculate prices, select a Formula Type and
Formula Name. At pricing time, the pricing engine calculates the price of the
item using one of these formulas:
• For Static Formulas, run the Build Formula Package program to calculate
the value. The result of the calculation changes the value. For more
information, see Build Formula Package program, page 11-5.

• For Dynamic Formulas, you only need to enter a value if the formula
includes list price as one of the formula components.

If you selected Create Price Break Line, then complete the following price break
details:

To create a price break line:
1. Navigate to the Update Price List: Price List Lines page and click Create Price Break
Line to create price breaks. Use price breaks (or bracket pricing) to define prices that
vary with the quantity ordered.

Create Price List Line - Break Rules Region

2. Complete the Product and Attributes regions described in defining a price list line.

3. In the Break Rules region, define the details for each price break:
• Line Type (Price Detail region): Price Break. This value is read-only.

• Break Type: Select one of the following break types:


• Point: Price is based on the price bracket in which the total quantity falls.

• Range: Price based on the ranges of the defined price breaks. For each
range, the engine calculates a price and sums across all ranges to obtain the
total extended price. If break type is Range and application method is block
price, the Recurring Value field appears. For more information, see Break
Types, page 3-78.

• Application Method: The fields displayed in the Break Details region vary
depending on if you select Block Price or Unit Price.
• Block Price: Block pricing, which is applicable only for price breaks, enables
you to apply a lumpsum price rather than a per unit price to a pricing line.
Like regular breaks, block pricing can be defined for either Point or Range
price types. A Block Price method is appropriate for the situation described
in the following example:
Shipments between 100 and 200 pounds cost a flat rate of $50, regardless of
the UOM. Without block pricing, the rate would be calculated by
multiplying $50 against the unit quantity. Therefore, a 100-pound shipment
would be calculated at $5000 (100 lbs * $50) instead of $50.

Note: Recurring Value: If Block Price is selected for a range
break, you can define a Recurring Value that repeats a price
for a defined interval; for example, charging $10 per 100
items up to 1,000 items. In this example, the recurring value
is 100.

• Percent Price: For service items (non blocking related).

• Unit Price: Defines the price for each item.

• Volume Based On: This can be any volume attribute, such as Item Quantity or
Group Amount.

If Unit Price is selected in the Application Method field, complete these additional
fields:
• Break UOM: Select a Break UOM such as Each to define the UOM for the price
break. The unit of measure (UOM) can be different from the pricing attributes
of the child line.

• Break UOM Attribute: Select a Break UOM Attribute.

Break Details region
• Value From and Value To: Enter a Value From and Value To range that defines

Price Lists 2-53

the price break.
For example, to define a break for the first 10 items ordered, create a range from
0 to 10. To do this, enter 0 in Value From field and 10 in the Break Value To
field. If the Value To field of the price break is left blank, a value of 9999….99
(15 digits) is provided by default. This value is hidden from the end user and
does not appear in the Value To field.

• Price: Enter a list Price.

• Application Method: This field appears only when Block Price and Break Type
of Range are selected. Select an Application Method.
• Block Price applies a lumpsum price rather than a per unit price to a pricing
line.

• Break Unit Price applies a per unit price, for example, $0.30 per unit above
2,000 units.

Note: For additional pricing flexibility, both a Block Price
and Break Unit Price can be created as separate break lines.
This is commonly found in minimum price scenarios. For
example, a $100 flat price is charged for 1 to 100 minutes of
cellular phone usage, after which the customer is billed a
Break Unit Price of $1.00 per minute.

• Formula: Enter the value of the dynamic formula to be attached to the price
break header (PBH) line. At pricing time, the pricing engine calculates the price
of the item using the formula.
Notes
• A formula can be attached to the PBH line only when the Application
Method is Unit Price.

• You can only attach dynamic formulas to a PBH line, not static formulas.

• Recurring Value: This field appears only when Break Type is Range and
Application Method is Block Price. Enter a Recurring Value to define a price for
a defined interval. When a recurring value is used with price breaks, the
defined Block Price repeats for the interval defined in the Recurring Value field.
For example, to charge $10 per 100 items up to 1,000 items, enter 100 as the
Recurring Value.

4. Click Apply to save your changes. A Confirmation message appears if the price list
line was successfully created.


Note: Copying price breaks created in releases earlier than R12:
When you copy a price break line created in releases earlier than
R12, the price breaks are converted to the continuous price break
format standard in release R12 and newer. Since the conversion
results in changes to the price break setup and break calculations,
you should review the copied price break lines and make any
required changes to ensure correct pricing results.

Related Topics

Searching for Price Lists (HTML Interface)
On the Price Lists page, you can search by price list name, currency, dates, or status to
find information essential to your business such as:
• All price lists in a specific currency.

• Specific price lists.

• All price lists created on a specific date.

You can specify additional search criteria to narrow your results. For example, you can
specify the type of currency, such as US dollars (USD) to find only price lists with USD
as the base currency.
Once the search results are returned, you can view a summary of price lists or select a
specific price list to view additional details. In addition to viewing the price list, you can
choose to update a selected price list, or create a new price list.

Note: You must be assigned Maintain privileges in pricing security to
update or create a new price list. The Details icon is enabled if you have
view or update privileges assigned through pricing security.

To search for price lists:
1. Navigate to the Price Lists page.

Price Lists 2-55

Price Lists page

2. Select a search category from the Search list, and then enter additional criteria
(where applicable) to narrow your search results. Select from the following search
categories:
• Currency: Select a specific currency such as USD to find all modifier lists set up
in USD.

• Dates: Search by price list dates. These Start and End dates must match exactly
to the dates in the price list setup.

• Price List Name: Search by the price list name.

• Status: Search by Active or Inactive price lists.
• Active: Finds all Active modifier lists.

• Inactive: Finds all Inactive modifier lists.

3. Click Go to display the search results in a table.

4. Optionally, select a price list and click Update to update the price list, or click
Details to view price list details.

Related Topics
Searching for Price List Lines (HTML Interface), page 2-57


Searching for Price List Lines (HTML Interface)
You can search by the following criteria to find price list lines within a specific price list:
• Dates: Search by a specific date range.

• Items: Search by item(s).

To search for price list lines (HTML Interface):
1. Navigate to the Update Price List: Price List Lines page.

Update Price List: Price List Lines page

2. Select the search criteria:
• Dates: To search by a specific date range. Enter the Start Date and End Dates to
find price list lines within a specified date range.

• Items: To search by item or items. Define additional search criteria by selecting
Item Number or a combination of Item Number and UOM or Item Category.
You cannot search only by UOM.

3. Click Go to display the price list lines related to the price list.

Price Lists 2-57

Updating a Price List (HTML Interface)
In the Update Price List: General Information page, you can update general details
about the price list such as the description, currency, active status, and other
information.

interface. See Oracle Advanced Pricing Implementation Guide, Pricing
Security for more information. You must be assigned Maintain security
privileges to update the price list, otherwise only the Details icon is
enabled.

To update a price list:
1. Navigate to the Update Price List: General Information page.


Price List: General Information page

2. Make any required changes or corrections to the price list. You can update the
following fields:
• Freight Carrier/Terms

• Description

• Payment Terms

• Currency

• Active box: If selected, then the price list is active. If cleared, then the price list
is inactive and will not be available for pricing orders.

• Start/End Dates

• Comments

• Multi-currency Conversion

• Round To

Price Lists 2-59

3. In the Secondary Price List region, you can update any secondary price lists. If no
secondary price list is listed, click Add Another Row to add a secondary price list.

4. Click Apply to save the changes. A Confirmation note appears if the price list was
updated successfully.

Note: You should familiarize yourself with certain navigational
flow considerations in the HTML UI when updating, changing,
saving, or deleting data for price lists, modifiers, qualifiers, and
their related lines. For more information, see Navigation flow, page
C-1.

Related Topics
Updating Price List Lines (HTML Interface), page 2-60

Updating Price List Lines (HTML Interface)
Once a price list line has been created, you may need to occasionally update the
information, for example, to change the price or unit of measure. On the Update: Price
List Lines page, you can search for price list lines within the selected price list, display
the price list lines, and update information for a price list line.
To change price list line information across multiple price lists, for example, to change
the price of an item listed on several price lists, consider using the price list maintenance
feature. This saves you time from updating each price list separately.
In addition to updating a price list line, you can add or delete an existing line.

• You cannot update the Product level or Product fields. The Product
Description is read-only.

• Pricing security can affect the View and Maintain features
interface. For more information, see Pricing Security (HTML
Interface), page 3-63.

To update price list lines:
1. Navigate to the Update Price List: Price List Lines page. Price list lines related to the
price list display in a table.
Optionally, in the Search region, select the Search criteria to find specific price list


lines for the price list, then click Go to display the search results.

Update Price List: Price List Lines page

2. Select the price list line to be updated, and click Update to display the price list line
in the Update Price List Line page.

3. Update the information that requires changes, then click Apply to save your
changes.

Note: If you click Apply to save your changes and then click Cancel
on the List Lines Search page, the changes you have already saved
will not be cancelled.

Related Topics
Searching for Price List Lines (HTML Interface), page 2-57

Price Lists 2-61

Archiving, Deleting, and Purging Price List Information
You cannot delete a price list once it has been created. However, when a price list is no
longer required, you can enter an end date when the price list becomes inactive. You
can delete price list lines.
For price list lines, you can use the archive feature to archive price list lines from the
pricing application tables to archiving tables for long-term data storage. Once the
pricing data is copied to the archive tables, it is deleted from the application tables.

Note: Price list and modifier list header information is copied to archive
tables but is not deleted from the pricing application tables.

When the archived data is no longer required, you can purge the data from the archive
tables.

Related Topics
Archiving Pricing Entities, page 8-2
Purging Pricing Entities, page 8-8

Using the Price List Maintenance feature (HTML Interface)
Use the Price List Maintenance feature to make changes to price list lines for a single
price list or across many price lists. The frequency of these changes depend largely on
your business processes and how often you update your prices--daily, monthly,
quarterly, or annually. To make changes, search for the price list or price list lines to be
changed in the Price List Maintenance page, then do a detail change or bulk change to
update the value, formula or effective dates. Changes can be made for a single price list
or across multiple price lists for price list lines.
For example, you could adjust all plastic items by 3 percent, metal items by 5 percent,
and extend the end date from September 30, 2005, to December 31, 2005, for a Corporate
price list. Depending on your business requirements, click either the Detail Change or
Bulk Change button to make changes.
You can review your results before applying your changes, which is useful for
modeling your pricing scenarios before submitting the final changes.

Note: You must have Maintain privileges to make any updates. If you
are unable to access or update this window, you may not have the
appropriate access privileges. Consult your Pricing Administrator.

You can use Price List Maintenance to complete the following tasks:


• Search for price lists and price list lines
• Do simple or advanced searches for a single or multiple price lists/price list
lines.

• Display search results in a hierarchal format.

• Make changes to price lists and price list lines
• Do detail changes or bulk changes to change price list lines for a single price list
or across price lists.

• End date and create new line in Bulk Change.

• Duplicate line in Detail Change.

• Do mass maintenance across multiple price lists.

Note: You can only select those price list lines with Line Type
of Price List Line. Price list lines with Line Type of Price
Header cannot be selected. You cannot select price lists that
belong to a different pricing transaction entity (PTE) or source
system.

Searching for Price Lists and Price List Lines (HTML Interface)
Use the Price List Maintenance feature to do simple or advanced searches to find price
lists and price list lines:
• Search: Search by price list name (for example, Spring price list) and/or product.

• Advanced Search: Search by the following price list criteria: price list header, price
list line, pricing attribute(s), qualifier details, and secondary price list.

Note: You can also search for price lists from the Price Lists Search
page. See Searching for Price Lists (HTML Interface), page 2-55.

You can search across one price list or multiple price lists. For example:
• Find all price lists where the price list header specifies Start Date = 12 Dec 2000 and
Price List Header End Date = 12 Feb 2002

• Find all price lists where price list has a qualifier specifying Customer Name =
Vision Operations AND where a price list line specifies Product Attribute of Item
Number = telephone

Price Lists 2-63

• Find all price lists where one or more of the price list lines specifies Item Category =
Soda and Pricing Attribute = Diet

To do a simple search:
1. Navigate to the Price List Maintenance page.

Price List Maintenance page: Search region

2. In the Search region, select the search criteria:
• Price List: Enter a specific price list name, or click the Search icon and enter the
percent sign (%) to list all price lists. (You can also use partial search strings,
such as Pr%, in the Search By field.)

• Product: Select a product attribute such as All Items, Item Number, or Item
Category and a corresponding Product to search by Product criteria. You must
provide either Price List or Product or a combination of both to perform a
search.

3. When you have completed your entries, click Go to display the search results.
The search results display detailed information about each price list including price
list lines, pricing attributes, and qualifiers. Click the Expand icon to view the price
list lines and qualifiers for the selected price list.


Note: Only price list lines can be updated in this feature. You
cannot update price break lines in Price List Maintenance.

To do an advanced search:
1. Navigate to the Price List Maintenance page.

2. Click Advanced Search to display the Advanced Search page.

Advanced Search page

3. Select your search criteria.

Note: Click the Search icon (where applicable) to display the
available values for each field.

4. When your entries are selected, click Search to display the search results. The search
results display in the Price List Maintenance page.

5. From the search results, select the check box next to the price list and/or price list
line(s) to be changed. You can change pricing entities such as Value, Pricing
Formula, and the Start and End Dates of price list lines.

Price Lists 2-65

When a price list is selected, all the price list lines in the search results for that price
list will be available for change.

Note: You can only select those price list lines with Line Type of
Price List Line. Price list lines with Line Type of Price Header
cannot be selected. You cannot select price lists that belong to a
different PTE or source system.

To view the search results:
The search results appear in the Results region of the Price List Maintenance page; the
price list is the top-most node. Click the Expand icon (+) next to the price list name to
view additional details nested beneath the node. For a price list, you can view related
information pertaining to the selected price list such as price list lines, qualifiers, and
related information. To view a particular price list if more than one is listed, click the
Focus icon. Use the Focus icon to select a particular entity to examine it in more detail.
• Price Lists Node
The top node is the Price Lists node if your results include more than one price list.
If a single price list is returned in your search results, then the name of the price list
appears as the top node.
If you click a price list node, for example, Corporate Price List, then two additional
nodes appear: a Lines node and a Qualifier node. Each row under this node
identifies the price list name and its description.

• Lines Node
Click the Lines node to display the price list lines (of the price list) that meet the
search criteria. Each price list line displays the item number, item description, unit
of measure, value, static or dynamic formula, start date and end date. If no line
criteria such as lines, products and pricing attributes are entered in the search
criteria, all the price list lines of the price list are displayed.
Also, if a price list line has associated price breaks or pricing attributes, the Expand
icon (+) displays next to the product attribute value. Click the Expand icon (+) for
the product attribute value to display the Breaks and Pricing Attributes node.

• Price Breaks Node
Click the Price Breaks node to display all the price breaks for the product attribute
value. Each row displays the individual price breaks along with the value.

• Pricing Attributes Node
Click the Pricing Attributes node of the product attribute value to display the
pricing attributes that match the query criteria. If no pricing attribute criteria is
entered in the Search Criteria, all the pricing attributes of the price list line display.


Each row displays the pricing attribute and pricing attribute value.

• Qualifiers Node
Click the Qualifiers node to display all the qualifiers of the price list that meet the
search criteria. If no qualifier criteria is entered in the Search Criteria, all the
qualifiers of the price list appear. Each qualifier displays the qualifier attribute and
qualifier attribute value in the Description column.

Making Detail Changes across a Selected Group of Lines
For Detail Changes, updates must be made for each price list line separately. For
example, to increase the price for selected items on a price list, you would have to
manually update each price list line separately.
If a product has overlapping dates on a price list, an error message appears; for
example, if you end date a price list line when the item is no longer sold.

To make detail changes:
1. After you have completed your search in the Price List Maintenance page, select the
price lists or price list lines to be changed.

2. Click Detail Change to display the Detail Change: Make Changes page.

Detail Change: Make Changes page

On this page, you can update selected price list lines. To view additional details
about a price list line, click Show. For each price list line, you can make the changes
to the existing line. You can also click the Duplicate Line icon and then make
changes to the new price list line.

Price Lists 2-67

3. To change the value of a price list line, for example, to increase its price, select the
Type of Value Change. Select one of the following values:
• No Change: The value of all the price list line remains the same.

• Replace Value: The value of the price list line will be changed to the value
entered in the Value Change By field.

• Amount: The value of the price list line will be increased/decreased by the
value entered in the Value Change By field.

• Percent: The value of the price list lines will be increased/decreased by the
percentage value entered in the Value Change By field.

• Clear Value: The value of all the price list lines is changed to Null.

4. If you selected Replace Value, Amount, or Percent in the Type of Value Change
field, enter a value or percentage in the Value Change By field.
The Changed Value field displays the changed value after you have completed your
changes and click Refresh Data. For example, if the original value is 100, and you
enter the following values: 110:
• Type of Value Change: Increase by Percent

• Value Change By: 10

After you click Refresh Data, the Changed Value field displays 110.

5. Enter a Changed Start Date to replace the existing start date. You can then make
further changes to the Changed Value for this price list line.

6. Enter a Changed End Date to replace the price list line end date.
If the price list line has a dynamic formula or static formula attached, the formula
name is displayed in either the Static Formula or Dynamic Formula field.

7. To update or add a static or dynamic formula for a price list line, make your
changes in the Static Formula or Dynamic Formula field. Select only one type of
formula.

Note: To update or add a formula value, click the Search icon next
to the Changed Static Formula or Changed Dynamic Formula fields
to view the available static and dynamic formulas.

8. Click the Duplicate Line icon to duplicate the current line. You can change values of
the current and the duplicated line.


9. Click Refresh Data or Continue process the changes.

Example of Detail Change:
This example shows how to use the Detail Change page to make the following changes
to price list lines for a fictitious price list (Corporate):
• Increase the price for price list line Item A by 10 percent.

• Add a formula to calculate price for price list line Item B.

• Create a new price list line for Item C and change the Start Date and the End Date.

1. From the Price List Maintenance page, search for the Corporate price list.

2. Select the Corporate price list and click Detail Change to display the Detail Change
page.

3. Select or enter the following values for each price list line to be changed:
• To increase the price for price list line Item A by 10 percent:
• Type of Value Change = Percent

• Value Change By = 10

• To add a formula to calculate price for price list line Item B:
Click the Changed Static Formula or the Changed Dynamic Formula icon to
select one of the available formulas. Select one formula type or the other, not
both.

• To create a new price list line for Item C and change the Start and End Dates:
• Click the Duplicate Line icon for Item C to duplicate the price list line.
When duplicating a line, remember to enter an end date for the previous
line.

• For the new line, enter the new Start Date and optionally, the End Date.
When duplicating a line, ensure that the effective dates for a price list line
do not overlap. Change the effective dates of the overlapping line to make
the price list line unique. The New Line box is selected to indicate new
lines.

4. Click Refresh Data to view all the updated and newly-created price list lines.

5. If satisfied with your changes, click Continue to go to the Detail Change: Review
Changes page.

Price Lists 2-69

6. Click Finish to save the changes. A Confirmation message confirms if all changes to
the price list lines have been saved.

Making Bulk Changes across a Selected Group of Lines
The Bulk Change feature enables you to make the same updates across all selected price
list lines: for example, to adjust the price by $5. This saves time from updating each
price list line separately. These changes are made in the Bulk Change: Make Changes
page.
Unlike the Detail Change feature, which requires you to update each price list line
separately, the Bulk Change feature enables you make your changes once and update
all selected price list lines. For example, bulk change could be used to:
• Adjust all lines on Corporate Price list and Spring Price List by 10 percent

• Adjust all lines on VIP price list and the first two price list lines of Fall price list (out
of 10 price list lines), and change the end date to 12-Dec-2006.

When making changes to the price list line, you can end date the existing line and create
a new price list line with the changes. The existing line will be end-dated, and the
changes are reflected only in the new line.
In Bulk Change, you can choose to make a date change by selecting either the Override
option or End Date and Create New option from the Action region. When end dating
and creating a new line, you can also retain the existing start and end dates. Otherwise,
they can override the start and end date of the existing line.
If a product on a price list has overlapping dates, the system will display an error; for
example, if you end date a price list line when the item is no longer sold.

To make bulk changes across a selected group of line:
1. After you have completed your search in the Price List Maintenance page, select the
price lists or price lines to update.

2. Click Bulk Change to display the Bulk Change: Make Changes page. The Bulk
Change feature enables you to do the same change across all the selected lines
rather than to update each line separately (Detail Change).


Bulk Change: Make Changes page

The selected price list lines display in the Price List Lines region of the Bulk Change:
Make Changes page. To view additional details about a price list line, click Show.
In the Maintenance Criteria region, you can make changes to the effective Start and
End Dates, Formula, and Value and apply theses changes to the price list lines.

3. In the Action region, select one of the following:
• End Date and Create New: Each selected price list line is end-dated and a new
price list line is created with the changes specified in the Effective Date,
Formula and Value regions. The Start Date or End Date for each price list line is
updated.
This feature is useful for keeping a version history of a price list line. If one item
has multiple price list lines for the same item (with different effectivity dates),
the price list line with the most forward effectivity dates will be end dated and
a new line will be created. Any changes will be reflected on the new line.

• Override: Each selected price list line will be updated with the changes you
specify in the Effective Date, Formula and Value regions.

4. Select the Type of Date Change:
• No Change: The dates remain the same.

Price Lists 2-71

• Change Date: The dates are changed to those entered in the Start Date, End
Date, New Line Start Date, and New Line End Date.

5. If you selected Change Date in the Type of Date Change field, enter the new dates
in the following fields:
• Start Date: This changes the start date of all the price list lines.

• End Date: This changes the end date of all the price list lines.

• If you selected End Date and Create New in Action region, these additional
fields appear:
• New Line Start Date: This date changes the start date of all the new price
list lines created as a result of selecting the Action: End Date and Create
New.

• New Line End Date: This date changes the end date of all the new price list
lines created as a result of selecting the Action: End Date and Create New.

• Retain Existing Start Date: If selected, you do not need to enter a Start Date for
the existing line. If deselected, the date in the Start Date field replaces the
current Start Date.

• Retain Existing End Date check box: If selected, you do not need to enter an End
Date for the existing line. If deselected, the date in the End Date field will
replace the current End Date.

6. In the Formula region, select the Type of Formula Change:
• No change: The formulas remain the same.

• Remove Static and Dynamic Formula: You can select from Any Formula or
from available formula names. If you select a particular formula, then the
matching formula attached to the price list lines will be removed. If Any
Formula is selected, all formulas will be removed from price list lines.

• Replace All Formulas with Dynamic Formula: The Dynamic Formula of all the
price list lines will be changed to the Formula entered in the Name field.

• Replace All Formulas with Static Formula: The Static Formula of all the price
list lines will be changed to the Formula entered in the Name field.

7. Select the Formula Name. Do not select a Formula Name if you selected No Change
from the Type of Data Change list. Click the Search icon to display all the dynamic
and static formulas.


Note: Formulas with Modifier Value as a formula type will not
appear in the List of Values.

8. In the Value region, select how the value should be changed for the selected price
list lines:
• No Change: The value of all the price list lines remains the same.

• Replace Value: The value of all the price list lines will be changed to the value
entered in the Change By field.

• Amount: The value of all the price list lines will be increased/decreased by the
value entered in the Change By field.

• Percent: The value of all the price list lines will be increased/decreased by the
percentage value entered in the Change By field.

• Clear Value: The value of all the price list lines is changed to Null.

9. When you have completed your entries, click Refresh Data to view your changes.

Note: Any validation errors appear at the top of the page. You may
be able to resolve the error by changing the start and end date
values for the price list line.
The Bulk Change: Make Changes page displays both the new and
original values.

10. Click Continue to review the updated price list lines:

• Changed Value (view-only): Displays the changed value if you entered a value
for Type of Value Change and Value Change By.
For example, if the original Value = 100, and you selected Type of Value Change
= Increase by Percent, and Value Change By = 10 and clicked Apply, the new
Changed Value that displays is 110.

• Changed Start/End Date: Displays the changed start and end dates.

• Changed Static Formula: Displays the changes static formula.

• Changed Dynamic Formula: Displays the changed dynamic formula.

11. To make revisions (for Bulk Changes), change your entries in the Maintenance
Criteria region and click Continue or Refresh Data to process your changes.

Price Lists 2-73

Note: If you click Refresh Data, the changes are applied to the
original value displayed on the price list lines in the search results,
not to the price list line values that are currently in the Bulk Change
Window. Therefore, if you updated your price list by 10 percent
from 100 to 110 and you decide you want to update to 20 percent,
the price is now 120, not 132.

To view validation errors:
Validation errors appear at the top of the page where the error occurred. Depending on
the error, you can change the values in this price list line to resolve the error. Click
Refresh Data again to ensure the error disappears.

Note: Whenever you change the maintenance criteria and click Refresh
Data, the changes are applied to the price list lines, not to the price list
lines values.

Examples of Using Bulk Changes:
The following examples describe how to change values for price list lines using the bulk
change feature:
Example 1: Bulk Change to increase all price list lines on the Corporate Price List
and the Spring Price List by 10 percent
From the Price List Maintenance page, do a search to find the Corporate Price List and
Spring Price List. For example, you could do an Advanced Search using a qualifier such
as Order Type = Standard to display related price lists. Click Search to view the results.
1. Select the Corporate and Spring price lists from the results and click Bulk Change to
display the Bulk Change: Make Changes page.

2. Select the following values:
• Override box = Selected

• Type of Value Change = Percent

• Change By = 10

3. Click Refresh Data to view the new changes. All the price list lines of the Corporate
and Spring price lists display with the changes applied as above.

4. Click Continue to display the Bulk Change: Review Changes page.

5. Click Finish to save the changes. A Confirmation message displays on the Price List
Maintenance page.


Example 2: Bulk Change to override the end date for selected lines
The following example shows how Bulk Change can be used to adjust all lines on the
VIP price list and the first two price list lines of the Fall price list (out of 10 price list
lines). The end date of the price list lines will also be changed to 12-Dec-2003.
1. In the Advanced Search page, do a search to find the VIP and Fall price lists.

2. Select the VIP price list. For the Fall price list, click the Expand icon to view all the
price list lines, then select the first two list lines.

3. Click Bulk Change to display the Bulk Change: Make Changes page. In the
Maintenance Criteria region, select the following values:

Field Name Value

Override box Selected

Type of Date Change Change Dates

Existing End Date December 12, 2003

4. Click Refresh Data to review your changes.

5. All the lines of VIP price list and first two price list lines of the Fall price list are
displayed in a table with the changes applied as above.

6. Click Finish to display the Bulk Change: Review Changes page.

7. Click Finish to save the changes. A confirmation message is also displayed.

Example 3: Bulk Change to change the price of an item by 10 percent
The following example shows how the bulk change feature can be used to adjust the
price for an item category, for example, orange juice, for all price lists. The current
prices will be end-dated by May 31, and the new prices (discounted 10 percent) will
take effect from June 1, 2006, to August 3, 2006.
1. In the Advance Search page, select the following search values:

Field Name Value

Product Attribute Item Category

Product Value Orange Juice

Price Lists 2-75

2. Click Search to view your search results.

3. Select all price lists and click Bulk Change to display the Bulk Change: Make
Changes page.

4. In the Maintenance Criteria region, select the following values:

Field Name Value

End Date and Create New Selected

Type of Date Change Change Dates

Existing End Date May 31, 2006

Retain Existing Start Date box Selected

New Start Date June 1, 2006

New End Date August 31, 2006

Type of Value Change Percent

Change By 10

5. Click Apply. All the lines of the Corporate price list are displayed with the changes
applied as above.

6. Click Next to go to the Bulk Change: Review Changes page.

7. Click Submit to save the changes. A confirmation message confirms that the
changes have been made.

Example 4: Use Bulk Change to update an item to a Dynamic Formula
The following example shows how Bulk Change can be used to update the price of item
AS54888 on Vision Operations' price lists to a Dynamic Formula (F1) by clearing the
Value and attaching a dynamic formula.
1. In the Search Price Lists region of the Price List Maintenance page, enter the search
criteria:


Field Name Value

Name Vision Operations

Product Attribute Item Number

Product Value AS54888

2. Click Go to view the results.

3. Select the Vision Operations price list and then click Bulk Change to display the
Bulk Change: Make Changes page.

4. In the Maintenance Criteria region, select the following values:

Field Name Value

Override Selected

Type of Formula Change Replace All Formulas with Dynamic
Formula

Name F1

Type of Value Change Clear Value

5. Click Refresh Data to review the applied changes.

6. Click Continue to display the Bulk Change: Review Changes page.

7. Click Finish to save the changes. A confirmation message confirms that the changes
have been made.

Price Lists 2-77

3
Modifiers

Overview of Modifiers
Modifiers enable you to set up price adjustments (for example, discounts and
surcharges), benefits (for example, free goods and coupons), and freight and special
charges that can be applied immediately to pricing requests or accrued for later
disbursement. Using modifiers, you can:
• Set up a modifier list with multiple modifier lines that define the terms of the price
adjustment.

• Create eligibility rules for modifiers by assigning list and line level qualifiers.

• Define modifiers that are incompatible with other modifiers.

• Create exclusive modifiers.

• Create cascading modifiers.

• Accrue monetary and nonmonetary benefits.

• Create monetary or usage limits that a customer can receive for a promotion, deal,
or other modifier.

• If you use the multicurrency feature with price lists and
modifiers, see Creating a Multicurrency Conversion List, page
6-6.

• You can only view or update a modifier in your pricing
transaction entity. The profile QP: Pricing Transaction Entity
must match the pricing transaction entity of the modifier. You
can only view or update a modifier in your source system. The

Modifiers 3-1

profile QP: Source System Code must match the source system
of the modifier. Otherwise, the modifier is view-only.

Using the HTML User Interface with Modifier Lists and Modifier
You can use this HTML format for many tasks that were previously available only
using the Oracle Forms-based interface. Tasks that can be completed in HTML are
identified with the words HTML Interface in the task title, for example, Creating a
Modifier List (HTML Interface).

Related Topics

Modifier Concepts
Using modifiers, you can set up price adjustments, benefits, freight and special charges,
and promotional limits to control spending or usage. You can define simple discounts
and surcharges as well as more advanced deals and promotions. The following list
describes the main modifier concepts and related entities:
• Modifier lists contain one or more modifiers. Modifiers have list level and line level
components. Each list level must have one or more lines associated with it.

• By defining qualifiers at the list and line levels, you define a customer's eligibility
for the modifier.

• Control features that influence modifiers are products and product groups, pricing
attributes, phases, incompatibility groups, levels, and buckets.

• The use of modifiers can result in volume breaks, additional buy/get products, and
benefits.

The following diagram provides an overview of modifiers and related concepts, such as
modifiers, modifier lists, and qualifiers:


Modifier Overview

Modifier Lists and Lines
Using modifier lists, you can create groupings of price adjustments, benefits, and freight
and special charges that you offer and report together to meet various business needs.
At the header level of the modifier list, you define criteria that is common to the
modifier lines.
Create modifier lines for a modifier list to define the type of price adjustments, benefits,
or freight and special charges that the pricing engine applies to pricing requests.

Adjustment Method
The adjustment method (also known as the application method in the forms-based UI)

Modifiers 3-3

determines how the modifier applies the price adjustment. You can select from the
following adjustment methods:
• Percent: Creates a percentage price adjustment on each unit based on the
percentage entered in the Value field. For example, to apply a 10 percent discount,
select percent as the adjustment method.

• Amount: Creates a fixed price adjustment on each unit using the amount entered in
the Value field.

• Lumpsum: Creates a price adjustment for this lump sum amount on the entire line.

• New price: Overrides the selling price of this item and makes the new price
(defined in the Value field) the new selling price. Creates a price adjustment for the
difference between the list price and the new price.

The following table shows examples of how the pricing engine uses the adjustment
method to calculate the extended selling price of an order line:

List Item Quantity Adjustme Value Price Extended Selling Price
Pric Ordered nt Adjustment
e Method

10 Item 200 Amount 5 5 per unit 1,000
A

10 Item 200 Percent 5 5% per unit 1,900
A

10 Item 200 New Price 5 5 1,000
A

10 Item 200 Lumpsum 5 5 off for the 1,995
A entire line

The adjustment method for a modifier line depends on the level selected for that
modifier line: Order, Line, or Group of Lines. The following tables show the adjustment
methods available for each level: Order Level, Line Level, or Group of Lines. The
Formula column shows if you can use a formula for the value of the modifier:

Level Modifier Type Adjustment Method Use with
Available Formula?

Order Level Discount Percent Yes


Level Modifier Type Adjustment Method Use with
Available Formula?

Order Level Surcharge Percent Yes

Order Level Freight/Special Charges Lumpsum Yes

Line Level Discount Percent, Amount, New Price, Yes
or Lumpsum

Line Level Surcharge Percent, Amount, New Price, Yes
or Lumpsum

Line Level Freight/Special Charges Percent, Amount, Lumpsum Yes

Line Level Other Item Discount Percent, Amount, New Price, No
(Get) or Lumpsum

Line Level Price Break Percent, Amount, New Price, Yes
or Lumpsum

Line Level Promotional Good Percent, Amount, New Price, No
(Get) or Lumpsum

Group of Lines Discount Percent, Amount, New Price, Yes
Level or Lumpsum

Group of Lines Surcharge Percent, Amount, New Price, Yes
Level or Lumpsum

Group of Lines Other Item Discount Percent, Amount, New Price, No
Level (Get) or Lumpsum

Group of Lines Price Break Percent, Amount, New Price, Yes
Level or Lumpsum

Group of Lines Promotional Good Percent, Amount, New Price, No
Level (Get) or Lumpsum

Lumpsum Adjustment Method with Group of Lines
When Lumpsum is selected as the adjustment method for a modifier line, the pricing
engine creates a price adjustment for the defined lumpsum amount. The lumpsum can
be based on group quantity (sum of item quantities) or an item amount (a monetary
amount).

Modifiers 3-5

Note: When the modifier is automatic, the lumpsum is treated as a
lumpsum for the entire order. When the modifier is manual, the
lumpsum is applied to the line. If the manual modifier is applied to the
next line on the order, then an additional lumpsum is applied to the
order.
For example, consider a lumpsum modifier of 1000 that is applied to an
order with two lines. When the modifier is automatic, the order has a
total discount of 1000. When the modifier is manual and applied to the
first line, then a lumpsum discount of 1000 is applied. Now apply the
lumpsum modifier to the second line, and a discount of 1000 is applied
to the second. Therefore, the order has a lumpsum discount of 2000;
whereas, when the modifier is automatic, no matter how many order
lines, the order has a lumpsum discount of 1000.

Two examples are provided to compare how the lumpsum amount is calculated if
either 1) Group Quantity or 2) Item Amount is selected.
The following Discount list modifier is used in each example.

Level Modifier Product Product Value Adjustment
Type (line Attribute Attribute Method
level) Value

Group of Discount All Items All 1000 Lumpsum
Lines

Lumpsum calculations (Group Quantity Selected)
The following example demonstrates how the adjustment amount is calculated when
the Lumpsum modifier is applied against the group quantity of an order:

Line Item Quantity Price Adjustment Amount Calculated when
Lumpsum Modifier Applied

1 AS54888 10 $80 $20 * 10 qty

2 AS54999 40 $20 $20 * 40 qty

The pricing engine calculates the adjustment amount as follows:
1. The pricing engine calculates the Group Quantity value, which is the sum of all
item quantity lines. Therefore, the Group value is 50 (10 + 40).
Group value for Line 1: 50


Group value for Line 2: 50

2. To obtain the adjusted amount, the value (from the Value field of the modifier - in
this case, 1,000) is divided by the group value (50):
• Line 1: 1,000/50 = 20

• Line 2: 1,000/50 = 20
The adjustment amount per quantity is $20. The total adjusted amount for the
entire order is $1,000: Line 1 is $200, and Line 2 is $800.

Lumpsum Calculations (Item Amount Selected)
The following example demonstrates how an adjustment for lumpsum modifier is
calculated based on the item amount (the monetary amount for each item). Suppose the
Lumpsum modifier is applied against the following items on a sample sales order:

Line Item Quantity Price Adjustment Amount

1 AS54888 10 $80 50

2 AS54999 40 $20 12.5

The engine calculates the lumpsum based on item amount as follows: value divided (/)
by group value:
1. Group value is calculated as follows:
Group value = Sum of all lines' unit price * quantity/unit price per line:
Total group value= $80*10 + $20*40 = 1600
• Group value for Line 1 = 1600/80 = 20

• Group value for Line 2 = 1600/20 = 80

2. To obtain the adjusted amount per unit, the value (from the Value field of the
modifier, in this case, 1,000) is divided by the group value for each line:
• Line 1: 1,000/20 = 50

• Line 2: 1,000/80 = 12.5
Therefore, the adjustment amount for the first line is 50 and for the second line
80.

Modifiers 3-7

Using Modifiers with Negative Unit Selling Prices
A Discount or Surcharge modifier can be used to adjust the final unit selling price,
regardless of whether the item list price is a positive or negative value.
Example 1: Positive priced item
If a product is $100 and the customer gets a 40 percent discount, then the customer gets
a $40 discount, which means the price would be $60.
The following calculations are used to get this result:
List price * modifier percent = line discount amount
List price - line discount amount = line price
Example 2: Negative priced item
If a product is <-$100> and the customer gets a 40 percent discount, then the customer
gets a <-$40> discount, which results in a price of <-$60>.

Note: The brackets (<>) indicate a negative price.

The following calculations are used to get this result:
<list price> * modifier percent = <line discount amount>
<list price> - <line discount amount> = <list price> + line discount amount = <line price>
Example 3: Surcharge with negative-priced items
The following example shows the results when a Surcharge modifier is applied to a
price list line with a negative price:
1. Create a simple modifier (ABC-MN) with type = Surcharge of 10 percent.

2. Create a price list line (ABC-N) with a value of <-$100>.

3. Enter a sales order with price list ABC-N and the item of the price list ABC-N.

4. Save the order.

5. The surcharge is applied, and the unit selling price is <$-110.00>.

Incompatibility Processing
When a customer is eligible for more than one modifier, you can use incompatibility
processing to determine which of the modifiers the pricing engine should select and
apply to an order or order line. For more information, see Changing Modifier
Incompatibility, page 3-100.


Buckets
When setting up a modifier, you can assign a modifier line to a particular bucket, such
as Bucket 1, 2, or 3, to define cascading price adjustments. This setup controls how
discounts and other benefits are calculated.

Manual Modifiers
For manual modifiers, the modifier adjustment is not applied automatically. Rather,
you must manually select the adjustment to be applied to an order line. The following
modifier types can be manual:
• Discounts

• Freight and special charges

• Price breaks

• Surcharges

Manual modifiers can also be used with price break lines. You can set manual modifiers
at the order, line, and group of lines levels, and can override them.
Pricing Buckets with Manual Modifiers
Pricing buckets can be used with manual modifiers at the line or group of line level for
the discounts, surcharges, freight and special charges, and price break modifiers. You
can use this feature if the profile option QP: Allow Buckets for Manual Modifiers is set
to Yes.
Once created, the manual modifier can be selected from the View Adjustments window
in Order Management or the Price Adjustments window in Oracle Quoting. If a manual
modifier is applied in an earlier bucket, then all subsequent adjustments will be
recalculated. Alternately, when you overtype the selling price on the order line in Order
Management, you can only apply manual adjustments in the null bucket. See the Oracle
Order Management User's Guide, Pricing chapter and the Oracle Quoting User's Guide for
more information on using manual modifiers.

Events
Events are points in the process flow when the calling application sends a pricing
request to the pricing engine (similar to a workflow event). The information that the
pricing engine returns, for example, base prices, price adjustments, promotions, or
freight charges, depends on the pricing phases of the event.
For example, if you need to price sales orders at shipment, use the Reprice Line event
and insert the Reprice Line workflow activity into the order process workflow to invoke
the repricing. The pricing engine uses the price list and modifiers that are in effect at
order entry to meet booking requirements such as credit check.

Modifiers 3-9

Accruals
You can create monetary and non-monetary accruals. For example, a customer accrues
10 airline frequent flyer credits for each item they purchase. The pricing engine uses the
accruals in price calculations and passes them to the calling application.
Accruals:
• Do not affect the selling price of an order line.

• Do not appear as chargeable items on invoices.

• Create an adjustment record in the database.

You can:
• Assign expiration dates to accruals.

• Mark accruals as redeemed.

• Assign monetary accruals to buckets. Since accruals do not affect the selling price of
an order line, the pricing engine does not include them in bucket calculations.
However, it uses bucket numbers to determine the price from which to calculate the
accrual value.

Accruals Using Buckets
The following table shows how accruals are calculated using buckets. In this table:
• The Price Adjustment column shows the value of each modifier.

• The Bucket Subtotal column shows the total value of all modifiers for the bucket.

• The Selling Price column shows the price at the beginning of the calculation and
after the application of each bucket subtotal.

• The value Null in a cell means that the cell has no value; the value Null Bucket
means that the modifier is grouped in the null bucket:

Bucket Modifier Price Bucket Subtotal Selling Price
Adjustment

Null Null Null Null 100.00

Null Null Null Null Null

1 Null Null (7.00) 93.00


Bucket Modifier Price Bucket Subtotal Selling Price
Adjustment

2 Null Null (5.00) 88.00

3 Null Null (6.80) 81.20

Null Bucket Null Null (15.00) 66.20

Null Null Null Null Null

1 10% accrual (10.00) Null Null



Example of Nonmonetary Accruals
The following is an example of a setup for a non-monetary accrual.
If an accrual conversion rate is used, then the value equals the monetary value of the
points. The value in the Accrual Value field is calculated using the Benefit Quantity
value * the Accrual Conversion Rate value:
• 5 * 0.5 = 2.5

Field Value

Volume Type Item Quantity

Break Type Recurring

Operator Between

UOM EA

Value From 2

Value to 99999999

Adjustment Method Lumpsum

Modifiers 3-11

Field Value

Accrual Value 2.5

Benefit Quantity 5

Benefit UOM PN (for Points)

Accrual Conversion Rate 0.5

Qualifier Groups and Grouping Numbers
When qualifiers are assigned to qualifier groups, all the qualifiers in the qualifier group
are attached to the modifier. Before you attach multiple qualifier groups, you must
indicate how the process should coordinate the grouping numbers.

Cross Order Volume
You can provide extra benefits to customers after they place a certain amount of
business with you. The cross order volume feature allows you to create modifiers that
are qualified across an accumulation of orders and applied when a customer meets
certain volume levels. It accumulates and sums order amount, item quantity, and item
amount across the orders of each customer.

Related Topics
Cross Order Volume Load concurrent program, page 11-6
Cross Order Volume Report, page 11-7
Using Qualifier Grouping Numbers across Qualifier Groups, page 5-16

Creating a Modifier List
Using modifier lists, you can create groupings of price adjustments, benefits, and freight
and special charges that you offer and report together to meet various business needs.
At the list level, you define criteria such as the modifier currency that applies to the
modifier and any modifier lines you add to the modifier list.

Note: Oracle Advanced Pricing also provides an HTML-based UI for
setting up and maintaining most modifier and modifier line types. For
information on using the HTML UI with modifiers, see Using Modifiers


in the HTML User Interface, page 3-62.

You can create the following modifier list types:
• Deal

• Discount list

• Freight and special charge list

• Promotion

• Surcharge list

To create a modifier list:
1. Navigate to the Advanced Pricing-Define Modifier window.

Note: If you cannot query or update the modifier after saving it or
exiting, consult your Pricing Administrator for access privileges.
Your security privileges may not allow you to access this window.

Modifiers 3-13

Advanced Pricing - Define Modifier window

2. On the Main tab, select the a Modifier Type.

3. Enter a modifier list value in the Number field.

4. Select or clear the Active check box. The pricing engine evaluates the modifier only
if the Active check box is selected (inactive modifiers are not evaluated further by
the pricing engine). The pricing engine performs more effectively if the Active
check box is cleared for expired modifiers. You can query inactive modifier lists.

5. Select or clear the Automatic check box:
• If selected, the Automatic check box is also selected at the line level, and the
pricing engine automatically applies the modifier.

• If cleared, then the modifier is considered a manual modifier and the
adjustment must be applied manually rather than automatically.

Note: If the Automatic option is enabled at the modifier list
level, you can still manually apply line types of Discount,
Surcharge, and Freight/Special Charges by clearing the
Automatic check box at the line level.

6. Enter a value in the Name field to identify the modifier.


The modifier name should be unique across all Pricing Transaction Entities (PTEs),
otherwise an error occurs. For example, if a modifier named Corporate is created in
the Order Management PTE, an error message appears if you create a Corporate
modifier in the Purchasing PTE.

7. A Global check box appears if the Pricing Security Control Profile is set to ON. If
the check box is selected, the modifier list can be used by all operating units for
pricing transactions. If cleared, the modifier's use is restricted to the operating unit
of the user creating the modifier list.

8. Enter a version if the modifier Type is Promotion or Deal.

9. Enter the Start and End Date range for the modifier.

• When a qualifier is attached to a price list or modifier header,
the effective dates of that qualifier determine the effective dates
for the price list or modifier list, not the effective dates defined
in the price list or modifier list window. For example, suppose
you create a price list with an effective start date of
23-NOV-2005 and no end date; then you create a qualifier at the
header level with effective dates of 10-NOV-2005 and
12-NOV-2005 for customer Computer Service and Rentals.
However, after 12-NOV-2005, the price list will not be valid for
Computer Service and Rentals or any other customer.

• If you do not enter dates and select Active, the list is effective
from the creation date.

10. Choose one of the following:

• Select a currency. If a currency is selected such as US dollars (USD), the sales
order must match the modifier currency to determine pricing for the order.

• Optionally, select Optional Currency to leave the Currency field in the modifier
list blank. This option can be selected for modifiers where currency is not used
as a criteria to select modifiers for the order. For more information, see Optional
Currency, page 3-65.

11. Enter a description for the modifier list. If the modifier list Type is Promotion or
Deal, select the Advanced tab.

12. Save your work.

On the Advanced tab
13. If the modifier list Type is Promotion or Deal, select the Advanced tab.

Modifiers 3-15

Advanced Pricing - Define Modifier window: Advanced tab

Note: The modifier list types of Promotion and Deal have a
parent-child relationship for reporting purposes. A Deal modifier
list must be associated with a parent Promotion by providing the
promotion name and version. Since this association is for reporting
purposes, information that you define on the promotion is
independent of and does not affect the information on the Deal
modifier.

14. Enter the Parent Number and Parent Version to specify the promotion to which the
deal is associated.

15. Select the Ask for box to create an Ask for modifier. This means the customer must
specifically request that the modifier benefit be applied (for example, by providing
a special discount number), otherwise it will not be applied. The Ask for box is only
available for modifier list types of Deal and Promotion.

Note: If the pricing engine selects multiple modifiers to apply to an
order line, Ask for promotions receive a higher preference than
other modifiers.

16. In the Date Type I field, specify Order Date and a date range.


17. In the Date Type II field, specify Scheduled Ship Date and a date range. The Order
Date and Scheduled Ship Date are passed by Order Management and cannot be
changed. If you enter dates for both Order Date and Scheduled Ship Date, the sales
order must meet both dates to be eligible for the modifier

18. Save your work.

Note: The same results can be achieved by creating qualifiers for
Order Date and Ship Date and attaching them to the modifier.
These qualifiers are sourced and the user can override the mapping
rules for these qualifiers.

On the Other tab
19. This tab displays the following information including details about any related
sales agreement:

Advanced Pricing - Define Modifier window: Other tab

• List Source Document Number: This is the number of the sales agreement
associated with the modifier.

• List Source Code: Displays the code associated with the modifier source. For
example, BSO indicates sales agreement.

• Pricing Transaction Entity (PTE): Displays the pricing transaction entity

Modifiers 3-17

associated with the modifier. The Pricing Transaction Entity value defaults
from the PTE that created the modifier. This field cannot be updated.

• Source System Code: Displays the source system code of the modifier, such as
QP for pricing.

Note: The values for the Pricing Transaction Entity and Source
System Code fields are provided by default based on the PTE
and Source System profile options. For more information on
profile options, see the Oracle Advanced Pricing Implementation
Guide. The Pricing Transaction Entity and Source System fields
appear for all modifiers, regardless of whether a related Sales
Agreement is available.

• Shareable box: Indicates if the modifier is shared or not. If non-shareable (the
default), then this modifier is specific to that sales agreement and cannot be
used with other sales agreements. If shared, the modifier is not exclusive to the
sales agreement and can be selected for use with other agreements. You cannot
update this value.

Related Topics
Creating List Level Qualifiers, page 3-18
Overview of Promotional Limits, page 3-109

Creating List-Level Qualifiers
You can create qualifiers to determine the eligibility of who can receive modifiers at the
list level. If an order is not eligible for a modifier list, it is not eligible for the line-level
modifiers of that list even if the lines have qualifiers for which the order is eligible.

Warning: The effective dates defined for the qualifier determine the
effective dates for the price list or modifier list, not the effective dates
defined in the price list or modifier list window (when the qualifier is
attached to the price list or modifier). For example, suppose you create
a price list with an effective start date of 23-NOV-2007 and no end date.
Then you create a qualifier at the header level with effective dates of
10-NOV-2007 and 12-NOV-2007 for customer Computer Service and
Rentals. However, after 12-NOV-2007, the price list will not be valid for
Computer Service and Rentals or any other customer.


To create list-level qualifiers:
1. Navigate to the Advanced Pricing - Define Modifier window.

2. On the Main tab, click List Qualifiers to display the Qualifier Groups window. If
qualifiers are associated with the modifier list, then the Qualifier Groups window
does not display.


3. If you do not want to add qualifiers from qualifier groups, click Cancel. Alternately,
to add qualifiers from qualifier groups, select one or more qualifier groups that you
want to attach.

4. Select one of the grouping options (Retain Grouping Numbers Across Qualifier
Groups or Generate Unique Grouping Numbers Across Qualifier Groups). For
more information, see: Using Qualifier Grouping Numbers across Qualifier Groups,
page 5-16.

5. Click OK for the system to display the Qualifier window. In this window, the
qualifiers associated with the qualifier groups are listed.

Modifiers 3-19

QUALIFIER - Header Level Qualifiers

6. You can add, change, and delete individual qualifiers and change the grouping
numbers or dates. If you have attached qualifier groups, verify that the grouping
numbers in the window display the correct combination of and and or conditions.

7. Enter the Grouping Number. Qualifiers with the same grouping number generate
an and condition, and qualifiers with different grouping numbers generate an or
condition. If -1 is used as a qualifier grouping number, the qualifier is used as an
and condition for each qualifier group so you do not have to manually add it to each
qualifier group. For more information, see: Using Qualifier Grouping Numbers,
page 5-12.

8. Enter the Qualifier Context and Qualifier Attribute.

Note: After you save a qualifier with Qualifier Context of Modifier
List and Qualifier Attribute of Coupon Number, you cannot
modify or delete it because the pricing engine has generated
coupons and a qualifier for each coupon.

9. Enter the Operator, Value From, and Value To.

• If you define a Value From/To range using negative numbers,
enter the range from lowest to highest value. For example, to
define a Volume Order Amount between -99999 to -1, enter the
Value From = -99999 and the Value To = -1.

• Enter Value To only when the Operator is BETWEEN.


10. The Value From Meaning field provides additional details about the selected
qualifier. For example, if the qualifier context is CUSTOMER and the attribute is
Ship To, the Value From displays the customer name and Value From Meaning
displays the site use location for the customer. If the context/attribute combination
has no additional details, Value From and Value From Meaning are identical.

11. The Applies To Party Hierarchy check box is enabled only for attributes that are
based on Oracle TCA (Trading Community Architecture) Parties and for which the
Party Hierarchy Enabled flag was selected for this attribute on attribute
management setups. Select the Applies To Party Hierarchy check box to use the
party hierarchy functionality for the qualifier attribute. See the Oracle Advanced
Pricing Implementation Guide for more details.
Hierarchies consist of tiered relationships wherein one party ranks higher than
another; for example, a corporate hierarchy where different companies are related
as parent, subsidiary, headquarters, division, and so on. If Applies To Party is
selected, then the modifier adjustment or price list (depending on what the qualifier
is set up for) would be available to the parent party specified in the Attribute Value
field and its subsidiaries. This setting saves you time from creating multiple
qualifiers, one for each subsidiary or division.

Note: The Applies To Party Hierarchy check box is not available in
Basic Pricing. The profile option QP: Pricing Party Hierarchy Type
enables the use of TCA hierarchy-enabled attributes.

12. Click Copy Groups to add qualifiers from other qualifier groups, and enter Start
and End dates of the qualifier. For more information on qualifiers, see Oracle
Advanced Pricing User's Guide, Qualifier Groups.

13. View and, if necessary, adjust the precedence numbers that default from the
qualifier definition.
The pricing engine uses the Precedence to resolve incompatibility. If multiple
modifiers are eligible within the same phase and incompatibility level, the modifier
with the lowest precedence is applied.

14. Click OK and save your work.

Note: The start and end dates of the list qualifiers must be within

Creating Modifier Lines
You can add modifier lines to a modifier list to define the type of price adjustments,
benefits, or freight and special charges that the pricing engine applies to pricing

Modifiers 3-21

requests.

interface (UI) for setting up and maintaining most modifier and
modifier line types. For more information, see Using Modifiers in the
HTML UI, page 3-62.

For each list type that you define, you can select certain modifier line types. The
following modifier types can be selected at the modifier line level:
• Coupon Issue: Issues a coupon on one order that the customer can redeem for a
price adjustment or benefit on a later order.

• Discount: Creates a negative price adjustment, such as a 10 percent discount.

• Freight/Special Charge: Applies a freight charge.

• Item Upgrade: Replaces a specific item ordered with another item for the same
price.

Note: The Item Upgrade modifier type supports standard items
only.

• Other Item Discount: Gives a price adjustment or benefit to a specified item on an
order when the customer orders one or more other items on the same order.

• Price Break Header: Applies a variable discount or surcharge price adjustment to a
pricing request based meeting the condition of a break type. You can use both point
and range type breaks.

• Promotional Goods: Adds a new item with a price adjustment or benefit when the
customer orders one or more other items on the same order.

• Surcharge: Creates a positive price adjustment.

• Term Substitution: Replaces freight charges, shipping charges, and payment terms
with typically more favorable charges.

The following table details the modifier line types that can be used with a selected
modifier list type. The modifier line types are listed in the left column, and the modifier
list types are listed in the top row. A Yes in a row indicates that you can use the
modifier line type with a particular list type, and a No indicates that you cannot:


Modifier Line Deal Discount F&S Charge Promotion Surcharge
Type (listed List List List
in column
below)

Coupon Issue Yes No No Yes No

Discount Yes Yes No Yes No

Freight/Speci No No Yes No No
al Charge

Item Upgrade Yes No No Yes No

Other Item Yes No No Yes No
Discount

Price Break Yes Yes No Yes Yes
Header

Promotional Yes No No Yes No
Goods

Surcharge Yes Yes No Yes Yes

Terms Yes No No Yes No
Substitution

After you have created and saved a modifier line, you cannot edit or change the
Product Attribute Value (or primary buy item) for the line. To change the Product
Attribute Value for a line, you should end date the existing modifier and create a new
modifier.
This following section describes general setup information common to most modifier
line types. For information on setting up specific modifier line types, see the following
tasks:
• To create a Discount/Surcharge modifier line, page 3-30

• To create a Freight/Special Charge modifier line, page 3-32

• To create an Item Upgrade modifier line, page 3-34

• To create a Terms Substitution modifier line, page 3-35

• To create a Coupon Issue modifier line, page 3-36

Modifiers 3-23

• To create a Promotional Goods and Other Item Discount modifier line, page 3-38

• To create a Price Break modifier line, page 3-43

To create general modifier line information:

Advanced Pricing - Define Modifier window

2. On the Modifiers Summary tab, in the Modifier No field, a default modifier number
identifies the modifier line. You can change this value; however, the Modifier No
for each modifier line must be unique within the modifier list.

3. Select the level at which the modifier is applied:
• Order: If the line is eligible to receive the modifier, the pricing engine applies
the modifier at the order level.

• Line: If the line is eligible to receive the modifier, the pricing engine applies the
modifier at the line level.

• Group of Lines: If the pricing request is eligible to receive the modifier, the
pricing engine considers the item quantity or item amount consumed for a
group of order lines. The following table displays the available modifier types
and volume types that can be selected for a modifier line when Group of Lines


is selected:

Level Modifier Types that Can Be Volume Types that Can be
Created with Group of Lines Used with Group of Lines

Group of Discount, Item Upgrade, Other Item Quantity, Item Amount
Lines Item Discount, Price Break
Header, Promotional Good, and
Surcharge

Note: When Group of Lines is selected as the modifier level,
then the Volume Type, Product Attribute, and Product
Attribute Value fields become mandatory fields. This condition
is true regardless of the modifier type selected, such as
(Discount, Surcharge, PBH, and so on).

4. Select a modifier type.

5. Enter the Start/End Dates for the modifier line.

Note: The start and end date for the modifier line must be between
the start and end date on the modifier list. The pricing engine
confirms that the dates for the modifier line are valid so that the
modifier line can be applied.
The Print On Invoice field is reserved for future use.

6. Select or clear the Automatic box:
• Select Automatic to have the pricing engine automatically apply this modifier.
The Automatic box for each modifier line also becomes selected.

• Clear the Automatic box if you want the modifier to be manually applied. For
more information on manual modifiers, see Manual Modifiers, page 3-9.
For Promotional Limits: If you are using promotional limits with the modifier, the
Automatic check box must be selected and remain selected at both the modifier
header and line levels. Limits do not function with a modifier that is applied
manually.

Note: In the Advanced Pricing - Define Modifier window, you
can deselect the Automatic check box for these line-level
modifiers: Discount, Surcharge, and Freight/Special Charges.

Modifiers 3-25

7. Select Override to enable the modifier adjusted price to be manually overridden. If
not selected then the modifier adjusted price cannot be overridden.

8. Enter the Pricing Phase for this modifier line. Only valid phases for this modifier
level appear in the list of values.

Note: If you attach a phase with a PRICE event to the following
promotional modifier types - Promotional Goods/Other Item
Discount/Item Upgrade/Terms Substitution/Coupon Issue - and
save the modifier line, then the following error message appears:
The pricing phase for this modifier is attached to a PRICE event
and cannot be used for this modifier type. Please change the pricing
phase or remove a PRICE event for this phase from the Event
Phases form.

9. Select an Incompatibility Group. For more information about incompatibility
groups, see Changing Modifier Incompatibility, page 3-100 .

10. Enter a Bucket value.

Note: The Proration Type field is reserved for future use.

11. Enter a numeric Comparison Value. The pricing engine uses this value to compare
modifier types of Item Upgrade, Other Item Discount, and Term Substitution to
resolve incompatibilities and determine which modifiers to apply. This value is
used when the pricing phase incompatibility resolution is Best Price.

• Best Price processing cannot be used for order-level modifier
list types of Discount and Surcharge.

• For Freight and Special charges, if an Incompatibility Group is
not selected for the modifier line, the pricing engine will apply
BEST_PRICE regardless of the Incompatibility Resolve Code
set for the event phase. In these cases, the best price is the
higher charge, not the lower charge.

12. Select a Product Attribute value such as Item Number, Item Category, or All Items.
Use All Items to define a modifier that applies to all items in your product
hierarchy.

13. Select a Product Attribute Value. If you select ALL_ITEMS for Product Attribute,
the Product Attribute Value is ALL.


If you do not enter values for Product Attribute and Product Attribute Value, the
Pricing Engine applies the modifier line as if you selected ALL_ITEMS for Product
Attribute.

14. The Precedence value will appear by default based on the precedence value defined
with the product attribute. For example, the precedence value for item number is
220. This value can be updated.
If precedence processing cannot be resolved for two or more modifiers, then the
engine uses best price processing to resolve the issue without going below the
established precedence.

15. Enter a Volume Type, such as Item Quantity and Item Amount, to instruct the
pricing engine which volume attribute to use when qualifying for a modifier.

16. Select either Point or Recurring as the break type.

• Example: If RECURRING is selected where Value from = 1 and Value to = 10,
then for every quantity of 1, the discount is applied up to a quantity of 10.
Therefore, if a sales order is created with order quantity 10, then the (lumpsum)
discount is applied to all 10 quantities.

The break type is optional for the following modifier types:
• Discount

• Surcharge

• Freight Charge


• Coupon Issue

Example of Point Break Setup
The following table provides an example of the setup for a point break.

Field Value

Break Type Point

Modifier Line Type Discount

Product Attribute Item

Product Attribute Value Item A

Modifiers 3-27

Field Value


Operator Between

UOM Cases

Value From 100

Application Method Amount

Value 2

The pricing engine interprets this point setup as follows:
• If you order 100 cases of item A, you get a 2 currency unit discount.


Example of a Recurring Discount Setup
The following table details an example setup for a recurring discount (recurring is
not supported for price break):

Field Value

Break Type Recurring

Modifier Line Type Discount

Product Attribute Item

Product Attribute Value Item A


Operator Between

UOM Cases

Value From 100


Field Value

Application Method Lumpsum (Application method will be
always Lumpsum when break type is
Recurring.)

Value 2

The pricing engine interprets this recurring setup as follows:


17. Select a volume type to calculate the volume break.

18. Select an Operator value such as = or BETWEEN; for example, item quantity = 5 or
item quantity BETWEEN 5 and 20. If you select Recurring for the Break Type, you
must select BETWEEN.

19. Select the unit of measure (UOM) for the item or item category. If the line type is
Promotional Goods, Other Item Discount, Item Upgrade and Volume Type is Item
Quantity, then the UOM is mandatory.

Note: For promotional limits:

• If no product UOM is defined for a modifier line, line limits
with a basis of Item Quantity will not be created.

• If no benefit UOM is defined for a modifier line, line limits with
a basis of Accrual Units will not be created.

• If no benefit or product UOM is defined, neither Item Quantity
nor Accrual Units appears in the Basis list of values (LOV) to
prevent line limits from being created.

20. To create greater than and less than conditions, leave From Value and To Value
blank, as follows:
• From Value = 5 and To Value is blank creates the condition Value > 5

• From Value is blank and To Value = 100 creates the condition Value < 100

• From Value = 5 and To Value = 100 creates the condition Value >= 5 and value

Modifiers 3-29

<= 100. Enter the Value From/To.

To create a Discount modifier line:
Creates a negative price adjustment, such as a 10 percent discount.
1. Navigate to the Define Modifier window, Discounts/Charges tab.

In the Discount/Charges tab

2. Complete your entries in the Discounts/Charges tab:
• Modifier Type: Select Discount.

• Include on Returns check box: The Include on Return check box is only
applicable to modifiers of type Freight and Special Charge. This modifier type
is selected by default so that the freight charges are also included with returns.
Alternately, if Include on Returns is cleared, then pricing will not apply the
charge automatically on the return line.

• Formula: Optionally, select a formula for the following modifier types:
Discount, Surcharge, or Freight Charge. If the Modifier Type is Price Break
Header, click the Define Details button when setting up a price break line to
select a formula.
If the formula includes a Modifier Value (MV) in its equation, then this value is
derived from the Value field on the Discounts/Charges tab. If a formula does


not have an MV component, then the Value field is not used during the formula
calculation when the final discount is returned.
For example, consider a formula with the following equation:
List Price * MV = Final Discount

Formula List Price (LP) Modifier Value Final Discount
(MV)

LP *MV=Final 20 3 60
Discount

At order entry, when the modifier is selected and the formula LP *MV is
applied, the list price of the item on the order (LP) is multiplied by the value
that is entered in the modifier's Value field. In this case, the value is 3; therefore,
the final discount is 20*3=60.
A formula without an MV component can be attached to a modifier even if a
value is entered on the modifier line. In this case, the formula takes precedence
and the MV is not used. Instead, the number returned by the formula is
considered as the final discount.

• Value: Select an Application Method and a numeric value. The Application
Method selected determines how the value is applied. For example, if the
application value is Percent, then the value such as 10 is applied as a percent.

• Accrual: Complete the remaining fields to enter an accrual:
• Accrue: Select the Accrue check box to enter accrual information.

• Benefit Qty and Benefit UOM: Enter values for the Benefit Qty and Benefit
UOM of the benefit to be accrued. Use the benefit columns to define
nonmonetary accruals.

• Expiration Date: Define when the accrued transactions expire.

• Expiration Period and Period Type: The pricing engine calculates the
expiration date. The Expiration Period begins when an item begins to
accrue.

• Accrual Redemption Rate: You can enter or modify the redemption rate
after the Accrue box is selected.

• Accrual Conversion Rate: Defines the conversion of the Benefit UOM to the
primary currency. For example, if one air mile is 0.50 currency units, the
accrual conversion rate is 0.50.

Modifiers 3-31

To create a Freight/Special Charge modifier line:
1. Enter the following information in the Modifiers Summary tab:
• Level: Use Line or Order

• Modifier Type: Use Freight/Special Charge

• Phase: If Level is Line: use Line Charge or Line Manual Charge. If level is
Order, select Charges Header: All Lines.
Typically, you select one of the following pricing phases for a Freight and
Special charge:
• 50 - Line Charges

• 60 - Line Charges - Manual

• 70 - Charges Header: All Lines
However, you typically would not select the pricing phase 40 - Header
Level Adjustments, which is a header level adjustment, because when
Order Management or a similar calling application passes the Calculate
Price Flag value as Partial Price, only those freight charges in phases 50, 60,
and 70 are applied (but not those in pricing phase 40). However, users can
still override the Calculate Price Flag to enable modifiers assigned to other
phases to be applied.

• Bucket


Advanced Pricing - Define Modifier window: Discounts/Charges tab

2. On the Discounts/Charges tab, select a Charge Name such as Transportation
Charge.

3. The Include on Returns check box is only relevant for modifiers of type Freight and
Special charge List. The Include on Returns box is selected by default so that freight
charges are included with returns. Alternatively, if Include on Returns is cleared,
then pricing will not apply the charge automatically on the return line.
When you create a return order (and the price on the original order for which the
return line is being created is retained), Oracle Order Management copies all the
adjustments and only those freight charges that have the Include on Returns check
box selected. If a return line is repriced , then all the charges are evaluated and
applied. To have certain charges applied to a return line when the line is repriced,
create a qualifier with a not= condition.

4. Enter a Formula name to use a formula to calculate a discount, surcharge, or freight
charge.

5. Select an Application Method that defines how the modifier is applied. For more
information, see Application Method, page 3-4.

Note: For Freight/Special Charge modifiers, you must select
Lumpsum as the Application Method.

Modifiers 3-33

6. Enter a Value unless you are using a formula.

7. Save your work.
Notes
• For Freight/Special Charges, if an Incompatibility Group is not selected for the
modifier line, then the pricing engine will use BEST PRICE incompatibility
processing instead of Precedence. Precedence is defined as the Incompatibility
Resolve Code in the Event Phases window.

• When defining a freight charge modifier, select a seeded pricing phase whose
Freeze Override Flag value is set to Yes. For example, the Freeze Override Flag
is set to Yes for the Line Charges phase, but not for the List Line Adjustment
phase. When you set up a freight charge modifier, and select the Line Charges
phase instead of the List Line Adjustment phase, then your Return Merchandise
Authorization (RMA) line with the Calculate Price Flag of Partial Price would
qualify for the freight charge modifier.

To create an Item Upgrade modifier:
In the Promotion Upgrades tab, you can define an Upgrade Item that replaces a specific
item ordered for the same price. The item upgrade item is applied on the same order.

Note: Item upgrade is supported for standard items only.

1. Navigate to the Define Modifier window, Modifiers Summary tab.


Advanced Pricing - Define Modifier window: Promotion Upgrades tab

2. Select Item Upgrade as the Modifier Type.

3. In the Promotion Upgrades tab, define the Upgrade Item that replaces a specific
item ordered for the same price.

• The upgrade relationship between the original item and the
upgrade item must be set up in Oracle Inventory (the
Relationship Type is Promotional Upgrade). When the
relationship is set up, the related item appears in the list of
values. When the item is upgraded, the UOM is retained from
the original item.

• When the pricing engine applies the qualifying item on the
order line, the original item is replaced with the upgraded item
and the price of the original item is retained.

To create a Term Substitution modifier line:
Create a Term Substitution modifier line in the Promotion Terms tab to replace freight
charges, shipping charges, and payment terms with typically more favorable charges.
When the Operating Unit field appears:
• If multi-org access is not enabled, the operating unit appears by default from profile

Modifiers 3-35

MO: Operating Unit. You cannot update the Operating Unit field.

• If multi-org access is enabled, the operating unit appears by default from profile
MO: Default Operating Unit. You can override this value and select an available
operating unit that you can access, as defined by the profile option MO: Security
Profile.

1. Navigate to the Define Modifier window.

Advanced Pricing - Define Modifier window: Promotion Terms tab

2. In the Modifiers Summary tab, select Term Substitution as the Modifier Type.

3. On the Promotion Terms tab, enter the new terms in the Terms Attribute and Terms
Value fields. The pricing engine substitutes the terms on the order or order line
with the terms that you specify.

To create a Coupon Issue modifier line:
You can issue a coupon for an order that a customer can redeem for a price adjustment
or other benefit on a later order. When setting up a coupon issue, two modifier lines
must be set up: the first defines the benefit or price adjustment, such as a 10 percent
discount, and the second defines the coupon issue details, such as the coupon name and
expiration date. The following steps outline how to create a coupon issue modifier.

Note: Both the coupon issue and coupon benefit lines must be defined


on the same modifier list.

To define the coupon benefit
1. On the Modifiers Summary tab, create a modifier line to define the benefit or
adjustment issued when the coupon is redeemed. For example, a 10 percent
discount or $6 off the order. Select a modifier line type of Discount or Promotional
Goods to define the benefit.
The modifier number (Modifier No) on the modifier line generates a unique
number series for the coupon, and the coupon number is passed to the calling
application. The customer must quote the coupon number to redeem the coupon in
the calling application.
When the customer redeems the coupon, the pricing engine validates the coupon
number against the qualifier. It also validates the qualifiers for the discount or
promotional goods benefit.

Note: Typically, the coupon is issued for an order and the actual
discount line (the benefit the coupon applies) is applied to a
subsequent order when the coupon is redeemed. However, if you
set up a line-level qualifier for the discount line with the following
settings, then both the discount line and coupon line can be applied
to the same order:
• Grouping Number = -1

• Grouping Number = Any of the coupon modifier numbers

If you intentionally include a line-level qualifier on the discount
line that has a grouping number not equal to any of the coupon
modifier numbers and not equal to –1, it means that you actually
want the discount to be applied independent of coupon
redemption.
All qualifier conditions with grouping number = -1 must also be
met in order to redeem the coupon benefit modifier.

To define the coupon issue details
In a second modifier line, you define the coupon details, such as the coupon name and
its expiration date. This line is the Coupon Issue line. After you define the coupon details,
you link the benefit line to the coupon issue line:
2. Select Coupon Issue as the Modifier Type.

3. Enter a Redemption Rate to specify the percentage probability that customers might
redeem this coupon.

Modifiers 3-37

4. Enter the Expiration Date, which is the last date that the customer can redeem the
coupon.
Alternatively, if you enter values for the Expiration Start Date, Expiration Period,
and Expiration Period Type, the pricing engine automatically calculates the
Expiration Date. For example, for the following coupon setup, the pricing engine
calculates an expiration date of 20 July:
• Expiration Period Start Date: 20 April

• Expiration Period: 3

• Expiration Period Type: Month

If you do not enter an Expiration Period Start Date, the pricing engine will use the
date when the calling application issued the coupon.

5. Enter the Coupon Modifier Number (from the coupon benefit line) to link the
Coupon Issue modifier line to the benefit modifier line.

Note: The Benefit Quantity, Benefit UOM, and Coupon Conversion
Rate fields are not supported for a coupon issue line.

To create a Promotional Goods and Other Item Discount modifier lines:
To reward a customer who orders one or more specified items in the same order, you
can create a Promotional Goods modifier line to add a new item to an order and
provide a price adjustment or benefit for the item. The reward item does not need to be
in the original order. Even if the item is in the order, the pricing engine creates a new
line for the item.
You must specify a quantity, and you can use any UOM set up on your system.

• For the scenario Buy X and Y, get Z as free, list line adjustments
(Event phase 10) are not applicable for promotional modifiers
unless the Save event is added to the list-line adjustments phase.

• When you create or duplicate a modifier, you can change the
primary buy item, additional buy items, and get items. However,
once the modifier is saved, the additional buy or get items cannot
be changed or deleted. You can still add additional buy and get
items.

• Deleting and reapplying a Promotional Goods modifier line: If you
apply a modifier line of type Promotional Goods to an order and
then delete the modifier line, you cannot reapply the deleted


Promotional Goods modifier line.

Other Item Discount
When the customer orders one or more other specified items (the buy items) on the
same order, the Other Item Discount modifier provides a price adjustment or benefit to
another item (the get item) on the order. The buy item (including additional buy) and
get items must all be on the same order for the benefit to apply. The Other Item
Discount modifier must be applied at the Group of Lines level.

Note: Recurring other item discounts are not supported.

To enter promotional goods
Complete the following fields to create promotional goods:
1. On the Modifiers Summary tab, define the required buy product (or category) that
the customer must order to get the benefit. For example, buy a toothbrush and get a
free bottle of mouthwash.
• Modifier Type: Promotional Goods

• Pricing Phase: To have a PRG modifier applied in conjunction with an
order-level modifier, then select All Lines Adjustment as the Pricing Phase for
the PRG modifier. This selection enables both the PRG modifier and the
order-level modifier to be applied in conjunction to an order.

Tip: To prevent changes to the quantity of a free promotional
good added to the order line (for example, to prevent changing
the quantity of the free good from 1 to 2), select Pricing Phase
30 (All Lines adjustment) when you create the promotional
modifier.

• Product Attribute/Product Attribute Value: Select the required buy product (or
category) that the customer must order to get the benefit.

2. Click Define Details to display the Define Modifier Details window. In the Products
tab > Additional Buy Products region, define any additional products that the
customer must buy in addition to the original product defined in the Modifiers
Summary tab:
Additional Buy Products Region
• Group No: Defines the and or or condition of the buy side of the modifier. To
join lines with and, use the same group number on each line. To join lines with
or, use a different group number on each line

Modifiers 3-39

• Pricing Attribute: This is a volume pricing attribute; use either item quantity or
item amount.

3. In the Get region, define the get product that the customer receives. For
promotional modifiers (such as buy one, get one), when you define the Get Product,
the Get Price field does not display lines for service items with formulas, block
price, percent price, or price break lines.
Get Region
• Get Product Attribute: Item Number is the default value. Benefit items in the
Get region can only be defined at the item level.

You should not define a Get Line for a PRG using price list lines with the following
setups:
• Dynamic formulas.

• Arithmetic operator of Block price or Percent price.

Note: Once you save the Promotional Goods or Other Item
Discount line, you cannot update the Primary Buy, Additional Buy,
or Get Product attributes.
If you manually delete or change a free good line for an order or a
quote line on the order (for example, change the number of free
good items from three to two on the Sales Order pad), for
subsequent repricing calls, the overridden manual entry is retained.
For example, suppose a customer buys Item A and gets two of Item
B free. If you manually change the quantity of free goods that the
customer gets from two to one on the Sales Order pad, then on
subsequent repricing, the manually overwritten amount is retained
and the customer gets the one free good.

Examples of Promotional Goods Modifiers
You can create as many must buy items as desired and as many get items as
required. Here are some sample scenarios of must buy and get promotional
modifiers:
• Customer must buy A to get B

• Customer must buy A and B to get C

• Customer must buy A and B and C to get D

However, you cannot create a combination of must buy products or get products
where the promotional goods modifier must evaluate multiple items. For example,
the customer receives 20 units free of the following products or a combination of


products A, B, C if the customer buys at least 20 units from the specified products
(X or Y) or a combination.
Instead you must specify explicit must buy and get amounts; for example, the
customer must buy 10 of Product X and 10 of Product Y to get 20 free units of
Product A.

Note: If you are using Promotional Good (PRG) type of Modifier
Line with Multi-Currency, see Using Promotional Good type of
Modifier Line, page 6-14.

Using a Promotional Modifier as a Qualifier for Another Modifier
You need to consider the following when setting up a promotional modifier as a
qualifier for another modifier:
Situation: Suppose you want to apply two automatic, promotional modifiers named
XXXX and YYYY using the following setups:
• Promotion Modifier 1: XXXX

• Promotion Modifier 2: YYYY
• Qualifier = Promotional Number with value as XXXX

In this setup, the second modifier YYYY will not get applied to the order because
the qualifier attribute of Promotional Number is not mapped at runtime. (Its
attribute mapping method is User Entered, and will not be evaluated during the
pricing call.)
To ensure that you can use the Promotional Number as a qualifier in another
modifier, you need to complete the following steps:
1. Create a custom qualifier attribute by writing a function to source the attribute:
its values will be TRUE or FALSE based on if the modifier XXXX is applied to
that particular line or not.

2. Use this custom qualifier attribute in the modifier YYYY.

3. Attach the modifier XXXX to the pricing phase List Line Adjustments and
attach modifier YYYY to the pricing phase All Lines Adjustments.

When the order line is entered, the modifier XXXX will get applied first and then,
while saving the order line, modifier YYYY will get applied because the modifier
XXXX has already been applied while entering.

To enter other item discount:
1. On the Modifiers Summary tab, define the required buy product (or category) that
the customer must order to get the benefit. For example, buy a toothbrush and get a

Modifiers 3-41

discount on a bottle of mouthwash.
• Modifier Type: Other Item Discount

• Product Attribute/Product Attribute Value: Select the required buy product (or
category) that the customer must order to get the benefit

2. Click Define Details to display the Define Modifier Details window.

Define Modifier Details window

3. In the Products tab - Additional Buy Products region, define any additional
products that the customer must buy in addition to the original product defined in
the Modifiers Summary tab:
• Group No: Defines the and or or condition of the buy side of the modifier:
• To join lines with and, use the same group number on each line.

• To join lines with or, use a different group number on each line.

• Pricing Attribute: This is a volume pricing attribute; use either item quantity or
item amount.

4. In the Products tab - Get region, define the other item discount product (the get
item) that the modifier provides a price adjustment or benefit for on the order:


• Get Product Attribute: Item Number is the default value. Benefit items in the
Get region can only be defined at the item level.

• Get Product Value: Select an item. Product Description is the default based on
the product selected.

Note: After you save the Promotional Goods or Other Item
Discount line, you cannot update the Primary Buy, Additional Buy,
or Get Product attributes.

To create a price break modifier line:
Create a price break modifier line to apply a variable discount or surcharge price
adjustment to a pricing request based on the price breaks.
1. Complete the following fields:
• Level: Group of Lines or Line.

• Break Type:
• Point: The pricing engine charges each unit of volume at the price of the
break within which the total falls.

• Range: The pricing engine charges each unit of volume at the price of the
break within which it falls.

• Product Attribute and Product Attribute Value

• UOM

• Volume Type

2. Select the Price Breaks tab.

Modifiers 3-43

Advanced Pricing - Define Modifier window: Price Breaks tab

3. Select an adjustment Type such as Discount or Surcharge.

4. Select an Accumulation Attribute if you are setting up range price breaks that
accumulate across orders. This option is available for Range breaks only. See Using
Accumulated Range Breaks, page 3-48 for more information.

5. The Net Amount Calculation field enables you to calculate the selling price based
on the net amount (bucketed amount). You can select from the following values:
• When the For matching products option is selected, the order lines that match the
modifier Product criteria (such as the Item Number or Item Category) are
selected and grouped. The sum of the amounts from these order lines is
selected and then used as the group amount for the net amount calculations.

• When the For all matching attributes option is selected, the order lines that match
all the criteria (not just the Product criteria) defined in the price break modifier
are selected and grouped. The sum of the amounts from these order lines is
then used as the group amount for the net amount calculations.

Note: To use net amount, the following values must also be
selected:
• If Line is selected as the modifier line level, then you can only


select For All Matching Attributes from the Net Amount
Calculation field.

• Level: Line or Group of Lines level (select Group of Lines to
select For matching products from the Net Amount Calculation
field.)

• Modifier Type for the modifier line must be Price Break
Header, and related price breaks must be set up.

• Automatic check box for the modifier line must be selected.

• Override check box must be cleared.

• Volume Type: Amount

Promotional Goods and Net Amount Calculation
Promotional goods amounts will not be included in the net amount
calculation. For example, if an order line gets a promotional good
(buy A, get B free or discounted), the new line will not contribute to
any net amount calculation of any modifier in the order.

For examples, see Examples of using net amount in price breaks, page 3-46.

6. To use the price break to calculate an accrual, select Accrue.

Note: The Accrual box can only be used if Discount is selected as
the Adjustment Type.
1. If using accruals, enter an Expiration Date to specify when the
accrued transactions expire.

2. Enter Expiration Start Date, Expiration Period, and Period
Type. The pricing engine calculates expiration date. The
expiration period begins when the item begins to accrue.
Credit Memo, which is the Rebate Transaction Type default, is
reserved for future use.


Modifiers 3-45

Define Modifier Details window

8. The values for Break Line Type, Break Type, and Net Amount Calculation are
provided by default from the modifier line.

9. Enter Value From and Value To values.

Note: If you leave Value To of the last break blank, a value of
99999.. (15 digits) automatically defaults. This value is hidden from
the end-user and does not display in the Value To field.

10. Optionally, select a Formula.

11. Select an Application Method. For more information, see Application Method, page
3-4.

12. For nonmonetary accruals, enter the Accrual Conversion Rate to specify the
conversion of Benefit UOM to the modifier primary currency. For example, if 1 air
mile is 0.50 currency units, the Accrual Conversion Rate is 0.5.

13. If applicable, enter the Benefit Quantity and Benefit UOM.

14. Save your work.
Examples of Using Net Amount in Price Breaks
The Net Amount Calculation field enables you to calculate the selling price based


on the net amount (bucketed amount). For example, suppose you create a price
break modifier line with the following setup:
• Product: Item Number = AS54888

• Net Amount Calculation: For matching products selected

• Pricing Attribute: Red

If this modifier is applied to the following order, then all order lines that match the
product defined in the price break modifier line (for example, Item Number =
AS54888) are grouped together for the net amount calculation (regardless of other
qualifying criteria):

Order Product Pricing Attribute
Line

1 Item Number: AS54888 Red

2 Item Number: AS54888 Blue

3 Item Number: AS54888 Red

The item amount is based on the item amount for all three lines, but the discount
will be applied to lines 1 and 3:
• Lines used for Net Amount Calculations: All order lines with Product Item
Number = AS54888 are grouped together.

• Lines that get discount: The modifier adjustment (such as a discount) are only
applied to Lines 1 and 3 because they match the modifier's remaining
qualifying criteria (pricing attribute must be Red.)

The following table displays a modifier setup that will calculate the net amount for
an order using a break range type of Point:

Modifier Setup Bucket Discount Break Ranges

Line 1: Discount A 1 40% n/a

Line 2: Discount B 1 30% n/a

Line 3: Price Break 2 5% $0-1,000
Header (PBH) C

Modifiers 3-47

Modifier Setup Bucket Discount Break Ranges

- - 7% $1,000-2,000

- - 10% $2,000-9,999

Suppose this modifier were applied to the following order:

Order Item List price Order quantity

AS54888 $2,000 each (per unit) 2

If the modifier were applied to this order, the Net Amount selling price would be
1. First Discount A (40 percent) is applied resulting in the unit adjusted amount of
$800.

2. Then Discount B (30 percent) is applied resulting in a unit adjusted amount of
$600.

3. The unit selling price at the end of Bucket 1 is $2,000 - ($800+$600) = $600. This
amount becomes the unit selling price for the next bucket.

4. For PBH C to apply: the Net Amount Calculation is ($2,000*2) - (800*2) - (600*2)
= $1,200. This amount qualifies for the second break of C, which is 7 percent.

5. PBH C applied: the unit adjustment amount is 7 percent*600 = $42. This amount
is applied to the unit selling price of the previous bucket.
The final unit selling price is $600 - 42 = $558.

Using Accumulated Range Breaks
Setting up modifiers with accumulated range breaks provides additional flexibility to
existing price break processing. Using accumulated range breaks, you can set up range
price breaks that accumulate within and across orders based on some attribute value
(for example, quantity) that is accumulated from previous orders or order lines.
The pricing engine uses the accumulation value as the starting point of the break
calculation. Oracle Advanced Pricing does not store these accumulated values. The
value is passed by the calling application in the engine request or the engine
dynamically sources the attribute from a customer API.


Values can be accumulated across different orders or within an order. For example,
suppose a customer places the following two orders:
• Order A: 2 of Item Shampoo

• Order B: 3 of Item Shampoo

Under regular range price break processing, each order would be evaluated
independently of the other. However, with accumulated range price breaks, the
accumulated quantity value from Order A is the starting point for evaluating the range
break for Order B.
The value of the accumulation attribute is sourced from the pricing request when
evaluating accumulated range price breaks for modifiers. Customers are responsible for
accumulating and maintaining the values from previous transactions in any manner
they choose. This value is the starting point for range price breaks in subsequent
transactions that are passed to the pricing engine.
Setting the Profile Option and Volume Attribute
To begin using the accumulation attribute feature, the profile QP: Accumulation
Attributes Enabled must be set to Yes. Typically, this value is set by the System
Administrator. The profile option also enables the Accumulation Attribute field in the
Price Breaks tab on the Define Modifier window. Complete the following steps to set up
this feature (no seeded attributes are provided for this feature).
1. You can create two types of accumulation volume attributes in Attribute
Management to use this feature:
• Use the mapping method of Attribute Mapping to source the accumulation
value from the pricing request.

• Use the new attribute mapping method Runtime_Sourced to enable the pricing
engine to source the attribute and accumulation values from a custom API. A
new package has been created, QP_RUNTIME_SOURCE, containing a
specification for the custom API. Customers are required to write a
corresponding body to this package. See the Advanced Pricing Implementation
Guide for more information.

2. Set the profile QP: Accumulation Attributes Enabled to Yes at Site, Application, or
both levels. The profile enables the Accumulation Attribute field in modifier lines.
Price break details are defined in Define Details.

3. Define a modifier line with the following setup:
• Line type: Price Break Header (or Price Break in HTML)

• Break type: RANGE

• Select Accumulation Attribute from the list of values.

Modifiers 3-49

Using Accumulated Range Break Across Orders
When using accumulated range breaks, the accumulation total must be passed as the
starting point for each pricing request. For example, suppose the following discount is
set up to give a discount across orders.

Volume Attribute From Volume Attribute To Adjustment Amount

0 5 5%

5 10 10%

10 15 15%

If a customer then places three separate orders for five items each, then the adjustment
amount is calculated as follows:

Order No. Quantity Accumulated Value Adjustment Amount

1 5 0 5%

2 5 5 10%

3 5 10 15%

The adjustment calculations for the preceding example are as follows:
• For the first order, the accumulated value is 0. A discount of 5 percent is given
because the order quantity of 5 satisfies the first quantity range break of 0 to 5.

• For the second order, the accumulated value passed to the pricing engine is 5 (5
from Order 1). A discount of 10 percent is given, because the break is evaluated
starting with quantity 6, which satisfies the range of 5 to 10.

• Finally, for the third order, the accumulated value passed to the pricing engine is
10. A discount of 15 percent is given, because the break is evaluated starting with
quantity 11, which satisfies the range of 10 to 15.

Using Accumulated Range Breaks Within an Order
Accumulated range price breaks can be used to evaluate the volume of order lines
within the same order.


For example, if a customer orders three lines of the same item that is eligible for a
discount, then each line is priced based on the accumulated value of the previous
qualifying line for the same product.
Suppose a price break modifier is set up with the following volume ranges and
adjustment amounts:

Volume Attribute From Volume Attribute To Adjustment
Amount (Percent)

0 5 5%

5 10 10%

10 15 15%

When this discount is applied, the accumulated values and adjustment amounts are

Line No. Quantity Accumulated Value Adjustment Amount

4.1 3 0 5%

4.2 6 3 8.33%

4.3 4 9 13.75%

The accumulation value and discounts are evaluated as follows:
• The first line is given a discount of 5 percent because an accumulation value of 0 is
passed and the order quantity of 3 satisfies the range 0 to 5.

• Line 4.2 is evaluated with starting at the accumulated value of 3. Two of the
ordered quantity 6 fall within the range of 0 to 5, and 4 falls within the range 5 to 10,
resulting in an 8.33 percent adjustment.

• Line 4.3 is evaluated with a starting point of (3+6) = 9 passed by the calling
application and an order quantity of 4. One of quantity 4 falls within the range 5 to
10 and 3 fall within the range of 10 to 15, resulting in a 13.75 percent adjustment.

Attaching Pricing Attributes to Modifier Lines
You can attach attributes to the items and item categories that you define for modifier

Modifiers 3-51

lines. When the pricing engine determines eligibility for a modifier, it validates the
pricing attributes along with the item number or item category.

Note: Pricing attributes apply only to the primary items that you define
in the Modifiers Summary tab. They do not apply to items that you
define for additional buy items and get items.

To attach pricing attributes to modifier lines:

2. Select the Modifiers Summary tab and select a modifier line.

3. Click Pricing Attributes to display the More Pricing Attributes window.

More Pricing Attributes window

4. Enter a Pricing Context.

5. Enter a Pricing Attribute.

6. Enter an operator value such as = or BETWEEN.

7. Enter a Value From and a Value To.

Note: Enter Value To only when the Operator is BETWEEN.

8. Click OK and save your work.


Excluding Items from a Modifier
Use this process to exclude items from a modifier. When the pricing engine evaluates
order lines, if an order line contains an item or item category that is defined as an
excluded item or item category, then these lines are considered ineligible and will not
be evaluated for the modifier.
The following example shows the difference between a modifier defined without an
excluded item and one defined with an excluded item.
Example of a Modifier Without an Excluded Item
The following example shows the effects of applying a modifier when no excluded item
is defined for the modifier. The modifier, Modifier_Shampoo1, is set up with the
following criteria:
• Level: Group of Lines

• Item Category: Shampoo

• Quantity: > 100 quantity

To be eligible for the modifier, the item category of the ordered items must be Shampoo
and the total item quantity of the eligible order lines must be greater than 100.
Suppose a customer then places the following order for two shampoo items and one
conditioner item:

Order Line ID Qty Item Category

1 100 Shampoo1 Shampoo

2 20 Shampoo2 Shampoo

3 30 Conditioner1 Conditioner

The modifier will be applied because the item total for the eligible group of lines is 120
(the sum of 100 + 20).
Example of a Modifier with an Excluded Item
The following modifier, Modifier_Shampoo2, has been set up, and the item Shampoo1
is defined as the excluded item:
• Level: Group of Lines, Item Category: Shampoo

• Quantity: > 100 quantity

• Excluded Item: Shampoo1

Modifiers 3-53

Suppose a customer then places the following order for two shampoo items and one
conditioner item, as in the previous order:

Order Line ID Item Quantity (Qty) Category

1 Shampoo1 100 Shampoo

2 Shampoo2 20 Shampoo

3 Conditioner1 30 Conditioner

To be eligible for this modifier, the item category of the ordered items must be Shampoo
and the item quantity of the eligible order lines must be greater than 100. However, the
item Shampoo1, which is defined as an excluded item for this modifier, will not be
evaluated. The group of lines from the order is evaluated against the modifier
requirements as follows:
• Order Line 1: Rejected because it contains the excluded item (Shampoo1).

• Order Line 2: Accepted because the Category is Shampoo.

• Order Line 3: Rejected because the Category is not Shampoo.

Then, the modifier evaluates the total quantity of the eligible order lines. If the total
item quantity is greater than 100, then the modifier is applied. Since the quantity of the
eligible lines is 20 (Order Line 2), the modifier will not be applied.

To add exclude items to a modifier:
1. Navigate to the Advanced Pricing - Define Modifier window (Summary tab) and
select a modifier. You cannot add excluded items if the modifier level is Order.

2. Click Exclude to display the Exclude Items window.


Exclude Items window

3. Enter a Product Attribute and Product Value to be excluded.

4. Select Exclude and click OK.

5. Save your work.

Creating Line-Level Qualifiers
You can create qualifiers for modifiers at the line level. The pricing engine evaluates
qualifiers to determine eligibility for line-level modifiers. The pricing engine evaluates
line-level qualifiers in addition to the header-level qualifiers to qualify the modifier
against the order header or line
If the item is evaluated from the secondary price list, the customer does not receive the
discount unless the qualifier also includes Price List B.

To create line-level qualifiers:

2. Choose the Modifiers Summary tab and select a modifier line.

3. Click the Line Qualifiers button.

Modifiers 3-55


4. If this modifier line has no qualifiers, the Qualifier Groups window appears. Do one
of the following:
• To add qualifiers from qualifier groups:
1. Select the qualifier group.

2. Select a grouping option: Retain Grouping Numbers Across Qualifier
Groups or Generate Unique Grouping Numbers Across Qualifier Groups.
For more information on qualifier groups, see: Using Qualifier Grouping
Numbers across Qualifier Groups, page 5-16.

3. Click OK to display the Qualifier - Line Level Qualifiers window. The
qualifier and qualifier conditions from the selected qualifier group(s)
appear in this window.
The Group name (from the related Qualifier Group) appears in the Group
column. Verify that the Grouping Number that is provided by default from
the qualifier group creates the and and or conditions that you want.

• To add qualifiers and skip the Qualifier Groups window, click OK and go to
step 5.

5. In the Qualifier - Line Level Qualifiers window, you can add, change, and delete


qualifiers, change the grouping numbers, and change the dates.

Qualifier - Line Level Qualifiers

6. If you are entering a new qualifier, enter a Grouping Number. Qualifiers with the
same grouping number generate an AND condition, while qualifiers with different
grouping numbers generate an OR condition. For more information on grouping
numbers, see Using Qualifier Grouping Numbers, page 5-12.

7. Enter the Qualifier Context.

8. Enter the Qualifier Attribute.

Note: After you save a qualifier with Qualifier Context of Modifier
List and Qualifier Attribute of Coupon Number, you cannot
modify or delete it. Since the pricing engine creates coupons (and a
qualifier for each coupon), these coupon qualifiers are not subject to
manual changes and deletions.
View the Precedence numbers that appear by default from the
qualifier definition. The pricing engine uses precedence for
resolving incompatibility. If multiple modifiers are eligible within
the same phase and incompatibility level, the modifier with the
lowest precedence is applied.

9. Select or clear the Applies To Party Hierarchy check box. This check box is enabled
only for attributes that are based on Oracle TCA (Trading Community Architecture)
Parties and if the Party Hierarchy Enabled flag has been selected for this attribute
on attribute management setups. The Applies To Party Hierarchy check box must
be selected to use the party hierarchy functionality for the qualifier attribute. See the
Oracle Advanced Pricing Implementation Guide for more details.

Modifiers 3-57

Hierarchies consist of tiered relationships where one party is ranked above another;
for example, a corporate hierarchy where different companies are related as parent,
subsidiary, headquarters, division, and so on. If Applies To Party is selected, then
the modifier adjustment or price list (depending on what the qualifier is set up for)
would be available to the parent party specified in the Attribute Value field and its
subsidiaries. This setting saves you time because you don't have to create multiple
qualifiers, one for each subsidiary or division.

Note: The Applies To Party Hierarchy check box is not available in
Basic Pricing. The profile option QP: Pricing Party Hierarchy Type
enables the use of TCA hierarchy-enabled attributes.

10. Enter the Operator, Value From, and Value To (if applicable).

• If you define a Value From/To range using negative numbers,
enter the range from lowest to highest value. For example, to
define a Volume Order Amount between -99999 to -1, enter the
Value From = -99999 and the Value To = -1.

• Enter Value To only when the Operator is BETWEEN.

11. Enter additional details about the selected qualifier in the Value From Meaning
field. For example, if the qualifier context is CUSTOMER and the attribute is Ship
To, then the Value From field displays the customer name and the Value From
Meaning field displays the site-use location for the customer. If the context/attribute
combination has no additional details, then Value From and Value From Meaning
are identical.

12. Click Copy Group to add qualifiers from other qualifier groups.

13. Click OK.

14. Save your work.

Note: The start and end dates of the line qualifiers must be within

Copying a Modifier List
You can create a new modifier list by copying an existing one. The following modifier
information is copied from the original modifier to the new one:
• Modifier lines


• Pricing attributes, such as price breaks, other item discounts, coupons, and
promotional goods.

• Qualifiers (list and line levels)

When you copy a modifier, you can enter a unique number and name for the new
modifier and either update or keep the effective dates for the modifier list and lines. The
combination of modifier name, number, and version must be unique across modifier
lists. Although it is possible to copy an existing modifier name, you must enter a unique
number for the new modifier.
Promotional limits attached to the original modifier are not copied. The promotional
limits must be created again for the new modifier. You can review the newly converted
price breaks in the View Log of the concurrent request.

• If you do not see the modifier list that you are trying to copy, you
may not have access privileges to it. You must have at least View
Only security privilege to copy a modifier list. Consult your Pricing
Administrator.

To copy a modifier list:
1. Navigate to the Copy Modifiers window.

Modifiers 3-59

Copy Modifiers window

2. In the Copy From region:
• Number: Select the modifier list to be copied. The currency and name appear
for the selected modifier.

• Retain Effective Dates: Select the Retain Effective Dates to copy the effective
dates from the original to the new modifier.
If you select Retain Effective Dates, then the effective dates from the original
modifier lines are copied to the new modifier lines. If you do not select this
option, you can add effective dates to the new modifier lines once they are
created.

Note: Selecting the Retain Effective Dates check box retains the
effective dates only for the modifier lines not for the modifier
list.

3. In the Copy To region:
• Number: Enter a name for the new modifier in the Number field. Optionally,
enter a description in the Name field and the effective dates for the modifier.


• Global: If the modifier you are copying from is Global (meaning available to all
operating units), then the Global check box is selected by default. You can clear
or select the Global value to disable or enable global access to the new modifier
list.

• Operating Unit: Verify the value in the Operating Unit field. This value restricts
the usage of the modifier list to the named operating unit (if Global is not
selected). The operating unit value appears by default if you copy from an
operating unit-specific modifier list and your responsibility has security access
to the operating unit. If these two conditions do not exist, then the Global check
box is selected instead.

Note: The Global check box and Operating Unit fields are
visible only if pricing security is enabled. See the Oracle
Advanced Pricing Implementation Guide for further details on
how to enable pricing security.

4. Click Submit to copy the modifier. A Request ID number appears so that you can
track your copy request. Select View > Requests and search by your Request ID
number to view your request status.

Important: The copied modifier list is always inactive, so you must
select the Active check box to make the modifier active.

5. Search for the new modifier in the Find Modifier Lists window.

6. Select the modifier, and then select Active to activate the modifier.

Copying a Modifier Line
You can quickly copy an existing modifier line to a new line record in the Advanced
Pricing - Define Modifier window. The following information is copied to the new
modifier line:
• All the contents of the modifier summary and all other tabs.

• All the Exclude Products attached to this modifier line.

• All the Pricing Attributes attached to this modifier line.

• All the Line Qualifiers attached to this modifier line.

• All the Line Details (additional and get products, price break lines) attached to this
modifier line.

Modifiers 3-61

All fields that are copied can be updated except for the Level and Modifier type fields.
The Product Attribute and Product Value fields can be updated even after you click
Define Details. However, once the new modifier line is saved, these fields cannot be
updated.

• Copying price breaks created in releases earlier than R12: When
you copy a modifier line, all price break lines are copied from the
old to the new modifier line. However, any price breaks created in
releases earlier than R12 are converted automatically from
non-continuous to the continuous price break format (standard in
release R12 and newer). Since the conversion results in changes to
the price break setup and break calculations, you should review the
copied price break lines and make any required changes to ensure
you are getting the correct results. You can review the newly
converted price breaks in the View Log of the concurrent request.
For more information on price breaks and their effect on pricing
adjustments, see Continuous Price Breaks, page 3-78.

• Duplicate Modifiers: Basic Pricing provides a profile option, QP:
Allow Duplicate Modifiers, that can be set to yes or no to control if
duplicate modifiers are permitted. This functionality is for Basic
Pricing only. In Advanced Pricing, this profile option does is
non-functional and, therefore, does not restrict your ability to copy
a modifier line. See the Oracle Advanced Pricing Implementation Guide
, Profiles Option for more information about this profile option.

To copy a modifier line:
1. Display the modifier in the Advanced Pricing - Define Modifier window.

2. Select the modifier line to be copied, and click the New icon in the toolbar to create
a new blank line beneath the original line.

3. Choose Edit > Duplicate > Record Above to duplicate the original line. Alternately,
select the SHIFT+F6 keys.

4. Once the line is duplicated, you can modify or save it.

5. Save your work.

Using Modifiers in the HTML User Interface


You can use the HTML UI to complete many of the pricing tasks that you previously
completed using the Oracle Forms-based UI, such as:
• Searching for modifier lists and modifier lines.

• Creating modifier lists for the following modifier types only: Deal, Discount List,
Promotion, or Surcharge List.

Note: You must use the Oracle Forms-based UI to create a Freight
and Special Charge list.

• Creating the following modifier line types:

Note: You must use the Oracle Forms-based UI to create all other
modifier line types.

• Discount

• Surcharge

• Price Break Header


• Updating a modifier.

Oracle Advanced Pricing provides the Oracle Forms-based interface for features and
tasks currently unavailable in the HTML format, such as creating qualifier groups.

associated with the Update and Details icons in the HTML UI. For more
information, see Oracle Advanced Pricing Implementation Guide, Pricing
Security.

Pricing Security (HTML Interface)
Pricing security settings affect the Update and Details icons for price lists and modifiers
in the HTML UI in the following ways:
When Pricing Security is Off
• For a modifier or price list, if the PTE and source system are the same as those set in
the user's profile options, QP: Pricing Transaction Entity and QP: Source System
Code, then the Update icon will be enabled and the Details icon will be disabled.

• For a modifier or price list, if the PTE and source system are different from those set
in the user's profile options, QP: Pricing Transaction Entity and QP: Source System
Code, the Update icon will be disabled and the Details icon will be enabled.

Modifiers 3-63

• When the source systems are different (and the PTE is the same as in the QP:
Pricing Transaction Entity profile option), you can view only the price lists and
modifiers for the PTE specified in the profile option.

When Pricing Security is On
• For a modifier or price list with Maintain and View privileges, if the PTE and source
system are the same as those in the user's profile options, QP: Pricing Transaction
Entity and QP: Source System Code, then the Update icon will be enabled and the
Details icon will be disabled.

• For a modifier or price list with Maintain and View privileges, if the PTE and source
systems are different from those in the user's profile options, QP: Pricing
Transaction Entity and QP: Source System Code, then the Update icon will be
disabled and the Details icon will be enabled. This condition occurs when the same
PTE is defined for both the user's profile option, QP: Pricing Transaction Entity, and
the modifier or price list, but the source systems are different. The behavior is the
same in the forms-based UI.

• If the modifier or price list has View-privileges only, the Update icon will be
disabled and the Details icon will be enabled, regardless of the PTE and source
system for which the modifier or price list belongs.

Creating a Modifier List (HTML Interface)
A modifier list contains general information that applies to all modifier lines created for
the list. You can use modifier lists and lines to adjust net prices either up or down
through modifier actions such as discounting, adding surcharges, charging for
shipping, or adjusting price based on promotional pricing.
In the HTML UI, you can create the following modifier list types.
• Deal

• Discount List

• Promotion

• Surcharge List

Note: You must use the Oracle Forms-based UI to create a Freight
and Special Charge list.

For each modifier list type, you can create modifier lines that define the price
adjustment or benefit to be applied to the pricing requests. To view which modifier line
types are supported for each modifier list, see Creating Modifier Lines (HTML


Creating a modifier list and modifier lines involves the following steps:
1. Enter general modifier list information.

2. Create qualifiers that define eligibility rules for the modifier list. For example, the
customer must be a Gold class customer to receive the adjustments and benefits for
the modifier list.

3. Review and then save the modifier list.

4. Add modifier lines to the modifier list to define the type and amount of price
adjustment or benefit offered.

5. Make the modifier list active by navigating to the General Information page and
clicking the Active check box.

Modifier List Concepts:
Currency
The pricing engine applies modifiers to sales orders of the same currency. If a specific
currency is selected, such as U.S. dollars (USD), then the modifier list can only be used
with a price list with a matching base currency or to currency (for a multi-currency
price list).
Optional Currency
Select Optional Currency if currency is not used as a criteria to select modifiers for the
order (this selection leaves the Currency field in the modifier list blank). Selecting
optional currency can provide the following advantages to your business:
• Enables your business to reduce the number of modifiers required to support sales
orders in all currencies for which you do business. For example, Optional Currency
could be selected for modifiers that are set up with the application method of
Percent, since these modifiers could be applied to any sales order regardless of the
currency (since no currency conversion is required).

• Reduces the cost of setup and maintenance of modifiers.

• Reduces the cost of data storage.

Note: Although Optional Currency is applicable to all modifier
types and application methods, it may not be appropriate for all
types of modifiers since no currency conversion is done with such
modifiers. You must determine if it suits your business
requirements and in what situations.

Pricing for Global Use and Operating Unit
The Pricing For Global Use box identifies if this modifier list and lines are available to
all operating units or a specific operating unit.

Modifiers 3-65

• If selected, then the modifier list and lines are available for all operating units.

• If cleared, then the Operating Unit field appears:
• If multi-org access is not enabled, the operating unit value is provided by
default from profile MO: Operating Unit. This operating unit field cannot be
updated by users.

• If multi-org access is enabled, the operating unit value is provided by default
from profile MO: Default Operating Unit. Users can override this default and
select an operating unit that they have access to as defined by MO: Security
Profile.

The pricing engine will only consider this modifier if the order has the same
operating unit.

The Pricing For Global Use check box appears only after you run the Security Control
concurrent program to turn on security. To confirm the security status for your
installation, view the profile QP: Security Control to see if security is on or off. Once
security is on, all newly created modifier lists will have the global box selected as a
default. For more information on pricing security, see the Oracle Advanced Pricing
By Request Only
If the By Request Only check box is selected, the customer must specifically request to
have the modifier benefit applied (for example, by providing a special discount
number), otherwise it will not be applied. This check box is only available for modifier
list types of Deal and Promotion.

Note: If the pricing engine selects multiple modifiers to apply to an
order line, the modifiers for By request only receive a higher preference
than other modifiers.

To create a modifier list:
1. Navigate to the Modifier Lists page.


Modifier Lists page

2. Select the type of modifier to be created:
• Deal

• Discount List

• Promotion

• Surcharge List

3. Click Go to display the Create [Modifier Type] General Information page.

Modifiers 3-67

Create [Modifier Type] General Information page

Note: The page name and details may vary slightly depending on
the modifier list type being created.

The Type field displays the modifier list type you are creating. The Pricing
Transaction Entity and Source System values appear by default from the profiles
QP: Pricing Transaction Entity and QP: Source System Code.

4. Enter a Name for the modifier list. You can use an alphabetic or alphanumeric
combination to identify the modifier, for example, Promo Modifier or Mod1234.

Note: The modifier Name should be unique across PTEs, otherwise
an error occurs. For example, if a modifier named Corporate is
created in the Order Management PTE, an error message displays if
you create a Corporate modifier in the Purchasing PTE.

5. Enter a modifier list Number. This can be an alpha-numeric combination.

6. Enter a Version Number.

7. Enter a Description for the modifier list.


8. Perform one of the following actions:
• Select a Currency. If a currency is selected such as US dollars (USD), the sales
order must match the modifier currency to determine pricing for the order. For
more information, see Currency, page 3-65.

• Optionally, select Optional Currency to leave the Currency field in the modifier
list blank. This option can be selected when currency is not used as a criteria to
select modifiers for the order. For more information, see Optional Currency,
page 3-65.

9. Enter a Start Date and an End Date.

10. Enter an Order Date From and an Order Date To range.

11. Enter a Requested Shipped Date From date and a Requested Shipped Date To date.

12. The Pricing For Global Use box identifies if this modifier list and lines are available
to all operating units or a specific operating unit. For more information, see Pricing
For Global Use, page 3-65.

13. For modifier types of Deal and Promotion, the By request only check box displays. If
selected, the customer must specifically request that the modifier benefit be applied.
For example, the customer must provide a special discount number or the benefit
will not be applied. If the pricing engine selects multiple modifiers to apply to an
order line, the modifiers for By request only receive a higher preference than other
modifiers.
For modifier types of Promotion and Deal, in the Parent Promotions Detail region, a
parent-child relationship appears for reporting purposes. A Deal modifier list must
be associated with a Parent Promotion by providing the promotion name and
version. Since this association is for reporting purposes, information that you define
on the promotion is independent of and does not affect the information on the Deal
modifier. The Promotion must already exist before you can select it.

14. Click Next to display the Qualifiers page where you can define eligibility rules for
the modifier list. See Creating Qualifiers (HTML Interface), page 5-4.

Warning: When a qualifier is attached to a price list or modifier
header, the effective dates of that QUALIFIER determine the
effective dates for the price list or modifier list NOT the effective
dates defined in the price list or modifier list window. For example,
suppose you create a price list with an effective start date of
23-NOV-2005 and no end date; then you create a qualifier at the
header level with effective dates of 10-NOV-2005 and 12-NOV-2005
for customer Computer Service and Rentals. However, after

Modifiers 3-69

12-NOV-2005, the price list will not be valid for Computer Service
and Rentals or any other customer and the price list becomes
expired.

Qualifiers page

15. Complete your entries, then choose one of the following:

• Click Next to review your entries before saving your work. If changes are
required, click the Back button and update the information.

• Click Finish to save your work. A Confirmation page confirms that the modifier
list has been created, and asks if you want to add modifier lines.

Important: All modifier (and price lists) created in HTML are
created as inactive lists. You must select the Active field (which
only appears after the list is created) from the Update General
Information page to make the modifier list active.

Related Topics
Creating Modifier Lines (HTML Interface), page 3-71
Creating a Discount Modifier Line (HTML), page 3-75


Creating a Promotional Goods Modifier Line (HTML), page 3-83
Creating a Price Break Modifier Line (HTML Interface), page 3-78
Creating a Surcharge Modifier Line (HTML Interface), page 3-87

Creating Modifier Lines (HTML Interface)
Once you create the modifier list, you can add modifier lines that define the type of
price adjustments and benefits that the pricing engine applies to pricing requests. The
following table shows the type of modifier line types you can create for a selected
modifier list type:

For the following Modifier List Types.. You can create these Modifier Line Types

Deal Discount, Price Break, Promotional Goods, or
Surcharge

Discount List Discount, Price Break, or Surcharge

Promotion List Discount, Price Break, Promotional Goods, or
Surcharge

Surcharge List Price Break, Surcharge

interface.

To create modifier lines:
1. Navigate to the Create Line page to complete your entries.

2. Complete your entries:
• Modifier Type: The modifier line type you can select depends on the modifier
list type selected:
• Discount: Creates a negative price adjustment.

• Promotional Goods: Adds a new item to the order line with a price
adjustment or benefit when the customer orders a particular item on the
same order.

Modifiers 3-71

• Price Break: Applies a variable discount or surcharge price adjustment to a
pricing request based meeting the condition of a break type. You can use
both point and range type breaks.

• Surcharge: Creates a positive price adjustment. For example, a 10 percent
handling charge is applied to a customer order.
The modifier Line Number defaults and can be updated. Each modifier line
number must be unique within the modifier list (the line number cannot be
duplicated).

• End Date: If you do not end an End Date then the modifier does not expire.

Related Topics
Creating a Discount Modifier Line (HTML), page 3-75
Creating a Promotional Goods Modifier Line (HTML), page 3-83
Creating a Price Break Modifier Line, page 3-78
Creating a Surcharge, page 3-87

Defining Controls for Modifier Lines (HTML Interface)
In the Controls page, you define pricing controls that govern how the modifier line
should be applied.


To define controls for a modifier line (HTML Interface):

Controls page

1. Select a Modifier Level at which the modifier line should be applied:
• Line: Applies only to a specific order line.

• Group of Lines: Applies to groups of lines in the order.
When Group of Lines is selected as the modifier level, then the Volume Type,
Product Attribute, and Product Attribute Value fields become mandatory fields.
This condition is true regardless of the modifier type selected, such as
(Discount, Surcharge, PBH, and so on).

• Order: Applies to an entire order. If Order is selected, then all products on the
order will receive the benefit or price adjustment.
For example, a volume-based discount modifier applied at the line level will
consider only volume on the qualifying line. A volume-based discount modifier
applied at the group of lines level will process the volume across all qualifying
lines in the product hierarchy.

2. Select from other pricing controls:
• Pricing Phase: Defines the point in the order process when the pricing engine
applies the modifier adjustment. See the Oracle Advanced Pricing Implementation
Guide for more information on pricing phases.

• Bucket: Pricing buckets enable you to control how discounts and other benefits
are applied using cascading price adjustments. They can be used to determine

Modifiers 3-73

the net selling price across all pricing phases.

Important: You must select a Bucket value to display the Net
Amount Calculation field in the Product page.

When the pricing engine calculates price adjustments, it:
• Calculates percent type modifiers using the previous bucket's subtotal

• Sums all bucket modifier values to create a bucket subtotal

If the Bucket field is left blank, the modifier line is assigned to a Null bucket.
Modifiers assigned to a Null bucket are applied last and always adjust from the
list price. In addition, Order level modifiers must be in the Null bucket. For
more information, see Oracle Advanced Pricing Implementation Guide.

• Incompatibility Group: You can assign a modifier line to one of the following
incompatibility groups:
• Exclusive: If one of the modifiers is Exclusive, then only the Exclusive
modifier is applied.

• Group 1 incompatibility



Incompatibility occurs when the pricing engine finds more than one modifier
line to return but can apply only one. The pricing engine evaluates eligible
modifier lines from each incompatibility group, and then resolves any
incompatibility between modifier lines by using either precedence or best price.
Only one modifier within the same incompatibility group will be applied for
each phase. For more information, see the Oracle Advanced Pricing

• Apply automatically: Select this option so the pricing engine automatically
applies the modifier line. Certain modifiers must be applied automatically and
in these cases, you cannot change the value.

• By Request Only: On the modifier line, the By Request Only check box is
read-only, based on the value selected for the modifier list. This field is visible
only for modifier list types of Promotion or Deal.

• Allow Benefit Override: Enables the modifier-adjusted price to be manually
overridden. If not selected, then the modifier-adjusted price cannot be
overridden. For range break price break lines, do not select the Allow Benefit


Override check box.

Note: The Allow Benefit Override box displays only for
modifier types that support overrides.

Creating a Discount Modifier Line (HTML Interface)
You can create a discount modifier line to create a negative price adjustment. For
example, to give a 10 percent discount.

To create a discount modifier line:
1. Navigate to the Create Line page. For more information, see Creating Modifier
Lines (HTML Interface), page 3-71.

2. Select Discount as the Modifier Type.
The modifier Line Number defaults and can be updated. Each modifier line number
must be unique within the modifier list (the line number cannot be duplicated).

3. Click Continue to display the Create Discount Line: Controls page. In this page, you
can define controls for the modifier line. For more information on setting up and
using controls, see Defining Controls, page 3-72.

4. After you have set up the controls, click Next to display the Create Discount Line:
Product and Benefit page.

Modifiers 3-75

Create Discount Line: Product and Benefit page

5. Enter information about the product and product volume.

Note: The Product and its related fields will not display if you
selected Modifier Level = Order in the Controls page. This means
that all products on the order will receive the pricing adjustment
you define.

• Product: Select the product that is eligible for the discount. The Product
Description defaults based on the product selected.

• Volume Method: Select a Volume Method to define specific volume
requirements.

If you select a Volume Method, then the following fields display:
• Value From/To: For the selected Volume Method, enter the Value From/To
(where applicable). For example, if you selected Is Between, then you can enter
a range in the Value From and Value To fields.

• Based On: Select a value to define how the buy volume is evaluated before the
benefit is given:


• Item Quantity: Creates an adjustment based on the number of items that the
customer orders.

• Item Amount: This could be a monetary value.

6. In the Pricing Attributes region, define the attributes for the selected product:
• Attribute: Select a pricing attribute(s) that further define how you want to price
the product such as by color or size. The Context value defaults and is display
only.

• Excluded Products: You can exclude certain products so that the pricing
adjustments from the modifier line will not be applied to those products. For
example, suppose you set up a Discount modifier line for the Item Category of
shoes, but you wanted to exclude designer shoes from the price adjustment.
Therefore, in the Excluded Products region, you would select designer shoes to
be excluded from the price adjustment.

Note: The Excluded Products region does not appear if Item
Number is selected as the Product or if the Product field is left
blank.

Benefit region
• Value: Enter a Value, then select an Adjustment Method. For example, if you
selected Percent as the adjustment method, enter 10 as the Value to give a 10
percent adjustment.

• Formula: Optionally, select a Formula.

Note: Both the Value and Formula fields are not required, but
at least one of these fields must be entered. Formulas are
available for modifier lines types of Discount and Surcharge.

• Adjustment Method: Select an Adjustment Method that defines how the pricing
engine applies this modifier. For more information, see Adjustment Method,
page 3-4.

the modifier line.

8. Complete your entries, and click Next to proceed to the review page, or click Finish
to skip the review page and save the line.
A Confirmation message confirms if the modifier line is successfully created.

Modifiers 3-77

Related Topics

Creating a Price Break Modifier Line (HTML Interface)
You can use a price break modifier to apply a variable discount or surcharge price
adjustment to a pricing request based on the conditions of the break type. You can use
both point and range type breaks:
• Point: The pricing engine charges each unit of volume at the price of the break
within which the total falls.

• Range: The pricing engine charges each unit of volume at the price of the break
within which it falls.

The following table provides an example of a price break sequence:

Product Attribute Value From Value To Value (%)

Item A 0 100 5

Item A 100 200 10

Item A 200 Null 15

Suppose a customer is eligible for the preceding price break, and places an order for a
quantity of 150 of Item A. The pricing engine calculates the discount differently
depending on the type of price break selected:
• Point: If the total quantity of Item A is 150, the discount is against 150 at 10 percent.

• Range: If the total quantity of Item A is 150, the discount is against 100 at 5 percent
and 50 at 10 percent

Continuous Price Breaks


Price Break Feature Example of Price
Break Setup

All newly-created price breaks are created as continuous price breaks. 0-100
These are price break lines without gaps between subsequent price
break ranges. 100-200

Example: The first break (0-100) means greater than 0 but less than or 200-300
equal to 100. A quantity of 100 is eligible for the first price break range
(0-100), but a quantity of 100.1 would be eligible for the second price
break range (100-200).

Value From of first break range starts with 0. 0-100

(greater than 0 to less
than or equal to 100)

Value From of the current price break (other than the first break range) • 100-200
matches the Value To of the previous break.
• 200-300

Important: If you copy a price break from a pre-R12 release (for
example, by copying a price list or modifier list with price breaks or
copying a price break line--actions you can complete in the
Forms-based UI) , then the price breaks are converted automatically to
the continuous format. This conversion changes the price break setup
and processing; therefore, you must review the converted price breaks
to ensure they continue to achieve your desired pricing results. The
following table describes the continuous price break features:

To create a price break line:
1. Navigate to the Create Line page. For more information, see Creating Modifier
Lines (HTML Interface), page 3-71.

2. Select Price Break as the Modifier Type.

3. Click Continue to display the Create Price Break Line: Controls page. In this page,
you can define controls for the modifier line. For more information on setting up
and using controls, see Defining Controls, page 3-72.

4. After you have set up the controls, click Next to display the Products page.

Modifiers 3-79

Create Price Break Line: Products page

5. Enter information about the product and product volume that the customer must
buy to get the benefit.
• Product: Select the product that is eligible for the price break. The Product
Description defaults based on the product selected.

Note: If All Items is selected for Product Level, then the
Product Description field defaults to All meaning all products.

• UOM (unit of measure): The UOM value defaults if an item is selected.

• Precedence: Defaults based on the product level selected. You can overtype this
value.

6. In the Pricing Attributes region, select the attribute information:
• Attribute: Select the pricing attributes that further define how you want to price
the product such as by color or size. The Context value defaults and is display
only.

• Excluded Products: The Excluded Products region does not appear if Item
Number is selected as the Product Level or if the Product Level field is left


blank. You can exclude certain products so that the pricing adjustments from
the modifier line will not be applied to those products.
Product Level and Product: Select the product level and product to be excluded
from the Item Category or All Items selected in the Product Level field.
For example, suppose you set up a Discount modifier line for the Item Category
of shoes but you want to exclude designer shoes from the price adjustment.
Therefore, in the Excluded Products region, you would select designer shoes to
be excluded from the price adjustment.

7. In the Price Break Benefits region, define the price break benefits for the modifier
line:
• Adjustment Type: Select an Adjustment Type such as Discount or Surcharge.

• Volume Based on: Select a Volume Based on value to define how the buy
volume is evaluated before the benefit is given:
• Item Quantity: Creates a price break based on the number of items that the
customer orders.

• Item Amount: This could be a monetary value. (Item Amount must be
selected to use the Net Amount Calculation feature.)

• Accumulate Line Quantity: Creates an accumulated range price break that
accumulates across orders.

• Volume Method: Select either Point or Range. For more information, see Using
Point and Range Price Breaks, page 3-78.

• Accumulation Attribute: Select an Accumulation Attribute that defines the
value to be accumulated. This option can only be selected for Range price
breaks. For more information, see Using Accumulated Range Breaks, page 3-48.

Note: This field displays only if Accumulate Line Quantity is
selected in the Volume Based on field.

8. Optionally, select Net Amount Calculation to calculate the selling price based on
the bucketed Item Amount volume. For more information, see Using Net Amount
with Price Breaks, page 3-44.
To use Net Amount Calculation, the following fields must also be selected.
• On Controls page:
- Bucket

Modifiers 3-81

- Modifier Level: Line or Group of Lines (Group of Lines must be selected to
use the For matching products option from the Net Amount Calculation field.)
- Apply automatically box

• On Products page: Volume Based on is Item Amount.

9. After you have set up the products, click Next to see the Benefits page.

Create Price Break Line: Benefits

10. Define the following values for each price break:

• Value From/To: Define the price break range. For example, to define a break for
the first 10 items ordered, create a range from 0-10. To do this, enter 0 in Value
From and 10 in Value To.

Note: If you leave the Value To field blank, a value of 999999..
(15 digits long) defaults in the database, but does not display in
the Value To field.

• Adjustment Value: Defines the value of the adjustment. For example, if you
enter 10 in the Adjustment Value field and select Percent as the Adjustment
Method, then you create a 10 percent adjustment.

• Adjustment Method: Defines how the price is to be adjusted. For more
information, see Adjustment Method, page 3-4.


• Formula: Optionally, select a Formula if you are using a formula to calculate the
benefit.

11. Click Next to see the Qualifiers page, where you can define eligibility rules for the
modifier line.


Caution: After you save can the price break lines, they cannot be
removed. However, they can still be updated.

Creating a Promotional Goods Modifier Line (HTML Interface)
When the customer orders one or more specified items on the same order, you can
create a Promotional Goods modifier line to add a new item to an order and provide a
price adjustment or benefit for the item . The item does not need to be originally on the
order. Even if the item is on the order, the pricing engine creates a new line for the item.

Note: Recurring other item discounts are not supported.

To create a promotional goods modifier line:
1. Navigate to the Create Line page, and select Promotional Goods as the Modifier
Type.

2. The modifier Line Number defaults and can be updated. Each modifier line number

3. Select a Start and End Date range when the modifier line is effective. You should
specify a range that coincides with the period of time that the benefit is offered. If
no End Date is entered, then the modifier line does not expire.

4. Click Continue to display the Create Promotional Goods Line: Controls page. In this
page, you can define controls for the modifier line. For more information on setting
up and using controls, see Defining Controls, page 3-72.

5. After you have set up the controls, click Next to display the Required Products
page.

Modifiers 3-83

Create Promotional Goods Line: Required Products

6. Define the required buy product (or category) that the customer must order to get
the benefit. For example: you must buy a toothbrush to get a free bottle of
mouthwash.
• Product: Select the product. The Product Description defaults based on the
product selected.


value.

requirements.

If you selected a Volume Method, the following fields display:


benefit is given:
• Item Quantity: Creates an adjustment based on the number of items that the
customer orders.

• Item Amount: This could be a monetary value.

• Net Amount Calculation: Define Net Amount Calculation (optional step). You
can use net amount calculation to calculate the selling price based on the
bucketed Item Amount volume. For more information, see Using Net Amount
with Price Breaks, page 3-44.

Note: To use Net Amount Calculation , the following fields
must also be selected.
• In Controls page:
1. Bucket

2. Modifier Level: Line or Group of Lines (You must
select Group of Lines to select "For matching products"
from the Net Amount Calculation field.)

3. Apply automatically box

• In Products page: Based On is Item Amount

7. In the Pricing Attributes region, select pricing attributes that further define how you
want to price the product such as by color or size. The Context value defaults and is
display only.

8. In the Excluded Products region, select the product level and product to be
excluded from the Item Category or All Items selected in the Product Level field.
You can exclude certain products so that the pricing adjustments from the modifier
line will not be applied to those products.
For example, suppose you set up a Discount modifier line for the Item Category of
shoes but you wanted to exclude designer shoes from the price adjustment.
Therefore, in the Excluded Products region, you would select designer shoes to be
excluded from the price adjustment.

Number is selected as the Product Level or if the Product Level
field is left blank.

Modifiers 3-85

9. After you have set up the products, click Next to display the Benefits page.

Create Promotional Goods Line: Benefits page

10. Define the product the customers get after they purchase the buy product defined in
the Required Products page. For example, if they buy a toothbrush, the toothpaste
is automatically added to the order line at a 10 percent discount.
• Product: Select a Product. The Product Description defaults based on the
product selected.

• UOM: Enter a UOM (unit of measure) such as each (Ea). The unit of measure is
used with the Quantity field to determine how the benefit is applied.

• Price List: For the selected product, select a Price List. The list price will then
default based on the price list selected.

• Adjustment Method: Select an Adjustment Method that defines how the pricing
engine applies this modifier. For more information, see Adjustment Method,
page 3-4.

• Value: Enter the Value for the selected Adjustment Method. For example, if you
selected Percent as the adjustment method, enter 10 as the Value to give a 10
percent adjustment.

11. Optionally, click Add Another Row to add additional benefit lines, or click Remove
to remove a selected line. However, once the benefit line is created and saved, you
cannot remove this benefit line or update the product.



the modifier line.
If you are using a promotional modifier as a qualifier for another modifier, see
Using a Promotional Modifier as a Qualifier for Another Modifier, page 3-41.

13. Complete your entries and click Next to proceed to the review page, or click Finish
to skip the review page and save the line. A Confirmation message confirms if the
modifier line is successfully created.

Notes:
• Changing the quantity of the free promotional good added to the order line: To
prevent a user from changing the quantity of the free promotional good added to
the order line (for example, changing the quantity of the promotional good from 1
to 2), select the Pricing Phase 30 (All Lines adjustment) when you create the
promotional modifier.

• Deleting and reapplying a Promotional Goods modifier line: If you apply a modifier
line of type Promotional Goods to an order, then delete the modifier line, you
cannot reapply the deleted Promotional Goods modifier line.

Related Topics

Creating a Surcharge Modifier Line (HTML Interface)
You can use a Surcharge modifier line to add a positive price adjustment. For example,
to apply a 10 percent special charge to a customer's order.
1. Navigate to the Create Line page and select Surcharge as the Modifier Type.

2. Select a Start and End Date range when the modifier line is effective. You should
specify a range that coincides with the period of time that the benefit is offered. If
no End Date is entered, then the modifier line does not expire.

3. Click Continue to display the Controls page. In this page, you can define controls
for the modifier line. For more information on setting up and using controls, see
Defining Controls, page 3-72.

4. After you have set up the controls, click Next to display the Create Surcharge Line:
Product and Benefit page.

Modifiers 3-87

Create Surcharge Line: Product and Benefit page

5. Select the product(s) that will receive the surcharge:

Note: The Product and its related fields will not display if you
selected Modifier Level = Order in the Controls page. This means
that all products on the order will receive the pricing adjustment
you define.

• Product: Select a Product. The Product Description defaults based on the
product selected.


• Unit of measure (UOM): The UOM defaults if an item is selected.

value.



requirements.

If you selected a Volume Method, then the following fields display:

benefit is given:
• Item Quantity: Creates a price break based on the number of items that the
customer orders.

• Item Amount: This could be a monetary value. (Item Amount must be
selected to use the Net Amount Calculation feature.)

6. In the Pricing Attributes region, select the pricing attributes that further define how
you want to price the product such as by color or size. The Context value defaults
and is display only.

7. In the Excluded Products region, select the product level and product to be
excluded from the Item Category or All Items selected in the Product Level field.
You can exclude certain products so that the pricing adjustments from the modifier
line will not be applied to those products.
For example, suppose you set up a Discount modifier line for the Item Category of
shoes but you want to exclude designer shoes from the price adjustment. Therefore,
in the Excluded Products region, you would select designer shoes to be excluded
from the price adjustment.

Number is selected as the Product or if the Product field is left
blank.

8. Optionally, click Add Another Row to add additional benefit lines, or click Remove
to remove a selected line. However, once the benefit line is created and saved, you
cannot remove this benefit line or update the product.

9. In the Benefit region, select the following values:
• Value: Enter a Value, then select an Adjustment Method that defines how the
pricing engine applies this modifier. For example, if you selected Percent as the
adjustment method, enter 10 as the Value to give a 10 percent adjustment. For
more information, see Adjustment Method, page 3-4.

• Formula: Optionally, select a Formula.

Modifiers 3-89

Note: Both the Value and Formula fields are not required, but
at least one of these fields must be entered. Formulas are
available for modifier lines types of Discount and Surcharge.

the modifier line. For more information, on setting up qualifiers, see Creating
Qualifiers (HTML Interface), page 5-4.


Related Topics

Searching for Modifier Lists (HTML Interface)
In the Modifier Lists Search page, you can use searches to quickly retrieve information
about modifiers. This helps you find information essential to your business such as:
• All modifier lists in USD currency.

• Specific modifier lines.

• All active Promotion modifier lists.

• All modifier lists for Customer A.

• All discount modifier lists.

• All promotions that will end on May 31 (must be an exact date match only).

Note: Alternately, you can do searches for modifier lists from the
Oracle Advanced Pricing Home page.

Once the search results are returned, you can view a summary of modifier lists, view
general information about the modifier list such as Name, Number, Type, Start/End
Dates, and Active status, or select a specific modifier list to view additional details.
In addition to viewing the modifier lists, you can choose to update, and create a new
modifier list.


Note: You must be assigned Maintain privileges in pricing security to
update or create a new modifier. The Details icon is enabled if you have
view or update privileges assigned through pricing security.

To search for modifier lists:
1. Navigate to the Modifier Lists Search page.

Modifier Lists Search page

2. Select a search category from the Search list, then enter additional criteria next to
the Search list to narrow your search results. Select from the following search
categories:
• Status: Search by Active or non-Active modifier lists.
• Active: Finds all Active modifier lists.

• Inactive: Finds Inactive modifier lists.

• Currency: Search by Currency. Select a specific currency such as USD (US
dollars) to find all modifier lists set up in USD.

• List Name: Search by the modifier list name. Enter a specific name or enter the
percent sign (%) to list all modifier lists.

• Dates: Search by modifier list Dates. These start and end dates must match
exactly to the dates in the modifier list setup.

• Line Number: Search by a modifier line number.

• Type: Search by a specific modifier list type such as Deal, Discount List,

Modifiers 3-91

Promotion, or Surcharge List.

• List Number: Search by modifier list number. Enter a List Number to find a
specific modifier list.
For example, to find a modifier list by its name, select Name from the Search
list, then enter the specific name of the modifier list such as Summer Discount
Modifier.

3. Click Go to display the following search results in a table:
• Name: The modifier list Name.

• Number: The modifier list Number.

• Type: The modifier list Type.

• Start/End Date: The start and end date for the modifier list.

• Active: Indicates if the modifier is Active or Inactive.

Optionally, click Update to update the modifier list, or click Details to view
additional details about the modifier list.

Note: When pricing security is turned off, either the Details or
Update icon displays depending on the profile QP: Source System.
If the modifier list is created in a different source system within the
same PTE, you can only view the list. You can only update the
modifier list that matches your PTE and Source System.

Related Topics
Oracle Advanced Pricing Home page (HTML Interface), page 2-39
Creating a Modifier List (HTML Interface), page 3-64
Updating a Modifier (HTML Interface), page 3-92

Updating a Modifier (HTML Interface)
You can update a modifier to change information such as its effective start and end
dates then save your changes. All fields can be updated except for the List Type, Pricing
Transaction Entity (if there are modifier lines), Source System (if there are modifier
lines), Name, and Number.



interface. For more information, see Pricing Security (HTML Interface),
page 3-63.

To update a modifier:
1. Navigate to the Update [Modifier Type]: General Information page.

Note: The actual page name depends on the type of modifier being
updated.

Update [Modifier Type]: General Information page

2. Update the fields that require changes:
• Version Number

• Requested Ship date

• Start/End Date

• Order Date From/To

• Requested Ship Date From/To

Modifiers 3-93

• Description

• Currency

3. Select or clear the By Request Only check box (if applicable).

4. Select or clear the Active box:
• To make a modifier active, select Active.

• To make a modifier inactive, clear Active.
When a modifier list is first created, it is Inactive. The pricing engine evaluates
only Active modifiers (when the Active box is selected). When a modifier is no
longer required, change the status of the modifier to Inactive so only Active
modifiers are evaluated.

5. Click Apply to save the changes.
A Confirmation pages displays to advise you if the changes were updated
successfully.

Related Topics
Creating a Modifier List (HTML Interface), page 3-64
Updating a Qualifier (HTML Interface), page 5-8

Updating a Modifier Line (HTML Interface)
You can update an existing modifier line to change information such as controls,
products and benefits, and qualifiers. You can add additional qualifiers, excluded items,
and additional buy and get products.
However, you cannot update the following:
• The primary buy product for the modifier line cannot be removed or changed.

• Once a modifier line is saved, you cannot delete additional buy and get items.

The following fields cannot be updated: List Type, Pricing Transaction Entity/Source
System, Name, Number, Product Level, Product, Modifier Level, and Line Number.

interface. For more information, see Oracle Advanced Pricing


Implementation Guide, Pricing Security.

To update a modifier line:
1. Navigate to the Update [Modifier Type]: Modifier Lines page.

2. To find modifier lines for the selected modifier, select a Search category and enter
additional criteria for the selected category:
• Line Number: Enter a modifier line number.

• Type: Select a modifier Type to search by: Discount, Price Break, Promotional
Goods, and Surcharge.

3. Click Go to display the search results.

4. Click Update to display the Update Line page.

Update Line page--Controls tab

5. Select the Controls tab to update controls that define how the modifier line is
applied such as the Start/End Dates, Pricing Phase, Bucket, and Incompatibility
Levels. See Defining Controls for Modifier Lines (HTML Interface), page 3-72.

6. Select the Products tab to update information related to the selected product such as
UOM and Precedence. You cannot update the Product Level or Product in the
update mode.

Modifiers 3-95

Note: A Products tab and Benefits tab display when you are
updating a price break line. For other line types, a combined
Product And Benefit tab displays instead.

Products tab

7. In the Pricing Attributes region (if applicable), you can update, add, or remove
pricing attributes related to the product.

8. In the Price Break Benefits region (if applicable), you can update the Adjustment
Type, Volume Based on, Volume Method, and related fields.

9. Select the Benefits tab to update the benefit information for the modifier line such as
Value From/To, Adjustment Value, Adjustment Method, and Formula. For
example, you could change the Adjustment Value from 10 to 15 for the Adjustment
Method of Percent.


Benefits tab

10. Select the Qualifiers tab to update qualifiers and qualifier groups currently
associated with the modifier line. You can update the qualifier information, add
new qualifiers by clicking Create Qualifier, or append qualifier groups by clicking
Append Group.

Modifiers 3-97

Qualifiers tab

11. After you have completed all your updates, click Apply to save your changes.

Related Topics
Appending a Qualifier Group (HTML Interface), page 5-8
Deleting a Qualifier (HTML Interface), page 5-8

Redeeming Accruals
You can mark accrued price adjustments as redeemed and record redemption
transaction information. In addition, you can cancel coupons recorded as redeemed in
error.

To redeem accruals:
1. Navigate to the Redeem Accruals window.

Note: You cannot create an accrual record in this window.


Redeem Accruals window

2. Do a query to retrieve the accruals. For example, query by Customer name to find
all unredeemed accruals for that customer. The window only displays accrual
records that the pricing engine created.

3. Select the accrual record.

4. Do the following steps for each accrual that you want to redeem:

Note: You cannot mark an accrual record as partially redeemed.
For example, a customer purchases a computer and accrues 100 air
miles. You cannot mark 60 air miles redeemed at one time and 40
air miles redeemed later.

5. Select the Redeemed box.

6. Enter the Transaction Reference number for the system that redeemed the accrual.

7. Enter the Payment System that issued the payment for the accrual.

8. Enter the Redeemed Date (the default is the current date).
Alternately, to mark a redeemed accrual record as unredeemed, clear Redeemed.
Verify that the Transaction Reference, Payment System, and Redeemed Date fields
are blank.

9. Save your work.

Modifiers 3-99

Changing Modifier Incompatibility
When you create modifier lines, you can assign a phase and an incompatibility group to
each modifier line. Multiple incompatibility groups can be assigned to each pricing
phase.
Pricing business rules allow the pricing engine to apply only one modifier for each
incompatibility level and phase combination; any incompatibilities must be resolved.
You can review and change incompatibilities in the Incompatibility Groups window.
For each incompatibility group within a specific phase, you can view the modifier lines
assigned to one incompatibility group or reassign them to another group.

Note: If you are unable to access or update this window, you may not
have the appropriate access privileges. Ask your Pricing Administrator.

Incompatibility between modifiers can be resolved using either Precedence or Best
Price:
• Precedence: During the phase List Line Base Price, if the pricing engine selects more
than one eligible modifier list line in the desired unit of measure, it resolves the
incompatibility by picking the modifier list line with the highest precedence; for
example, 1 has higher precedence than 2.
In the pricing phase, List Line Base Price, regardless of the value of the
Incompatibility Code set at the User level, the pricing engine selects the list price
based on Precedence only.

Note: Use the Event Phases window to set the Incompatibility
Resolve Code for a phase.

• Best Price: For the phases, List Line Adjustment, All Line Adjustments, and Header
Level Adjustments, if the pricing engine selects more than one eligible modifier, it
resolves the incompatibility using best price processing.
Best price processing instructs the pricing engine to select the modifier that offers
the lowest price to the customer. For non-monetary modifiers, the pricing engine
uses the estimated general ledger value of the modifier as the value of the modifier.

Note: For Freight/Special Charges, if an Incompatibility Group is
not selected for the modifier line, the pricing engine will apply
BEST_PRICE regardless of the Incompatibility Resolve Code set for
the event phase. In these cases, the best price is the highercharge, not
the lowest.

During precedence processing if two or more modifiers tie based on precedence


processing, then the engine resolves using best price processing WITHOUT going
below the established precedence.
The following table shows an example of the pricing engine using precedence to resolve
incompatibilities. The Engine Applies column indicates whether the pricing engine
selects the modifier.

Modifier Phase Incompatibility Precedence Engine Applies
Level

10% Discount 30 1 260 No

$100 Promotion 30 1 240 Yes

Free 30 2 260 Yes
Promotional
Good

$50 Lumpsum 30 3 200 Yes

3% Discount 30 3 240 No

$25 Deal 40 1 260 Yes

Note: Refer to the phase event mapping discussion to learn how to set
phase incompatibility resolution.

Freight and Special Charges Modifier and Incompatibility Processing
Incompatibility processing considers all the modifier types such as Freight and Special
Charges and evaluates them as a single entity. Once the incompatibility processing is
complete, only one modifier remains which may or may not be the Freight and Special
Charge modifier type depending on the incompatibility setup.

Note: For Freight/Special Charges: If an Incompatibility Group is not
selected for the modifier line, then the pricing engine will use Best Price
incompatibility processing instead of Precedence. The type of engine
processing can be defined in the Incompatibility Resolve Code field in
the Event Phases window.

Exclusive Modifiers and Incompatibility Processing
You can create one exclusive modifier in each pricing phase. When the pricing engine
encounters an exclusive modifier, it suspends incompatibility pricing for the phase and
applies only the exclusive modifier. However, during exclusive and/or incompatibility

Modifiers 3-101

processing, an order level modifier will not be compared to a Line level or Group of
Lines level modifier.

To change modifier incompatibility:
1. Navigate to the Incompatibility Groups window.

Incompatibility Groups window

2. Click the Search icon to display the Find Incompatibility Groups window (if you are
in a blank Incompatibility Groups window). elect your search criteria to find
modifier lines associated with a particular phase or those assigned to a particular
Incompatibility Group:
• Phase Sequence

• Phase Name

• Incompatibility Group

Note: If you by phase without specifying an Incompatibility
Group, the search returns all modifier lines for this phase, even
those not assigned with an incompatibility group.

3. Click Find to view the search results in the Incompatibility Groups window.

4. To change the assigned incompatible group for a modifier:


• Select a different incompatible group from the Incompatible Group column.

• Alternatively, select the modifier and click Modifiers to display the modifier
details in the Advanced Pricing - Define Modifier window. In the Modifiers
Summary tab, select a different Incompatibility Group.

5. Save your work.

Archiving and Purging Modifiers
You can archive pricing entities such as modifiers and modifier lines by copying pricing
data from the pricing application tables to archive tables for long-term data storage.
Pricing data that is archived into the permanent pricing archive tables is deleted from
the pricing application tables.
By archiving and purging records, the number of pricing records that need to be
queried or processed by the pricing engine is reduced, potentially resulting in improved
performance.
When the archived data is no longer required or does not need to be retained for legal
retention purposes, then you can use the purge feature to purge the data from the
archive tables.

Related Topics

Using the Pricing Organizer
Use the Pricing Organizer for creating and saving queries (searches) so you can manage
and track your modifiers more efficiently.
You can save frequently-used queries and re-run them without having to re-enter the
query criteria. The query can be saved as either a Personal or Public query: a Personal
query is not shared with other users while a Public query is shared with other users.
When saving a query, select the Public check box to save it as a public query in the
Public Folder; otherwise it is saved as a personal query in the Personal Folder.
Once you have saved your queries, you can rename an existing query, move queries
between Public and Personal folders, or delete a query that is no longer required.

• If Pricing Security is ON, a user with View Only access privilege
can view modifier information if it displays in the search results.
Maintain privilege is required to make any changes.

Modifiers 3-103

• A public query can be renamed, moved from Public to Personal
folder, or deleted only if the value of the profile option QP:
Administer Public Queries is set to Y (Yes).

To create a modifier query:
1. Do a query in the Find Modifiers window to display the search results.

2. Right-click the Search Results folder in the left pane to display the query menu.

3. Choose Save to display the User Defined Queries window.

4. Enter a Name for the query.

5. Select Public to save the query as a Public query that can be shared with other users.
Otherwise, it is saved as a Personal query.

6. Click OK to save the query.

To open a queried modifier (from the Pricing Organizer):
You can select a record from either the Headers or Lines tabs and click Open Modifier
to view additional details about the modifier or modifier line.

Note: If you select Restrict Lines and click Open Modifier, only those
lines that meet the query criteria on the Find Modifiers window are
displayed. They display in the Modifiers Summary tab of the Advanced
Pricing - Define Modifier window.

To rename a saved modifier query:
1. Find the saved query to be renamed in either the Personal Folders or Public Folders.

2. Right-click the query name to display the menu, then choose Rename Query to
display the User Defined Queries window.

3. Enter the new name and click OK.

To move a saved query between the Personal or Public folder:
1. Find the saved query to be moved in either the Personal Folders or Public Folders.

2. Right-click the query name to display the menu, then choose Rename Query to
display the User Defined Queries window.


3. Select or clear the Public box and click OK. The selected query has now moved over.

To delete a modifier query:
1. Select the query to be deleted in either the Personal Folders or Public Folders.

2. Right-click the query name, then select Delete to display the Decision window.

3. In the Decision window, click Yes to delete or No to return to the Pricing Organizer
window.

4. Save your work.

Finding Modifiers (Pricing Organizer)
In the Find Modifiers window, you can create queries to find specific modifier and
modifier line information essential to your business such as:
• All the active automatic promotions for customer A for a given source system.

• All the active promotions for customers within the Western region for the month of
May.

• All discounts for item A that customer B is qualified for.

• All promotions that will end by May 31st for a given customer

• All modifiers that use price list A as a qualifier.

• All modifiers for my product category that customer C is eligible for if they ask for
the promotion.

You can enter you query criteria in one tab or across multiple tabs to reduce your search
results. After you select the query criteria, click Find to retrieve the search results. The
modifier(s) that match all the specified search criteria display in the Pricing Organizer
window:
• Header tab: Displays a summary of the modifiers' header information.

• Lines tab: Displays a summary of modifier line details provided at least one query
criteria has been entered in the Lines, Additional Lines, Products, Pricing
Attributes, or Qualifiers tab.

Select a modifier header or line detail from the Headers or Lines tab to view the
modifier details. You can open a specific modifier from the Pricing Organizer window.
1. From the Find Modifiers window, enter at least one query criteria then click Find to
run the query.

Modifiers 3-105

Note: Alternatively, to run a saved query, just double-click the
query name in the Personal or Public folder in the Pricing
Organizer window.

Lines tab
You cannot query the following:
• additional buy items for promotional goods or other item discounts

• get items for promotional goods or other item discounts

• price break lines details

Additional Lines Criteria tab
You can select query criteria if Coupon Issue, Price Break Header, or Discount is
selected as the Modifier Type in the Lines tab or if a modifier type is not selected in
the Lines tab. Otherwise, the fields are grayed you cannot make any selections.
Product Attributes tab
• Product Attributes: Select one of the following:
• Not Specified: If this option is selected, the remaining fields on the window
are greyed out and the query ignores whether a modifier line has product
attributes or not. This is the defaulted value and additional query criteria is
needed for the query to execute.

• Products: This enables you to query the specified fields on the window.

• No Products: If this option is selected, the remaining fields on the window
are greyed out. The query returns modifier lines that do not have any
product attributes defined

If you select Products in the Product Attributes field, you can also query by
Exclude Items.

• Product Attribute Value: Can be entered only after a Product Attribute has been
selected.

• Exclude Items region: Enter one or more Exclude Items. The query retrieves
modifiers that have that item defined as an Exclude Item. If more than one
exclude product is selected, then modifiers with at least one of the Exclude
Items defined are retrieved.

Note: When querying by an item, the query results will return
modifier lines that specify the item number and not include
modifier lines for item category.


Pricing Attributes tab
• Pricing Attributes: Select one of the following:
are greyed out and the query ignores whether a modifier line has Pricing
Attributes or not. This is the defaulted value and additional query criteria is
needed to run the query.

• Pricing Attributes: This option enables the query fields on the window.
Enables you to query by one or more combinations of Pricing
Context/Attributes. For example, you could query by Volume (Pricing
Context) and Total Item Quantity (Pricing Attribute). If no values are
entered, the query returns only those modifiers with at least one product
attribute.

• No Pricing Attributes: If this option is selected, the remaining fields on the
form are greyed out. The query will return modifier lines that do not have
any pricing attributes defined.

Select Pricing Attributes in the Pricing Attributes field to query by pricing
context. The Pricing Attribute field is enabled if a Pricing Context is selected.
The Pricing Attribute Value is enabled only after a Pricing Attribute has been
selected. You can specify up to 3 pricing attributes with a combination of
OR/AND operators.

• Operator: Select an operator value such as = or BETWEEN. The Value To field is
grayed out if the Operator value is =. If the operator value is left blank or is
BETWEEN, the query evaluates the values in the Value From and Value To
fields to determine if there is an exact match.

Qualifiers tab
• Qualifiers: Select one of the following options from the Qualifiers tab:
are greyed out and the query ignores whether a modifier line has a qualifier
attribute or not. This is the defaulted value and additional query criteria is
needed to run the query.

• Qualifiers: This option enables you to query the fields on the window:

Qualifier Field Name Value

Qualifier Context Customer

Qualifier Attribute Customer Name

Modifiers 3-107

Qualifier Field Name Value

Operator = (exact match)

Value World of Business

• No Qualifiers: If this option is selected, the remaining fields on the window
are greyed out. The query retrieves modifier lines that do not have any
qualifier attributes defined.

• Qualifier Attribute: The Qualifier Attribute field is enabled if a Qualifier
Context has been selected. The Value is enabled only after a qualifier attribute
has been selected. Otherwise, the fields are grayed out and you cannot specify
any qualifier values.

• Operator: Select one of the following operator values: =, BETWEEN, or NOT=. If
you select the = or NOT= operator, the Value To field is grayed out. For an exact
match choose =. For a range of values, select BETWEEN. If you want to filter
out values for a given range select NOT=. If the operator is left blank or
BETWEEN, the query evaluates the values in the Value From and Value To
fields to determine if there is an exact match.

• Exact Effective Date Match: Select the Exact Effective Date Match box to retrieve
modifiers with the dates specified in Effective From/To.

• Applies To Party Hierarchy: This field is only enabled if you select an Oracle
TCA (Trading Community Architecture) based Party in the Qualifier Attribute
field and Party Hierarchy Enabled flag is selected for the attribute in the
attribute management setup windows. Values for this field are:
• Null (default value): Retrieves modifiers that meet the other selected
qualifier criteria, regardless of the value of Applies To Party Hierarchy on
the qualifier.

• Yes: Retrieves modifiers that meet the other selected qualifier criteria and
where Applies To Party Hierarchy is selected on the qualifier.

• No: Retrieves modifiers that meet the other selected qualifier criteria and
where Applies To Party Hierarchy is not selected on the qualifier.

• OR/AND: You can specify up to 3 qualifiers by selecting the OR/AND
operators.


Examples of using AND/OR operators to query Pricing Qualifiers
You can select up to three qualifiers by specifying the OR/AND operators:
• Q1=Customer Name

• Q2= Order Type

• Q3 = Ship To

Conditions Modifier 1- Modifier 2 - Modifier 3 - Modifier 4 -
Cust Name, Customer Order Type Cust Name
Order Type, & Name and Ship To
Ship To

OR/OR Yes (Customer Yes (Customer Yes (Order Yes (Customer
Name/Order Name) Type) Name/Ship To)
Type/Ship To)

AND/AND Yes (Customer No (not No (not No (not
Name and Customer Customer Customer
Order Type Name and Name and Name and
and Ship To) Order Type Order Type Order Type
and Ship To) and Ship To) and Ship To)

OR/AND Yes (Customer Yes (Customer No (Not Order Yes (Customer
Name/Order Name) Type and Ship Name)
Type and Ship To)
To)

AND/OR Yes (Customer No (not No (not Yes (Ship To)
Name and Customer Customer
Order Name and Name and
Type/Ship To) Order Type) Order Type)

Null Q1, Yes (Order No (No Q1) Yes (Order Yes (Ship To)
And/OR Type/Ship To) Type)

Related Topics
Using the Pricing Organizer, page 3-103

Overview of Promotional Limits
Oracle Advanced Pricing enables you to set limits for benefits that a customer can
receive for a promotion, deal, or other modifier. By limiting the amount of a benefit that

Modifiers 3-109

can be received, you can keep promotional spending within budget and prevent
promotion budget overruns.

Note: If you cannot access the Promotional Limits window or make
updates, you may not have the appropriate access privilege. To make
any changes or updates to the windows, you must have Maintain
privileges. Contact your Pricing Administrator.

For example, promotional limits could be used to provide a 10 percent discount on the
first 500 units of an item sold, or a 10 percent discount for an item until the promotional
limit is reached; for example, once the promotion reaches $100,000. In addition to
setting limits on promotional spending, you can also monitor current and cumulative
promotional spending in real time, order by order.
You can set limits for a specific monetary value, such as the first $500, or by a specific
category, such as a customer. Oracle Advanced Pricing enables you to set limits in
terms of accrual units, discount cost, gross revenue, item quantity, and usage by
customer, by promotion, by promotion and customer. Within a promotion, deal, or
modifier, you can also set eligibility for limits by customer, product, or other entity:
• Customer: Define a limit by customer, a group of customers, or at any level in your
customer hierarchy.

• Product: Define a limit for a product or group of products in your product
hierarchy.

If multiple organizations exist for your corporation, you can set a different limit for each
sales organization, group of organizations in your company hierarchy, or give the same
limit for all. When entering a limit, you can select if you want to consider to set this
limit
• By organization

• Across all organizations

• For a specific organization.

You can define a limit across the current transaction or across all transactions to which a
promotion or modifier has been applied.
Enforcing Limits
Oracle Advanced Pricing enables you to set up an enforcement policy to manage
transactions if the promotional limits are exceeded. When the benefit amount for a
transaction or transaction lines exceed the set limit or available limit balance, the default
handling method resolves the situation.
For example, if a customer close to their promotional limit places a new order that
exceeds their limit amount, under a soft limit the customer gets the full promotion
benefit applied to the order. A status message is sent to the calling application (such as


Order Management) that the limit has been exceeded.
The default limit enforcement is set up by the System Administrator in the QP: Limit
Exceed Action profile option. You can accept the default or optionally, select an
alternative handling method. The following limit handling methods are available:
• Hard - Adjust Benefit Amount: Any partial benefit available will be given up to the
limit. A promotion based on Usage (number of times it is given) is considered to be
a hard limit.

• Soft - Full Benefit Amount: The full benefit of the promotion is given and a message
is sent to the calling application to advise that the limit has been exceeded. If a limit
is exceeded, then the order header and lines need to be placed on a promotional
limit hold until appropriate business processes allow progression of the entire sales
order. These processes may involve adjusting the promotional limits or repricing
the order.

In addition to setting hard and soft limits you can also make the following adjustments
when the limit is exceeded:
• Adjust the limit up or down while the enforcement is operating.

• Deactivate the promotion or increase the remaining available limit.

Related Topics
Creating Limits, page 3-111
Viewing Limit Balances and Transaction Details, page 3-118
Updating an Existing Limit Balance, page 3-121
Adjusting the Limit Amount, page 3-123

Creating Limits
Oracle Advanced Pricing enables you to create monetary or usage limits that a customer
can receive for a promotion, deal, or other modifier. You can create limits at the:
• Modifier header level for a promotion, deal, or modifier list.

• Modifier line level: Limits can be applied to line modifiers and applied to a line,
group of lines, or order.

• Both Modifier header and line levels. However, line limits cannot be created if the
Modifier Type for the modifier line is Other Item Discount, Promotional Goods,
Coupon Issue, Item Upgrade, or Term Substitution.

You can define header and line level limits using accrual units, discount cost, gross
revenue, item quantity and usage (by customer, promotion, or by promotion and

Modifiers 3-111

customer). The limit can be defined by a specific value or a limit for each element that
receives a promotion; for example, a limit of $100 for each customer. The following
examples illustrate different ways limits can be applied:
Customers
You can define limits for all individual customers, group of customers, or specifically
named customers; for example:
• No more than $100 of benefit to any one customer on any order from promotion Y.

• Customer XYZ is limited to $1,000 cumulative benefit from promotion X.

• All VIP customers are limited to $2,000 cumulative benefit.

Individual stock-keeping units (SKUs) or groups of SKUs
You can define limits for individual SKUs or groups of SKUs that are being promoted;
for example:
• Limit aggregate expense for promotion X to $50,000 for item 1234.

• Limit VIP customers to $2,000 cumulative benefit.

Individual or aggregated transactions
You can define limits that apply to individual transactions or aggregated transactions;
for example:
• Limit customers so they cannot exceed $50 for any order.

• Limit customers' use of promotion X for either $400 cumulative discount or placing
an order 3 times.

• Limit the total expense that customers may receive from a fall promotion to $5,000.

When setting up a limit, you must select a basis that defines the unit being monitored
for limit checking. Available limit bases are accrual units, charge amount, cumulative
discount amount, gross revenue, item quantity, and usage.
For example, if accrual units were used as the basis for monitoring units such as air
miles, the limit would monitor the number of air miles accrued.

Note: If the effective end date for a modifier has been reached, you can
still attach limits. However, the modifier and associated limit will not
be applied if the limit date is expired.

If you plan to set up promotional limits for the modifier, confirm using the following
table whether you can apply promotional limits to the desired modifier line type:


Modifier Line Type Can Promotional Limits be applied?

Coupon Issue No

Discount Yes

Item Upgrade No

Other Item Discount No

Price Break Header Yes

Promotional Goods No

Surcharge Yes

Term Substitution No

• To enter a limit for the modifier, the Automatic check box for the
modifier line must be selected, and the Override check box must be
deselected.

• Limits not copied to new modifier: If copying a modifier, existing
limits at either the line or header level, are not copied from the
original modifier to the new modifier. The promotional limits must
be created again for the new modifier.

• If no Product UOM was defined for the modifier line, line limits
with basis of Item Quantity will not get created. If no Benefit UOM
was defined for a modifier line, line limits with basis as Accrual
Units will not get created. If no Benefit or Product UOM is defined
for a modifier line, neither Item Quantity or Accrual Units displays
in the Basis list of values (LOV) and line limits cannot be created for
that line.

• Currently limits are not processed for modifiers out of phase. To
resolve this, you can include all the events, such as LINE, ORDER,
BOOK, SHIP, or BATCH, in all the phases in which you are setting
up automatic modifiers.

Modifiers 3-113

Prerequisites
Ì To use limits, Oracle Advanced Pricing must be installed and the System
Administrator must set the following profile options:
• QP: Promotional Limits Installed: Set to Y (Yes) to use limits.

• QP: Limit Exceed Action: Determines the default handling action if a pricing
request exceeds the promotional limit. This value appears as the initial default
value in the When Exceeded field (Define Limits window).
• Soft - Full Benefit Amount

• Hard - Adjust Benefit Amount

• OM: Promotion Limit Violation Action: Determines the hold action Order
Management will take when encountering a initial promotional hold returned
by the pricing engine. Set this profile option to place holds (or not place holds)
on an order or order line.

To create limits:
1. Click List Limits to enter a limit at the modifier header level, or Line Limits to enter
a limit at the modifier line level. The Automatic box for the modifier list or modifier
line must be selected otherwise the List Limits button or Line Limits button may be
grayed out.


Define Limits window

2. Complete your entries in the Define Limits window:
• Num: A unique limit number that defaults automatically to identify the limit
transaction.

• Basis: Select the Basis for the limit. The basis defines the type of limit that is
applied and how the consumption is measured. For example, if the basis is
Accrual Units, the limit is calculated by the number of units accrued such as
4,000 air miles. Select from the following available bases:
• Accrual Units: For example, each customer accrues 100 air miles for each 10
currency units spent up to a limit of 5,000 air miles per customer.

• Discount Cost: For example, when the cost of the promotion has exceeded
$50,000, the promotion ends.

• Gross Revenue: For example, each customer receives the promotion for the
first $250 that they order from the website.

• Item Quantity: For example, a customer receives $10 off a case of 12
one-gallon cans of orange juice for the first 1,000 cases.

• Usage: Usage can be based by customer, promotion, or both customer and
promotion:

Modifiers 3-115

• Customer: For example, each customer cannot get a promotion more than 5
times.

• Promotion: For example, promotion is available on the first 25 orders
placed.

• Promotion and Customer: For example, promotion is available to the first
25 different customers who place an order.
When a pricing request is processed, the pricing engine checks each request
against the limit to see if it exceeds the limit and applies the amount of the
benefit against the limit.

• Enforced: Select how you want the limits enforced:
• Select Across the Current Transaction if you want the pricing engine to
maintain a consumption record for each order that consumes the limit.

• Select Across All Transactions if you want the pricing engine to maintain
one consumption record for all orders that consume the limit.

• Amount: Enter the amount of the limit. You can increase or decrease an existing
limit; however, you cannot decrease it lower than the amount by which the
limit has been consumed. For example, if two orders each for $100 have
consumed the limit, you cannot lower the limit below $200.

• Unit: Defaults to a unit of measure that corresponds to the Basis selected: for
example, a currency unit such as USD for Gross currency.

• By Organization: To filter limits by sales organization, select . If enabled, the
organization for the transaction and modifier must match before the limit can
be applied. This enables you to restrict limits to transactions for your
organization.

Note: Even if the transaction is ineligible to receive the limit, it
may be eligible to receive the modifier.

• Constraint: Select a constraint to restrict the limit to a product or qualifier
attribute:
• Product Attribute: Set limits for a specific product(s).

• Qualifier Attribute: Set limits for a qualifier such as a customer, modifier
list, or order.
You can select additional criteria from the Constraint, Context, and


Attribute fields to restrict eligibility for limits by certain products or
qualifiers. For example, the following setup can be used to define eligibility
by customer name:

Constraint Context Attribute

Qualifier Attribute Customer Customer name

• Select Constraint 1 which can be either a product or qualifier attribute.

• Select a Context for the product or qualifier constraint.

• Select an Attribute for the Context. For example, if the Context is
Customer, you can select Customer name as the Attribute to restrict the
limit by customer name.

• You can define additional product or qualifier attributes in the
Constraint 2, Context 2, and Attribute 2 fields.

Note: If you select Constraint 2, Context 2, and
Attribute 2 or additional criteria, an and operator is
introduced which means that all criteria must be met
before the limits are applied.

• When Exceeded: Determines the handling action if a pricing request exceeds
the promotional limit. The initial value automatically defaults from the profile
option QP: Limit Exceed Action that is set up by the System Administrator.
Optionally, if you can select a different handling action:
• Hard - Adjust Benefit Amount:
Adjusts the order benefit amount so that the order meets but does not
exceed the promotional limit. For example, if a customer close to their
promotional limit places a new order that exceeds the limit amount, the
customer receives the benefit only until the amount is reached.

• Soft - Full Benefit Amount:
Soft limits provide a way to monitor your promotions while continuously
giving the benefit. When a soft limit is exceeded, pricing will still apply the
benefit (on subsequent orders) even if the total limit has been exceeded.
Since pricing returns a status message that the limit has been exceeded, you
must decide what further action should be taken: increase the limit, end
date or inactivate the modifier, add qualifiers, or cancel the order.

Modifiers 3-117

For example, if a customer close to their promotional limit places a new
order that exceeds their limit amount, under a soft limit the customer gets
the full promotion benefit applied to the order. A status message is sent to
the calling application (such as Order Management) that the limit has been
exceeded.

• Hold?: Select one of the following hold actions:
• Select Hold? to have a status message sent to the calling application when
the limit is exceeded.
If Soft - Full Benefit Amount is selected, then the Hold? check box is selected
automatically and cannot be updated.

• Deselect Hold? so that the pricing engine does not place a promotional
hold.

• Other Attributes: Optionally, click Other Attributes to define additional criteria.
If Balances exist for a limit, the Other Attribute button is grayed out and you
cannot add other attributes.
For example, if you have selected customer and customer name and want the
limit applied to a particular customer, select the customer name from the Value
field.

Important: To qualify for a limit, all the qualifier conditions
must be met. Otherwise, the limit will not be applied.

Related Topics

Viewing Limit Balances and Transaction Details
Oracle Advanced Pricing enables you to view balances including the amounts available
and consumed (used) for a selected limit or across transaction limits. For a selected
balance, you can view the transactions that have consumed the balance. The available
balance is calculated using the following formula:
Available balance = Limit Amount - sum of (Consumed Amounts from saved
Transactions)


Manual versus Automatic Updating of Limit Balances
For most transactions, limit balances are updated automatically when orders are
re-priced or when the limit amount is changed. However, some balances must be
manually updated to reflect the new balances: for example, for returned, cancelled, and
deleted orders or when a manual transaction is added to adjust limit balances. To
update the limit balances manually, you must click Update balances to view the
updated balance.
As transactions are processed, cumulative promotional spending is subtracted from the
available limit balance. The pricing engine updates the available balance for
transactions that complete successfully such as a booked order line or transactions in
progress; for example, a sales order line that is entered but not saved or booked.
However, if a transaction in progress was rolled back or exited abnormally from a
calling application (for example, Order Management), the balance is still updated and
therefore the available limit balance may not reflect the true balance. When this occurs,
you must manually update the balance to reflect the true balance.
Once the order or order line is saved and booked, then the available limit balance is
reduced by the amount of the completed transaction(s).

To view a limit balance:
1. Navigate to the Define Limits window.

Modifiers 3-119


The limits and their balances display in the Balances region. If the limit is arranged
by category such as sales organizations, product attributes, or qualifier attributes,
one limit balance displays for each category.

Note: A limit and sub-limits only appear if transactions have
posted against them.

2. The Available field displays the amount of the limit or sub-limit remaining. If the
limit is set up by category, then the following Organization (Org) fields display:
• Org Context: Displays the sales organization for the sub-limit balance.

• Org Attribute: Displays the product attributes/qualifier attributes for the
sub-limit balance.

• Org Value: Displays the product attributes/qualifier attributes for the sub-limit
balance.

• Org Meaning

To view limit transaction details:


2. In the Balances section, select the balance whose transaction details you want to
view.

3. Click Transactions to view transaction details in the Define Transactions window:
• Date Request: Display the date the transaction occurred.

• Price Req Code: Displays the pricing code automatically for an Automatic
transaction. You can enter a pricing code manually for a Manual transaction.

• Manual: Enabled if a manual transaction has been added. You can update,
delete, or add a manual transaction.

• Amount: Displays the amount of the limit consumed.

• Request Type: Displays the name of the calling application such as Order
Management.

• Reason: Displays a reason (if applicable) for the transaction. You can enter a
manual reason which is used especially in manual adjustments.

• The Define Transactions window displays only if there are
transactions applied against the limit. Transactions display
after you save a sales order.

• In the Define Transactions window, you can choose to
adjust the limit balance by manually adding new
transactions or updating existing manual transactions. A
limit transaction created by the pricing engine cannot be
updated or deleted. Only manual transactions can be
added, update and deleted.

Related Topics

Updating an Existing Limit Balance
Oracle Advanced Pricing provides a running available balance so you know the amount
consumed (used) and available for a selected limit. Balances for limits are updated

Modifiers 3-121

automatically when orders are re-priced or when the limit amount is changed.
In certain cases such as returned, cancelled, and deleted orders, the limit balances are
not updated automatically and the balance must be manually updated using the
Update balances button. If a manual transaction is added to adjust limit balances, you
must click Update balance to view the new available limit balance.

To update an existing limit balance:


2. Verify that the balances match the sum of the transactions. Click Update balance or
run the concurrent process QP: Update Limit Balance.

3. Click Transactions to display the Transactions window. Confirm that the
transactions are correctly applied to the balance.

4. To change the limit balance, enter a transaction in the Transactions window. Enter a
positive quantity in the Amount field to lower the available balance or use a
negative quantity to raise the available balance.

5. Recalculate the balances in the Define Limits window by choosing the Update
balance button or by running the concurrent process QP: Update Limit Balance.


Related Topics

Adjusting the Limit Amount
You can increase or decrease an already existing limit for a promotion, deal, or modifier
and have the adjustment reflected in the available balance. However, you cannot
decrease it lower than the amount by which orders have consumed it. For example, if
two orders, each for $100 have consumed the limit, you cannot lower the limit below
$200.

Note: A limit (header or line level) that has been created by a different
source system code cannot be updated or deleted by a user who has
logged in using a different source system. For example, if a limit was
created for a modifier by a Trade Management user, the same limit can
only get updated or deleted by a Trade Management user. A user logged
in Advance Pricing can view limits for the modifier but cannot edit the
existing limits.

If the promotion, deal, or modifier is inactive because the limit was previously
exceeded, the promotion, deal, or modifier will be re-activated once the limit is
increased.

To adjust the limit amount:

Modifiers 3-123


2. Enter the new Amount for the limit. If decreasing the limit, you cannot decrease it
lower than the amount by which orders have consumed it.

Related Topics


4
Formulas

• Overview of Formulas
• Creating a Pricing Formula
• Finding Formula Factor Lines
• Updating Formula Prices

Overview of Formulas
Formulas consist of mathematical expressions that the pricing engine evaluates to
calculate the list prices of items and discounts applied to them. Formulas can be linked
to a price list line or modifier line. You can use formulas to:
• Create a price from a computation as an alternative to entering prices in a price list.

• Calculate a price adjustment. For example, you can instruct the pricing engine to
calculate a discount by attaching a formula to a discount line.

• Set up and maintain formulas based on component types.

When you attach a formula to a price list line, you typically do not enter a price for that
line because the pricing engine uses the formula to calculate the final list price of the
product or service. One exception is a formula that has a list price as Formula Type--for
this type, you must enter the list price (base price) for the formula to use in its
calculations.

Note: You can attach a formula that has a List Price component to price
list lines and to modifier lines. For more information, see Oracle
Advanced Pricing User's Guide, Price Lists and Modifiers chapters.

You can choose one of following methods to determine how a formula calculates the list
price:

Formulas 4-1

• Dynamic calculation: The list price resulting from the formula calculation is not
calculated or stored anywhere until the sales order is entered with that price list line
item. When the sales order is entered, the pricing engine evaluates the formula and
displays the final list price on the order.

• Static calculation: If the formula is attached to a price list line for static calculation of
the final list price, you can run a concurrent program at any time to calculate the
final list price using the formula up front (not wait until order entry time) and also
store it in the price list.

Seeded Formulas
Oracle Advanced Pricing provides seeded formulas that you can use when setting up
freight charges. For more information, see the Oracle Advanced Pricing Implementation
Guide.

Creating a Pricing Formula
You can set up and update formulas and formula lines in the Advanced Pricing -
Pricing Formulas window. A formula is a valid mathematical expression that you can
use to determine the list prices of items and the discounts applied to those items. The
formula lines provide details about each part of the formula.

Note: The concurrent program Build Formula Package should be run if
you create or change a formula expression.

A formula can contain any of the following:
• Parentheses: for example, (and)

• Mathematical operators: for example, +, -, /, and *

• Built-in functions: for example, NVL, SQRT, and MOD

• Operands: Operands are step numbers about which you provide more detail. You
can use as many step numbers as you need, up to the limit of the field. You can
repeat a step number in a formula, for example, 1+2*2.

Note: An operand is not a numeric constant. If you want to use a
numeric constant in a formula, you must create a step number in
the formula expression and then assign the numeric constant to the
step number in a formula line

For example, the valid formula (1+2*SQRT(3)) / 4 contains:


• Operands: 1, 2, 3, and 4

• Mathematical operators: +, *, and /

• Built-in function: SQRT

• Parentheses: to group the operands and operators

For each preceding step number, you need to create four formula lines since the
formula has four step numbers.
Oracle Advanced Pricing uses the formula line and evaluates it to obtain the value of
the operand and calculates a formula. It does not use the face value of the step number.
You assign one of the following types to each formula line:
• Function: The function GET_CUSTOM_PRICE retrieves a price from an external
system and uses it in the formula calculation. You create the program logic to map
to the external data source by developing PL/SQL program packages. The function
GET_CUSTOM_PRICE returns a numeric value. For detailed information on setting
up GET_CUSTOM_PRICE, see the Oracle Advanced Pricing Implementation Guide.

Note: Advanced Pricing formulas supports all the functions
supported by PL/SQL. For more information on PL/SQL functions,
see the Oracle SQL reference guide.

• List Price: The price of the item in a specific price list to which you have attached a
formula.

• Factor List: Enables you to define pricing conditions that you can link to multiple
pricing attributes or a range of these attributes. The pricing engine evaluates the
formula, and then chooses one of these factors, depending into which range the
actual pricing attribute of the item falls.
For example, a step in the formula may have different factors defined for different
ranges of glass thickness: a glass with thickness between 0.1 and 0.3 mm has a factor
of 3, and a glass with thickness between 0.4 and 0.8 mm has a factor of 5. The
pricing engine determines which factor qualifies when it evaluates an order and
applies this factor in the formula calculation.
You can also relate multiple factor conditions. For example, if the base pricing
attribute for glass thickness is between 0.1 and 0.3 mm AND the length of the glass
is between 0.5 and 2 m, apply the factor of 3 OR if the base pricing attribute for
glass thickness is between 0.4 and 0.8 mm AND the length of the glass is between
0.5 and 2 m, apply the factor of 5.

• Modifier Value: Uses the value entered in the Value field of the modifier line or
price break line.

Formulas 4-3

• Numeric Constant: A numeric value.

• Price List Line: The price of the item in a specific line of a specific price list.

• Pricing Attribute: The absolute value of a pricing attribute (such as thickness or
height) of an item.
Pricing attributes are characteristics of products and services that you can specify
when the characteristics help to determine the price of a product or service.
Distance, age of a related product, customer class, product family group, and level
of service are examples of pricing attributes. You can specify one or a combination
of pricing attributes and assign them to a product or service. At order entry time,
the pricing engine evaluates the attributes you have specified during formula setup
to calculate the price.
You can define as many attributes as you need to meet your pricing business needs.
For example, you may use the formula 1*2 to calculate the price of a glass item. Step
1 is a pricing attribute for thickness and step 2 is the list price to calculate the price
of a glass item; if 100 is the base price of the glass item and 0.3 is the value of the
thickness attribute of the glass, then the pricing engine evaluates the formula as
0.3*100, which is 30.

WARNING: Null Values in Formulas
During formula calculation, if a step results in a null value, the formula fails. For
example, consider the formula 1*2, where step 2 is of type Pricing Attribute, pricing
attribute context is Physical Attribute, pricing attribute is Volume, and the user must
supply the volume at order entry time.
Since the user cannot provide a volume, use the NVL expression in the formula to refer
to a step number that evaluates to a non-null value; for example, changing the formula
to 1* NVL(2,3). In the formula line for step number 3, use a non-null value such as the
numeric constant of 8. If the user does not provide a value for volume, the pricing
engine uses 8 in the formula calculation.
If the expression does not use NVL in the expression, and the step number evaluates to
NULL, the entire expression evaluates to NULL, the formula calculation fails, and the
calling application processes the failure.

To create a pricing formula:
1. Navigate to the Advanced Pricing - Pricing Formulas window.


Advanced Pricing - Pricing Formulas window

2. Enter a Name and Description for the formula.

3. Enter the Effective Dates range.

4. Enter a Formula expression. A formula consists of step numbers (such as 1, 2, 3)
used in an arithmetic equation such as 1*2.
A step number such as 1 in the formula expression corresponds to the formula line
with the same step number in the Formula Lines region.
The Seeded box identifies if the selected formula is seeded.

5. Every time a new formula expression is created, the concurrent program Build
Formula Package should be run to generate the formula package.
From the Tools menu, select Build Formula Package to run the program.
Alternately, you can also run the Build Formula Package concurrent program. A
Dialog box displays a message if the formula package generation was successful.

6. Save your work.
In the Formula Lines region, you create formula lines and assign a Step number that
can be used in the Formula expression. Complete the following steps for each
formula line to be created.

7. Select one of the following Formula Types:

Formulas 4-5

• Function: The Component field displays GET_CUSTOM_PRICE. You must
write the function in this PL/SQL package and it must return a number. For
more information, see Oracle Advanced Pricing Implementation Guide.

• List Price: The price of the item in a specific price list to which you have
attached a formula.

• Factor List: Select an existing factor list in Component field. Alternately, to
create a new factor list, type a new name in the Component field, and press the
Enter key. When you complete your entries for the formula line, click Factors to
create the factor criteria in the Factors window.

• Modifier Value: A formula that has a Modifier Value as a component cannot be
attached to a price list line.

• Numeric Constant: Enter the numeric constant in Component.

• Price List Line: A formula that has List Price as a component and is attached to
a price list line gets the list price from the Value entered in a price list line.

• Pricing Attribute: Select the Pricing Attribute Context and Pricing Attribute.

8. Enter the Step number for the formula expression. Step numbers cannot be repeated
in the Formula Lines region even though they can be repeated in the Formula
expression.
The Seeded box is selected for seeded formula lines.
The Reqd Flag check box is currently not used by the pricing engine unless you are
using custom code for tracking formula line information. If you are using custom
code for this purpose, then select the Reqd Flag check box.

9. Save your work.

To define factor list details:
1. If the Formula Type is Factor List, click Factors in the Advanced Pricing - Pricing
Formulas window to display the Factors window.


Factors window

2. In the Base Pricing Attributes region, complete steps 2-9 for each base pricing
attribute factor. For information on searching for formula factor lines, see Finding
Formula Factor Lines, page 4-9.

3. Select a value for Base Pricing Attribute Context.
If you have multiple entries, you must use the same base pricing attribute context in
this region (to create an OR condition); the pricing engine chooses one of the entries.
Use the Associate Pricing Attributes region to associate additional contexts with the
base context (to create an AND condition where both attributes must be present to
qualify).

Note: In the Base Pricing Attribute region, it is possible to enter
duplicate values for any attribute such as entering the same Item
Number of AS54888.
If matching base pricing attributes exist, then their ranking order
determines the adjustment factor selected. For example, if base
pricing attributes PA 1 and PA 2 match, then the pricing engine
selects the PA 1 adjustment factor because it is defined first.

4. Select a value for Base Pricing Attribute.

5. Select a comparison Operator and enter a Value From and a Value To:

Formulas 4-7

• If you select the operator BETWEEN, you must enter a Value From. If you do
not enter a value for Value To, the default is unlimited.

• If you select the operator =, you must enter Value From and you cannot enter
Value To. Enter Value To only when the Operator is BETWEEN.

6. Enter the Adjustment Factor. An adjustment factor enables you to adjust the price
based on the options selected. For example, if you are selling cars, you could use
adjustment factors to adjust the price based on the car options the customer
chooses:
• If the car options are Standard, then the price is multiplied by 1 (factor=1).

• If the car options are Business, then the price is multiplied by 1.5 (factor=1.5).

• If the car options are Deluxe, then the price is multiplied by 2 (factor=2).
If the cars you are selling are second hand, you probably want to adjust the
price further based on the age of the car. For example:

• If the car is between 0.0 and 1.0 years old, the price is multiplied by 1.

• If the car is between 1.1 and 3.0 years old, the price is multiplied by 0.8.

• If the car is older than 3.0 years, the price is multiplied by 0.6.

7. Enter a Start Date and an End Date range for this attribute in this factor list.

Note: The effectivity of this pricing attribute in this factor list also
applies in all other formulas that use this factor list.

8. Complete the following steps for each associated pricing attribute:
1. In the Associate Pricing Attributes region, select an Associated Pricing Attribute
Context and Associated Pricing Attribute to associate with the base pricing
attribute context and base pricing attribute values (to create an AND condition).

2. Select a comparison Operator and enter the Value From and Value To:
• If you select the operator BETWEEN, you must enter a value for Value
From. If you do not enter a value for Value To, the default is unlimited.

• If you select =, you must enter Value From and you cannot enter Value To.

9. Save your work.


Finding Formula Factor Lines
A factor list can consist of hundreds of factor lines and associated base pricing
attributes. If your business requirements require you to change the values of certain
pricing attributes, it is time consuming to scroll through the entire factor list to find a
required record. Instead, use the Find Formula Factor Lines window to selectively
retrieve the records you want.
You can narrow your search by selecting search criteria that defines the factor line you
want to retrieve. You can query by Pricing Context, Pricing Attribute, Query Operator,
and Pricing Attribute Value.
The query returns all those factors in the factor list that have either a base or an
associated pricing attribute that meets the query criteria. The results are sorted by the
Pricing Attribute Value From of the Base Pricing Attribute of the factor lines that are
returned by the query.

To find formula factor lines:
1. Navigate to the Find Formula Factor Lines window.

Find Formula Factor Lines window

2. Enter the Factor Pricing Attribute Context for the query, such as Item.

3. Enter the Factor Pricing Attribute, such as or Item Category or Customer Item.

4. Enter the Query Operator, such as = or Between. The = operator returns an exact
match while the Between operator returns a range of values. If the Pricing Context
on the Query Find window is Item and the Pricing Attribute is either Item Number

Formulas 4-9

or Item Category, then the Query Operator is restricted to the value =.

5. Enter a Pricing Attribute Value From High/Low to define the range of values you
want queried; for example, to restrict a query to a range of item numbers from
23456 to 45674. However, if the = operator is selected, you can only enter a value for
Pricing Attribute Value From Low.

6. Click Find to return the query results.

7. Alternately, to start a new query, click Clear to clear the current query criteria and
enter your query criteria.

8. Click New to create a new Base Pricing Attribute.

Updating Formula Prices
Use this process to use static formulas to set list prices. When you attach a formula to a
price list line, you can select from the following calculation methods:
• Dynamic calculation: When you enter an order, the pricing engine uses the formula
to calculate the list price.

• Static calculation: Before order entry, you run a concurrent process that calculates
the list price.

To update formula prices for static calculation:
1. Navigate to the Update Formula Prices window.


Update Rule Prices window

2. To calculate formula-based prices:
• For price list lines whose formulas have been added or changed from when
they were last updated by this concurrent program, select New and Modified
Lines Only of Price Lists.

• For all price list lines, clear New and Modified Lines Only of Price Lists.

3. To consider price list lines that have:
• Any formula, select Update All Pricing Formulas for Price Lists.

• A certain formula, select Update Individual Pricing Formula for Price Lists, and
select the specific pricing formula.
The process applies this choice after it selects the price list lines according to the
criteria for Step 2.

4. Click Submit to display the Request ID.

Formulas 4-11

5
Qualifiers and Qualifier Groups

• Overview of Qualifiers
• Creating Qualifiers (HTML Interface)
• Updating a Qualifier (HTML Interface)
• Deleting a Qualifier (HTML Interface)
• Appending a Qualifier Group (HTML Interface)
• Creating a Qualifier Group
• Using Qualifier Grouping Numbers
• Using Qualifier Grouping Numbers Across Qualifier Groups
• Finding a Qualifier Group
• Modifying or Deleting Qualifier Groups
• Qualifier Group Effect when Merging Customers in Oracle Receivables

Overview of Qualifiers
Oracle Advanced Pricing lets you define qualifiers to determine eligibility rules
governing who can receive a particular price, discount, promotion, or benefit. Qualifiers
and qualifier groups can then be used with Oracle price lists and modifiers.
You can set up qualifier context and attributes to suit your own business needs to
determine eligibility for benefits or price. Oracle provides predefined (seeded) qualifier
contexts and attributes, and the values for these predefined attributes are sourced from
the Oracle Application database (whenever applicable). The following table displays
several predefined qualifier structures that you can use to determine benefit eligibility.

Qualifiers and Qualifier Groups 5-1

Qualifier Qualifier Attributes
Context

Customer Customer Name, Bill To, Sales Channel

Order Order Type, Shipment Date, Line Type

Terms Payment Term, Freight Terms, Shipping Method

Volume Order Amount, Line Volume

Note: Order Amount as a qualifier refers to the sum of the list prices on all
active order lines. It is not the same as Order Total in Oracle Order
Management, which can include the effect of modifiers. Order amount also
excludes lines for recurring charges. Order lines that have a charge periodicity
associated (such as Monthly, Yearly) are recurring charges.

See the Oracle Advanced Pricing Implementation Guide for more information on seeded
attributes.

Qualifier Terms
Some of the main qualifier terms are described as follows:
• Qualifier Contexts: Qualifier contexts consist of flattened hierarchies where similar
qualifying attributes can be grouped into logical categories.

• Qualifiers: Qualifiers consist of specific attribute conditions that assist the pricing
engine to derive the eligibility for a benefit or price.

• Qualifier Value: A qualifier value is a value you choose to associate with a qualifier
attribute.

• Qualifier Grouping Numbers: A qualifier consists of qualifier lines that define
eligibility for a particular price, discount, promotion, or benefit. Qualifier grouping
numbers are assigned to qualifier lines to create AND and OR conditions that
define how the pricing engine should evaluate the qualifier lines.

Note: In the HTML user interface, Common and Unique qualifiers
are used to create grouping conditions instead of grouping
numbers. For more information, see Creating Qualifiers (HTML


Using Qualifiers
Qualifiers and qualifier groups can be associated with Oracle price lists and modifiers at
the following levels:
• Price list: Price list header.

• Modifier: Modifier list and modifier line.

Various methods can be used to associate qualifiers with price lists or modifiers:
• Create qualifiers, and then attach individual qualifiers within the Price List or
Modifiers window.

• Create qualifier groups using the Qualifier Groups window and then attach the
qualifier group to the price list, modifier list, or modifier list line.

• Combine methods 1 and 2.

Once an entity has qualified for a particular benefit, Oracle Advanced Pricing attributes
can further refine which benefits can be given.
You can create, modify, query, and delete qualifier groups.
You can set up hierarchies using qualifier contexts and attributes. Flattened format is
required as qualifiers do not store any relationships among the hierarchies. The
following table illustrates a hierarchy with three different levels of qualifier attributes.
This hierarchy can be stored by creating a context such as Geography. Under this context,
you would define three attributes, such as State, Territory, and Customers.

Qualifier Attribute Qualifier Attribute Value

State CA, MN,WA,NY,FL

Territory East, West, South, North

Customers All customers, subset of customers by
purchase volume

To enable the user to select and enter correct values for the three attributes, you would
have to define specific validation sets for each attribute, using value set definitions to
provide the correct source. Since hierarchical relationships are not stored, you need to
define the sourcing information. This is required because when the pricing engine must
determine if a customer can receive a particular benefit, the engine needs to know the
information at all the levels of hierarchy.
In this hierarchy, if the qualifying conditions established were that Territory must be


West and State must be California, then the pricing engine would need to know both
the Territory and the State of the customer in order to determine eligibility. If the
qualifying conditions established were that Territory must be West or State must be
California, then the pricing engine would need to know only the Territory or the State
of the customer in order to determine eligibility.
Duplicate Qualifiers
You cannot create duplicate qualifiers at the same level (either header or line level) with
the same qualifier grouping number, context, attribute, comparison operator, and
values. An error message appears if you try to enter duplicate qualifiers in the modifier,
price list, or qualifier setup windows.

Related Topics
For more information on creating qualifiers or attaching a qualifier group to price lists
(for Forms-based UI), see Oracle Advanced Pricing User's Guide, Price Lists, page 2-2.
For more information on creating qualifiers or attaching a qualifier group to modifiers
and modifier lines (for Forms-based UI), see Oracle Advanced Pricing User's Guide,
Modifiers, page 3-18.
For more information on Value Sets, see Oracle Applications Flexfields User's Guide,
Planning and Defining Values and Value Sets.

Creating Qualifiers (HTML Interface)
A qualifier consists of one or more conditions that define eligibility for a particular
price, discount, promotion, or benefit. You can create qualifiers and assign qualifier
groups to modifiers lists, modifier lines, and price lists. You can create different
qualifying conditions depending on how you set up your qualifiers. The different
qualifying rules are outlined as follows:
Qualifier Conditions
A qualifier condition defines an eligibility rule, for example, the customer name must be
Vision Operations. You can set up one or more conditions for a single qualifier.
Multiple conditions within the same qualifier are joined to each other by AND:
• Condition 1: Customer Name must be Vision CorporationAND

• Condition 2: Order Type must be StandardAND

• Condition 3: Credit Type must be Good

If ALL the qualifier conditions are met, then the qualifier evaluates as true, and the
modifier or price list can be applied.
Unique Qualifiers
Each separate qualifier created for a modifier or price list is called a unique qualifier.
Unique qualifiers are evaluated by an OR condition; for example, either Qualifier 1 OR
Qualifier 2 can qualify before the price list or modifier is applied.


Each unique qualifier may consist of one or more conditions. The conditions for each
unique qualifier are still joined by AND and must evaluate as true before the modifier
or price list is applied:
• Qualifier 1
• Customer = Vision Operations
AND (Within Qualifier 1, these conditions are ANDed together.)

• Customer Class = Gold Standard

OR

• Qualifier 2 : Customer Region = Western

Common Qualifier
A Common Qualifier is used to create a mandatory condition across all qualifiers. A
common qualifier consists of conditions that are joined by AND to all qualifiers in a
table. When created, it displays on the qualifier table as a Common Qualifier.

Note: In the Forms-based interface, Grouping Numbers are used to
create AND/OR conditions. A grouping number of -1 is used to create
the Common qualifier conditions. For more information on
Forms-based qualifier grouping numbers, see Using Qualifiers, page 5-
12.

Select the Common Qualifier box to make the qualifier a common qualifier. The search
engine processes the common qualifier conditions first, and only processes other unique
qualifiers if the pricing request qualifies for the common qualifier conditions.
For example, suppose you wanted to give a 10 percent discount with the following
qualifying conditions.
• Qualifier 1: Customer is Preferred status.

• Qualifier 2: Customers must order more than $150 from your web site.

So far, the customer can receive the discount if their status is Preferred OR if they order
more than $150 from your web site. However, suppose you wanted to make a
mandatory condition that the customer must pay by Credit Card.
To do this, you must set up a Common Qualifier where the payment method = Credit
Card to make it a mandatory condition across all qualifiers. This means that either
Qualifier 1 OR Qualifier 2 could qualify but regardless, the payment method must be
Credit Card.

To create a qualifier:
1. Click Create Qualifier to display the Qualifiers: Create Qualifier page. In the Create


Qualifiers page, you can create a qualifier and append an existing qualifier group.

Note: The page name may vary depending on the modifier type or
price list associated with the qualifier.

Qualifiers: Create Qualifier page

2. Complete your entries:
• This is a common qualifier: Optionally, select this check box to define the
qualifier as a common qualifier. The conditions defined for a common qualifier
will apply in addition to all unique qualifiers.

Note: When creating a new qualifier, if a common qualifier has
been created, the conditions of the common qualifier are
displayed as read only.

• Attribute: Defines a qualifying condition such as the Customer Class (attribute)
must be Platinum. You can create one or more conditions for each qualifier.
Each condition within a qualifier are linked by AND conditions which means
that each condition must be met before the qualifying conditions are satisfied.

• If the qualifier attribute is invalid, then the pricing engine
will not apply the price list or modifier.

• Do not select the seeded attribute for List Line @ Number
(MODLIST/QUALIFIER_ATTRIBUTE2) internally for this


purpose; users @ .

• Value From/Value To: If you define a Value From/To range using negative
numbers, enter the range from lowest to highest value. For example, to define a
Volume Order Amount between -99999 to -1, enter the Value From = -99999 and
the Value To = -1.

• Applies To Party Hierarchy: This check box is enabled only for attributes that
are based on Oracle TCA (Trading Community Architecture) Parties and Party
Hierarchy Enabled flag has been selected for this attribute on attribute
management setups. See the Oracle Advanced Pricing Implementation Guide for
more details.
Hierarchies consist of tiered relationships where one party is ranked above
another; for example, a corporate hierarchy where different companies are
related as parent, subsidiary, headquarters, division and so on. If Applies To
Party is selected, then the modifier adjustment or price list (depending on what
the qualifier is set up for) would be available to the parent party specified in the
Attribute Value field and its subsidiaries. This saves you time from creating
multiple qualifiers, one for each subsidiary or division.

• Start/End Dates: If a qualifier has effective dates, then the pricing entity (such as
a modifier) will be applied if the conditions of the qualifier are met within the
specified dates. Once the qualifier expires, the pricing engine will not evaluate
that price list or modifier list. The alternative is to delete the qualifier from the
list.

header, the effective dates of the qualifier determine the
effective dates for the price list or modifier list not the effective
dates defined in the price list or modifier list window. For
example, suppose you create a price list with an effective start
date of 23-NOV-2005 and no end date. Then you create a
qualifier at the header level with effective dates of
10-NOV-2005 and 12-NOV-2005 for customer Computer
Service and Rentals. However, after 12-NOV-2005, the price list
will not be valid for Computer Service and Rentals or any other
customer and the price list expires.

Optionally, click Add Another Row to add another qualifier condition, or Create
Qualifier to add a Unique Qualifier.


Related Topics
Appending a Qualifier Group (HTML Interface), page 5-8
Deleting a Qualifier (HTML Interface), page 5-8

Updating a Qualifier (HTML Interface)
You can update a unique qualifier or common qualifier by adding, updating or deleting
qualifier conditions. You can update the qualifier from the Create page or the Update
mode of the modifiers or price lists.

Note: If you delete a qualifier during an update flow (for example
when updating a modifier), you need to click Apply to save the
changes.

Related Topics

Deleting a Qualifier (HTML Interface)
You can delete unique or common qualifier conditions from the qualifiers table by
clicking Delete at the qualifier condition level. Alternately, you can delete all the
conditions of a qualifier by clicking Delete at the qualifier level.

Related Topics

Appending a Qualifier Group (HTML Interface)
Qualifier groups consist of multiple qualifiers that can be associated with either price
lists or modifiers. Qualifier groups can be appended to one or more price lists and
modifiers. You can search by Group Name to find an existing Qualifier Group and
append it to an existing qualifier.

Note: You can append but not create qualifier groups using the HTML
interface. For information about creating qualifier groups, see Creating
a Qualifier Group, page 5-9 .


To append a qualifier group:
1. Navigate to the Qualifiers: Append Group page. In this page, you can attach
existing Qualifier Group(s).

Qualifiers: Append Group page

2. Select the Group Name(s) to be added, then click Apply to append the qualifier
group to the modifier or price list.

Related Topics
Creating a Qualifier Group, page 5-9

Creating a Qualifier Group
In the Qualifier Group window, you can create a new qualifier group consisting of
associated qualifiers. An example of a qualifier group could be:
• Customer must be in territory WEST

• Order Amount is between $2,000 and $5,000

• Order Quantity must be greater than 10,000

The Qualifier Group can use seeded qualifiers (source attributes) such as Customer
Name and Order Amount or your own qualifier attributes. These qualifiers could come


from one or more qualifier contexts.

Note: You can create qualifier groups in the Forms-based user interface
only.

Example of Qualifier Group
Customer must be in territory WEST and Order Amount must be between $2,000 and
$5,000 or Order Type must be Standard.
Create a qualifier group, for example, West1. The following table demonstrates field
values to define the qualifier group West1.

Grouping Context Attribute Operator Value From Value To
Number

1 Geography Territory = West Null

1 Volume Order Between 2,000 5,000
Amount

2 Order Order Type = Standard Null

To create a qualifier group:
1. Navigate to the Qualifier Group window.


Qualifier Group window

2. Enter the qualifier group Name and a Description.

3. In the Qualifiers tab, enter a Grouping Number:
• Enter the same number value, such as 1, for more than one qualifier within a
group to create an AND condition between qualifiers.

• Enter a different numeric values for qualifiers in the Grouping No. field to
create an OR condition between qualifiers.

You must enter the exact values for Start Date and End date for each qualifier with a
qualifier group when simulating an AND condition. If different dates are entered in
either field, then the pricing engine will ignore the entire qualifier grouping. For
more information on conditions set up with grouping numbers, see Using Qualifier
Grouping Numbers, page 5-12 .

4. Select a qualifier Context.

5. Select a qualifying Attribute for the selected context.

6. In the Operator field select a value (=, BETWEEN, NOT =)

7. Enter values in the Value From and Value To fields. You can select values based on
the value set definition of the qualifier attribute chosen.
Some qualifiers use large value sets, for example, those based on all customers. To


reduce the number of items that appear in the Value From and Value To fields, you
can enter search criteria in the field, and click the list of values indicator.

Note: If you do not enter search criteria and click the list of values
indicator, a warning advises you that you have not entered search
criteria and that the search may take a long time. To view a reduced
list of values, click No, enter search criteria, and click the list of
values indicator. To view the entire list of values display, click Yes.
If you do not want to see the list of values, click Cancel. Set the
profile option QP: Valueset Lookup Filter to avoid this message.

8. The Value From Meaning field displays additional details about the qualifier when
you query a qualifier after saving it. For example, if the context is CUSTOMER and
the attribute is Ship To, Value From displays the customer name and Value From
Meaning displays the site use location for the customer. If the context/attribute
combination has no additional details, Value From and Value From Meaning are
identical.

9. In the Start Date field, enter an optional date that the qualifier becomes active.

10. In the End Date field, enter an optional date that the qualifier becomes inactive.

header, the effective dates of the qualifier determine the effective
dates for the price list or modifier list not the effective dates defined
in the price list or modifier list window. For example, suppose you
create a price list with an effective start date of 23-NOV-2005 and
no end date. Then you create a qualifier at the header level with
effective dates of 10-NOV-2005 and 12-NOV-2005 for customer
Computer Service and Rentals. However, after 12-NOV-2005, the
price list will not be valid for Computer Service and Rentals or any
other customer.

11. Save your work.

Using Qualifier Grouping Numbers
A qualifier consists of qualifier lines that define eligibility for a particular price,
discount, promotion, or benefit. You can assign qualifier grouping numbers to qualifier
lines to create AND and OR conditions that define how the pricing engine should
evaluate the qualifier lines. For example, if the customer is Vision Corporation AND
they pay by credit card and then apply the 10 percent Discount modifier.
You must use qualifier grouping numbers correctly because they indicate to the pricing


engine how to evaluate the qualifiers:
• Qualifiers with the same grouping number are evaluated as a Boolean AND
condition (an entity must meet all of the conditions to qualify).

• Qualifiers with different grouping numbers are evaluated as a Boolean OR
condition (an entity must meet one of the conditions to qualify).

• If - 1 is used as a qualifier grouping number, the qualifier is ANDED to each
qualifier group so that you do not have to manually add it to each qualifier group.

Note: Qualifier grouping numbers are not used in the HTML user
interface (UI). Instead, you use common or unique qualifiers to create
grouping conditions.

AND Conditions
An AND condition means that all qualifier lines with the same Qualifier Grouping
Number must evaluate as true before the pricing engine can select the associated
modifier.
In the following example, both Line A and Line B, which have the same Qualifier
Grouping Number, must be true to satisfy the AND condition. So, for example, if the
customer is not Vision Operations but the credit rating is Excellent, then the modifier
cannot be selected (assuming these are the only qualifiers for the modifier). The
modifier will only be selected if the customer is Vision Operations (qualifier line A)
AND the credit rating is Excellent (qualifier line B).

Qualifier Grouping Qualifier Line Qualifier Context Condition Created
Number and Attribute Values

1 Line A Customer: Vision AND
Operations

1 Line B Credit Rating: AND
Excellent

The next table shows a setup where a 10 percent discount on each order is offered only
if a Preferred customer spends more than $150:


Qualifier Group Qualifier Operator Value From Value To
Attribute

1 Customer Class = Preferred Null

1 Order Amount Between 150 99999999

OR Conditions
An OR condition is created by assigning a different qualifier grouping number (such as
1 and 2) to successive qualifier lines. The OR condition provides more flexibility
because only one of the qualifier groups needs to be eligible to be selected. In the
following example, if either the customer is Vision Operations (qualifier line A) OR if
the credit rating is Excellent (qualifier line B), then the modifier is eligible for selection.
If both are true, then the modifier is also selected:

Qualifier Grouping Qualifier Line Qualifier Context Condition Created
Number and Attribute Values

1 Line A Customer: Vision OR
Operations

2 Line B Credit Rating: OR
Excellent

In the following example, a 10 percent discount is given on each order placed by a
preferred customer OR each order in which a customer spends more than $150:

Qualifier Group Qualifier Operator Value From Value To
Attribute

1 Customer Class = Preferred Null

2 Order Amount Between 150 Null

Using Combined AND/OR Conditions
The following table displays a grouping number setup using a combination of AND
and OR conditions:


Qualifier Grouping Number Qualifier Line Condition Created

1 Line A AND

1 Line B AND

2 Line C OR

3 Line D OR

An AND condition is created for Lines A and B because they are both assigned the same
qualifier grouping number (1). Qualifier lines assigned the same grouping number must
both be evaluated as true statements before they can be selected.
An OR condition is created between qualifier lines with different grouping numbers. If
either Line A/B (both must be evaluated together) OR Line C OR Line D evaluate as
true, then the pricing engine can select the modifier.

Using - 1 as a Qualifier Grouping Number
Typically, positive integers are used for qualifier grouping numbers such as 1, 2, or 3.
However, if - 1 is used as a qualifier grouping number, the qualifier is ANDED to each
qualifier group saving you time from manually adding the AND qualifier.

Note: In the HTML UI, the Common qualifier is used to create a
common qualifier condition instead of the - 1 grouping number.

For example, to offer a discount in which a qualifier is mandatory for all qualifying
conditions, the mandatory qualifier would be assigned the - 1 qualifier group. The
search engine processes - 1 qualifying conditions first and only processes other qualifier
groups if the pricing request qualifies for the - 1 qualifier grouping number conditions.
For example, suppose you wanted to give a 10 percent discount on an order provided
the:
• Customer is a Preferred customer.

• Customer (any customer) orders from a US web site and spends more than $150.

However, to be eligible for the discount the customer must use a Visa credit card to pay.
In the following example, the credit card type of Visa is assigned the - 1 Qualifier
Grouping Number to make it a mandatory qualifier before the modifier can be selected.

Related Topics


Using Qualifier Grouping Numbers Across Qualifier Groups
When qualifiers are assigned to a qualifier group, all the qualifiers in the qualifier group
are attached to the modifier or price list. Before you attach multiple qualifier groups,
you must indicate how the process should coordinate the grouping numbers. You select
one of the following grouping number options:
• Retain Grouping Numbers Across Qualifier Groups: The grouping numbers of each
attached qualifier remain as they appear in the qualifier group. In this case, the
collection of attached qualifiers does not mirror the AND and OR combinations
within each of the original qualifier groups.

• Generate Unique Grouping Numbers Across Qualifier Groups: The process
maintains the AND and OR combinations within each of the original qualifier
groups and then creates OR conditions between the groups. The process attaches
the first qualifier group with grouping numbers as is, then finds the highest
grouping number used, increases it by one, and increases all of the grouping
numbers of the second group by this number. The process attaches subsequent
groups in the same manner, using the highest grouping number used by the
previously attached group.

• Both: If you attach qualifiers using one option and then re-access the window and
attach additional qualifiers using the other option, the second round qualifiers
attach differently depending on the option. If the second round option is Retain
Grouping Numbers Across Qualifier Groups, the process attaches those qualifiers
among the already existing qualifiers. If the second round option is Generate
Unique Grouping Numbers Across Qualifier Groups, the process begins attaching
groups using grouping numbers incremented from the highest existing grouping
number.

The following tables show examples of how the process sets the grouping numbers
when you use each option. These tables present the qualifiers grouped by each qualifier
group:

Qualifier Qualifier Group Qualifier Grouping Number

Q1 G1 1

Q2 G1 2

Q3 G1 2

Q4 G1 3



Q5 G2 1

Q6 G2 1

Q7 G2 1

Q8 G3 1

Q9 G3 2

Q10 G3 3

The grouping numbers within group G1, for example, create the qualification that the
entity qualifies if it meets condition Q1 OR (condition Q2 AND condition Q3) OR
condition Q4.
The following table shows the attached qualifiers when you select the Retain Grouping
Numbers Across Qualifier Groups option. This table presents the qualifiers grouped by
each qualifier grouping number to highlight that the option does not retain the original
qualifier group relationships:

Qualifier Group Qualifier Qualifier Grouping Number

G1 Q1 1

G2 Q5 1

G2 Q6 1

G2 Q7 1

G3 Q8 1

Null Null Null

G1 Q2 2

G1 Q3 2

G3 Q9 2


Qualifier Group Qualifier Qualifier Grouping Number

Null Null Null

G1 Q4 3

G3 Q10 3

The following table shows the attached qualifiers when you select the Retain Grouping
Numbers Across Qualifier Groups option. This table presents the qualifiers grouped by
each qualifier group to highlight that this option does retain the original qualifier group
relationships:


Q1 G1 1

Q2 G1 2

Q3 G1 2

Q4 G1 3

Related Topics
Cross Order Volume Load, page 11-6
Cross Order Volume Report, page 11-7

Finding a Qualifier Group
The Find Qualifiers window lets you find a specific qualifier group or define new
qualifier groups.

To query for a qualifier group:
1. Navigate to the Find Qualifiers window.


Find Qualifiers window

2. Select the name of the qualifier group that you want to find.

3. Click Find to display the search results in the Qualifier Group window.

Modifying or Deleting Qualifier Groups
In the Qualifier window, you can update or delete a qualifier group or an associated
qualifier.
1. Navigate to the Qualifiers window.

2. Locate the Qualifier Group to modify or delete.

3. Modify or delete the record.

Note: You must first delete all associated qualifiers within a group
before you can delete the qualifier group.

4. Click Save.

Qualifier Group Effect when Merging Customers in Oracle Receivables
When you merge customers in Oracle Receivables, you can merge:
• The information from one customer (the From customer) with the information from


another customer (the To customer).

• The information from one or more customer sites of that customer (the From sites)
with the site information from the other customer (the To sites).

If the From customer is referenced in any qualifiers (the qualifier context is Customer),
the Oracle Receivables merge process executes an Oracle Advanced Pricing process to
update the following qualifier information:
• If you merge customer: The process changes the customer name on the qualifier
from the From customer to the To customer.

• If you merge sites: The process changes the site from the From customer to the To
customer for qualifiers with the following attributes:
• Bill To

• Site Use

• Ship To

Verify these changes in the Value From and Value To fields of the following windows:
• Qualifier Group form, Qualifiers tab

• Advanced Pricing - Price Lists window, Qualifiers tab

• Qualifiers - Header Level Qualifiers window (from Advanced Pricing - Define
Modifier window), Qualifiers tab

• Qualifiers - Line Level Qualifiers form (from Advanced Pricing - Define Modifier
window), Qualifiers region


6
Multicurrency Conversion Lists

• Overview of Multicurrency Conversion Lists
• Creating a Multicurrency Conversion List
• Example of Multicurrency Price List Usage
• Updating the Multicurrency Conversion List

Overview of Multicurrency Conversion Lists
If you have global customers or do pricing in different currencies, the multicurrency
feature enables you to maintain a single price list for multiple currencies.
You can set up and maintain multiple currency conversion rates for a base currency by
creating a single multicurrency list. You can then attach the multicurrency list to
multiple price lists or agreements. Price list maintenance is reduced because only one
currency conversion definition can be attached to multiple base currency price lists, and
when base prices change, you need to update only the prices on the base price list.
You can also specify currency-specific markup/markdown equations that are applied as
a formula, percent, or fixed amount to mark up the currencies.
When a pricing request is made, the pricing engine converts the price on the base price
list to the ordering currency and returns the new price in the ordering currency
(including any markup values).

Note: To set up the multicurrency feature, your System Administrator
or designate must complete the following steps:
• Set the QP: Multi-Currency Installed profile option to Yes, and run
theUpdate Price Lists with Multi-Currency Conversion Criteria
concurrent program. Run the concurrent program only once. For
more information, see Update Price Lists with Multicurrency

Multicurrency Conversion Lists 6-1

Conversion Criteria, page 11-19.

• Install and license Advanced Pricing.

• Ensure that you have Maintain privileges so that you can make any
necessary updates. If you cannot access or update the
multicurrency or related windows, you may not have the
appropriate access privileges. Consult your Pricing Administrator.

Summary of Multicurrency Changes to Price Lists and Agreements
When the price lists and agreements are converted to multicurrency usage, windows
and fields are updated with new multicurrency fields and some existing procedures
may change.
The following section summarizes the changes that occur when the multicurrency
feature is implemented:
Pricing Engine Changes
The pricing engine matches the order currency to the currencies attached to the price
list at the time of selection. The engine then applies the conversion type, markup, and
rounding to the price.
Changes to Price Lists Window
• New Multi-Currency Conversion field: A new field called Multi-Currency
Conversion is added to the Advanced Pricing - Price Lists window where you can
select a multicurrency list that has the same base currency as the selected price list.

• Round To procedure: The Round To field in the price list header is grayed out and
can no longer be changed directly in the Advanced Pricing - Price Lists window.
Instead, you must change the Round To value in the Multi-Currency Conversion
window and update the Round To in the price list header.

Agreements
• New Multi-Currency Conversion field: A new field called Multi-Currency
Conversion is added to the Pricing tab in the Agreements window where you can
select a multicurrency list that has the same base currency as the selected price list.

• Round To procedure changed: The Round To field in the Pricing Tab is grayed out
and can no longer be changed directly. Instead, you must change the Round To
value in the Multi-Currency Conversion window and update the Round To in the
Pricing tab. You can update the multicurrency list only for Agreement Price Lists,
not for Standard Price Lists.


• Once you have successfully run the concurrent program, all
existing price list and agreement windows are converted to
multicurrency price lists. Users should not return to
non-multicurrency price lists. Changing the profile back to No
may cause undesired results if conversion criteria have been
used. Oracle does not support changing the setting back to No.

• You cannot use the general ledger types as a conversion type if
multicurrency is installed or if Oracle General Ledger is not
installed.

Rounding and Markup Factors
You can define markup criteria for each currency definition by specifying either a fixed
value or one derived from a formula. Specific currency rounding can also be defined for
the converted selling price.
You must make any changes to the base currency in the Multi-Currency Conversion
window and not in the price list window.
You cannot update the Base Round To value if the QP: Price Rounding profile option is
set to Enforce Currency Precision.

Rounding Behavior During Currency Conversion Calculation
The following examples show you how rounding is calculated during currency
conversion calculations.
If the Conversion Rounding Factor and the Round To values in the Multi-Currency
Lists window are entered for a currency conversion, the conversion rounding factor is
applied first, followed by the Round To factor.
This is applicable for every item (except for the service item) in every pricing event.
Example 1
Price List Setup
• List Price for Item A = 60.12345

• Base Currency Code = USD

Multicurrency Conversion List Attached to the Price List
• To Currency Code = CAD

• Conversion Type = FIXED

• Conversion Rate = 2.0


• Conversion Rounding Factor = -2

• Round To = -3

Example 2
In Service Pricing, the service item is rounded using the Round To, not the conversion
rounding factor.
Price List Setup
• Base Currency = USD

• List Price for Item B = 60.12345





• Round To = -3

Sales Order Setup for a Service Item B
• Order Currency = CAD

• Converted Price before rounding = 60.12345*2 = 120.24690

• Price after applying the Round To (final rounded price) = 120.247

• Price that appears on the Sales Order = 120.2470 (after applying -4 currency
precision for CAD)

Example 3
QP: Selling Price Rounding Options = Individual
The QP: Selling Price Rounding Options profile option affects only the rounding factor.
If the profile is set to Individual, then the rounding factor is applied. If it is set to No, the
rounding factor is not applied. The QP: Round Unit Selling Price profile option does not
affect the Conversion Rounding Factor. The Conversion Rounding Factor is always
applied to the list price.
Price List Setup







• Round To = -2

Sales Order Setup for a Non-Service Item A


• Price after applying conversion rounding = 120.247

• Price after applying the Round To (final rounded price) = 120.25

• Price that appears on the Sales Order = 120.2500(after applying -4 currency
precision for CAD)



Example 4
QP: Selling Price Rounding Options = N (No)
Price List Setup






• Round To = -2




• Price after applying the Conversion Rounding Factor = 120.247

• Price appears on the Sales Order = 120.2470 (after applying -4 currency precision for
CAD)

Using a Formula with Component Type as Price List Lines

2. Query or create desired modifier for a discount.

3. Select a Formula. If selecting a formula with a component type as Price List Line,
the base currency of the price list must be the same as the modifier currency.

4. Save the modifier record.

Creating a Multicurrency Conversion List
A multicurrency conversion list stores a list of currencies and conversion criteria that
enables transactions to be converted from a base currency to other currencies. The
conversion list is attached to a price list or agreement that uses the conversion criteria to
convert the base list prices to the foreign currency amount. Multiple conversion
methods can be in effect at a time for a currency. For example, if converting USD (US
dollars) to FRF (French francs), you could have a fixed conversion type for March and a
formula conversion type for April. If more than one multicurrency conversion list is set
up for the same base currency, then you must assign each conversion list a unique
name.
Using Conversion Types
Conversion types determine how the conversion rate is calculated. Some of these
seeded conversion types are available only if Oracle General Ledger is installed;
however, you can still link to other non-Oracle stored conversion rate information by
using the formula functionality. The following seeded conversion types are available:
• Fixed: Enter a fixed value that is used as the conversion rate. For example, if you
enter a value of 1.5, the list price from the base price list is multiplied by 1.5 to get
the converted amount.

• Formula: Attach a pricing formula, and the value returned from the formula is the
conversion rate. You cannot use as a conversion formula with a component type of
PLL (Price List Line) because the line may have a different base currency than the
price list to which this currency conversion criteria is attached.

• Transaction: Users of the calling applications (such as Oracle Order Management)
enter the conversion rate. In these cases, the rate entered is converted from
transaction currency (for example, from the price list currency) to functional


currency (such as the sales order). For other conversion types, such as Fixed, the
rates entered in the multicurrency window is from base currency to transaction
currency.
The following conversion types are available only if Oracle Financials (General
Ledger) is installed:

• General Ledger sourced (Corporate, Spot, EMU Fixed, User Defined): Gets the
conversion rate between the base currency and currency to from Oracle General
Ledger. These conversion types are available only if Oracle Financials (General
Ledger) is installed.

To create a multicurrency list:
1. Navigate to the Multi-Currency Conversion List window.

Multi-Currency Conversion window

2. Complete your entries in the Multi-Currency Conversion window. All the fields in
the Multi-Currency Conversion List are applicable to the base currency:
• Base Currency Code: Enter the base currency code for the currency that the
price list is set up in. For example, if the price list has a base currency of US
dollars, enter the code for US dollars such as USD.

• Name/Description: Enter a name to identify the multicurrency list and a
description.


• Base Round To: Enter a value that rounds the selling prices to the decimal place
that is entered. For example, if you entered a Base Round To value of -2, a price
calculated as $9874.343 is rounded to $9874.34.

Note: If the QP: Price Rounding profile option is set to enforce
currency precision, then you cannot update the Base Round To
value in the Multi-Currency Conversion List. To make a
change, you must first change the profile setting to Enforce
Rounding Factor or NULL. Then change the Base Round To
value. Finally, you can change the profile setting back if
desired.

• Base Markup Operator: Optionally, select Percent (%) or Amount as the Base
Markup Operator that can be applied against the base currency. This Operator
determines how the system applies the Base Markup Value.

• Base Markup Value: Enter a numeric value. This value is applied as either a
percent or amount, depending on the value defined in the Base Markup
Operator field.

• Base Markup Formula: Enter a formula. The value returned by this formula is
applied as a markup to the base currency. When entered, the Base Markup
Value can be used within the Base Markup Formula [component type as
modifier value (MV)].

3. In the Conversion Criteria Detail region, specify the criteria in the following fields
to convert the base currency to the currency selected in the Currency To field:

Field Meaning

To Currency Code Enter the currency code for a currency that a price list can be
converted to using the conversion criteria setup. For example, to
convert a base currency in US dollars to Canadian currency (CAD),
you enter CAD as the Currency To.

Start Date Start of the currency conversion.

End Date End date of the currency conversion.


Field Meaning

Conversion Type Select one of the following conversion types:

• Fixed: Enter a fixed number that is used as a fixed conversion
rate.

• Formula: For this type, the value returned by the formula
becomes the conversion rate.

• Transaction: Uses the conversion rate or conversion type from
the Order Management Sales Order. The following conversion
types are available only if Oracle Ledger is installed: Corporate,
Spot, EMU Fixed, and User Defined.

Fixed Value Enter a numeric conversion value if Fixed was selected in the
Conversion Type field.

Formula Select a pricing formula name if you selected Formula in the
Conversion Type field. The value returned by the formula is the
conversion rate. A formula with a component type as PLL (price list
line) is not allowed in a conversion formula because the PLL line may
have a different base currency than the price list to which this
currency conversion criteria is attached. A formula with a component
type as MV (modifier value) is also not allowed.

Conversion Date Select a conversion date type if the value in the Conversion Type field
Type is not Fixed, Formula, or Transaction. There are two conversion date
types:

• Pricing Effectivity Date: Uses pricing effectivity date passed by
the sales order

• Fixed: Uses Conversion Date setup for this currency.

Conversion Date Enter a date if the Conversion Date type is Fixed. This date is used to
retrieve the daily conversion rate from GL (Oracle General Ledger).

Attribute Type Product Attributes, Pricing Attributes, and Qualifier Attributes are
valid values for this field. This specifies the type of attribute to be set
up for a currency conversion. This is an optional field.


Field Meaning

Attribute Context This is a mandatory field if you entered an attribute type. Enter the
Attribute Context for the selected attribute type. For example, if the
Attribute Type value is Product Attribute, then its context can be
ITEM.

Attribute Code This field depends on the value that you entered in the Attribute
Context field. For example, if the Attribute Context field value is
ITEM, the Attribute Code field contains its attributes like Item
Number. This is a mandatory field when the Attribute Context is
entered.

Attribute Value This field gives the values of the attribute code entered. For example,
if the Attribute Code field value is Item Number, the Attribute Value
field displays all the items. This is a mandatory field when you enter
the Attribute Code value.

Attribute Meaning This field displays the description of the Attribute Value field. This is
a display-only field.

Precedence Enter a numeric value if more than one conversion has the same
Currency To, Start Date, and End Date but has different attribute
values. See the Precedence example following the table.

The pricing engine uses the precedence value to determine selection
priority. If more than one of the attributes passed from OM Sales
Order matches with the attribute setup for currency conversions, then
the one with the lowest precedence value is selected by the pricing
engine for conversion.

Markup Operator Select either Percent (%) or Amount. This operator is applied to either
Markup Value or Markup Formula, whichever is entered.

Markup Value This is a numeric constant value that can also be used in the Markup
Formula.

Markup Formula Select a formula. You cannot use a formula with Component Type
PLL (Price List Line) as a conversion formula because the PLL line
may have a different base currency than the price list to which this
currency conversion criterion is attached.

Note: You can enter both a Markup Value and Markup Formula,
provided that the Markup Value is used within the Markup Formula.
In this case, the final value is the value returned after computing the
Markup Formula.


Field Meaning

Conversion Enter a numeric conversion rounding factor that rounds the list price
Rounding Factor after the conversion and markup is applied. This rounding factor
could be different for the same Currency To value.

Round To Enter a numeric Round To value that rounds the selling price after the
modifiers are applied. This value is always the same for a Currency
To.

Note: If values for both Conversion Rounding Factor and a Round To
are entered for a currency conversion, the Conversion Rounding
Factor is applied first followed by the Rounding Factor. This will be
applicable for every item (except for the service item) in every pricing
event.

Precedence Example
When two conversion types with different attribute codes are passed from an Order
Management sales order, for example:
• Country = India and

• Item Cat. = CD Pack,

then the pricing engine selects the attribute with the highest precedence. Therefore,
1 is selected before 2 and so on. In this case, the attribute Country = India is selected
by the pricing engine because its precedence value (1) is greater than the
precedence value of Item Cat. = CD Pack (which is 2).

To Currency Conversion Attribut Attribute Start End Preceden
Code Type e Code Value Date Date ce

FRF Fixed Country USA 3/1/01 3/31/01 4

FRF Fixed Country India 3/1/01 3/31/01 1

FRF Fixed Item Cat CD Pack 3/1/01 3/31/01 2

FRF Fixed - - 3/1/01 3/31/01 3

To attach the multicurrency conversion list to a price list:
Once you have created a multicurrency conversion list in the Multi-Currency
Conversion window, you can attach it to a price list or agreement. You can select the


Multi-Currency Conversion List from the Currency Conversion Criteria field in the
price list or agreement.

Note: When you first set up multicurrency, a default multicurrency list
without conversion criteria is automatically generated by the system
and attached to price lists and agreements. You can replace the default
list by selecting an alternate multicurrency conversion list.

1. Navigate to the Advanced Pricing - Price Lists window.

Advanced Pricing - Price Lists: Multicurrency Enabled

2. Select the multicurrency list from the Multi-Currency Conversion field.
The field displays all currency conversion lists where conversion criteria base
currency = currency of the price list.
When multicurrency is enabled, the Round To field in the price list is grayed out;
you can update it only in the Multi-Currency Conversion window.

3. Save your work.

To attach the multicurrency conversion list to an agreement:
1. Navigate to the Pricing Agreements window.


Pricing Agreements window

2. Enter Agreement Type: Standard or Agreement.
• For standard agreements, you must select a price list. The base currency,
rounding factor, and multicurrency conversion attached to that price list default
to the window.

• For agreement price lists, in the Pricing tab, select a multicurrency conversion.
For Agreement price lists, you can select lists where the base currency of the
multicurrency conversion list is the same as the base currency of the agreement.
When multicurrency is enabled, the Rounding Factor field in the agreement is
grayed out; you can update it only in the attached multicurrency conversion.

3. Save your work.

To attach a multicurrency price list as a qualifier for a modifier:
A modifier has a single currency. You must create currency-specific modifiers.
Modifiers can be created in different currencies. The modifier is selected and applied
when the modifier currency is the same as price list's Base or To Currency.

2. Do a search or create a modifier and its respective currency; for example, a modifier


in CAN (Canadian dollars).

3. Click the List or Line Qualifiers button to display the qualifiers window.

4. Enter Modifier List in the Qualifier Context field.

5. Enter Price List in the Qualifier Attribute field.

6. Select a Price List that has Base Currency or To Currency defined with the same
currency as in the modifier header.

7. Save your work.

To use Promotional Good type of modifier line:
For a Promotional Good (PRG) type of modifier line, in the Get Product list for the list
line, you must select the price list whose currency is the same as the modifier currency.
If you create a promotion with a Get Item, you must ensure that the base currency for
the modifier (promotion) price list is the same as the base currency for the Get Item
price list (header). Otherwise, the pricing engine will not select or apply the Get Item.

2. Query or create desired modifier for the promotional good that uses the foreign
currency (for example, French Francs).

3. In the Modifier Summary window, select a line with the Modifier Type of
Promotional Goods.


5. In the Get region where you specify the Get Item details, select the required
information about the Get Item.

6. In the Get Price field, select a price list from the Benefit Price field where the Base
Currency = FRF has been defined.

7. Save the modifier record

Example of Multicurrency Price List Usage
The following example shows how a multicurrency conversion list calculates a price in
U.S. dollars when an item is ordered in Canadian Dollars (CAD). The following
multi-conversion list and base price list setups are used in the conversion scenarios:


Multicurrency Conversion List Setup

Header Level Field Name Value

Name of multicurrency list Test Multicurrency Conversion List

Currency (base currency) USD

Base Round To -2

Base Markup Value %

Base Markup Value 10

Base Markup Formula My Base Markup Formula with expression 1/2 (Step 1
divided by Step 2) where:

• Step 1 is of type List Price

• Step 2 is of type Modifier Value

Line Level Field Name Value

To-currency CAD

Conversion Type FORMULA

Formula (conversion) My Conversion Formula with expression 1*2 where:

• Step 1 is of type Numeric Constant and value 25


Markup Operator AMT

Markup Value 50.12345

Conversion Rounding Factor -3

Round To -2

The following table describes the setup for the base price list that is used in this
example:


Base Price List Setup

Field Name Value

Name Base PL

Currency USD

Item Item A

List Price 20

Dynamic Formula My Base Price List Line Formula with expression
1*2 where:


• Step 2 is of type Numeric Constant with a
value of 30

Scenario 1
If 1 unit of Item A is ordered in the currency Canadian Dollars (CAD), then the price is
determined in the following way:
1. Price of Item A from base price list Base PL is calculated using the dynamic formula
1 * 2, where step 1 is List Price and step 2 is Numeric Constant. The list price on the
base price list line for Item A is 20 and numeric constant is 30. So the list price now
is 20 * 30 = 600.

2. Because the Item A is ordered in CAD (which is not the base currency USD), the
Base Markup Value, Base Markup Operator, Base Markup Formula, and Base
Round To are not used in this calculation. Instead, the information at the conversion
line level is used:
• The conversion type is FORMULA.

• The formula that is used is My Conversion Formula with expression 1*2, where
step 1 is of type Numeric Constant and value 25 and step 2 is of type List Price.

The List Price that is used is the result of step 1, which is 600.
So the new list price now is 25* 600 = 15,000.

3. Because a markup formula My Conversion Markup Formula exists with expression
1/2 + 3, where:


• Step 1 is of type List Price.

• Step 2 is numeric constant 5,000.

• Step 3 is of type Modifier Value.

The markup is calculated as
15,000/5,000 + 50.12345
= 3 + 50.12345
= 53.12345
Note that the List Price is taken from Step 2 and that the Modifier Value is the
Markup Value on the conversion line. The final markup value is 53.12345, and the
markup operator is AMT.
So the new list price now is 15,000 + 53.12345 = 15053.12345.

4. If Item A is a non service item, then the conversion rounding factor - 3 is applied to
the result of step 3, that is, after the markup, if any, has been applied to the
post-conversion list price of step 2.

Note: This step is skipped for service items. So the new list price
now is 15053.123

So the new list price now is 15053.123.

5. The conversion line Round To is applied to the result of step 4. This Round To is
applicable to the list price, as well as to the net price but its application is subject to
the value of the profile option QP: Selling Price Rounding Options.
• If the profile option value is No, then the list price 15053.123, any adjustments,
and the selling price are not rounded.

• If the profile option value is Individual, then the list price, any adjustments, and
the selling price are each individually rounded to two places after the decimal
because the Round To on the conversion list is - 2.

So the new list price would be 15053.123 and is rounded to 15053.12.

Comments
• Markup operator can apply to the Markup Value as well as to the Markup Formula.
This is true for both Base Markup and Conversion Markup.

• Markup Value and Markup Formula can both be present in the same list. In that
case, the Markup Formula is used; the Markup Value may be used as the value for
any Modifier Value type of Formula Line in the Markup Formula.


• Modifiers is selected and applied only if either the currency on the modifier is null
or the currency on the modifier matches the ordering currency.

• If a Conversion Formula has a List Price formula component, the List Price from the
Base Price List (after dynamic formula calculation on the base price list if
applicable) is used for this formula component.

• If a Markup Formula (at the conversion line level) has a List Price formula
component, then the List Price after performing conversion is used for this formula
component.

• Conversion Rounding Factor is applied on the marked up value of list price. For
example, apply conversion rounding to the marked up conversion list price.

• Round To value on the conversion line is used to perform rounding of final list
price, adjustments, and selling price subject to the QP: Selling Price Rounding
Options.

Scenario 2
If 1 unit of Item A is ordered in the base currency USD, then the price is determined in
the following way:
1. Price of Item A from base price list is calculated using the dynamic formula 1 * 2
where step 1 is of type List Price and step 2 is of type Numeric Constant. The list
price on the base price list line for Item A is 20 and numeric constant is 30.
So the list price now is 20 * 30 = 600.

2. Because the Item A is ordered in the base currency USD, only the Base Markup
Value, Base Markup Operator, Base Markup Formula and Base Round To are used
in this calculation. Setup values at the conversion line level are not used.
Because there is a base markup formula My Base Markup Formula with expression
1/2 (step 1 divided by step 2), where step 1 is of type List Price and step 2 is of type
Modifier Value, the base markup is calculated as 600 / 10 = 60 (where list price is
taken from step I) and step 2 is the Base Markup Value. Because the Base Markup
Operator is %, the new list price now is 600 + 60% of 600 = 600 + 360 = 960.

3. The Base Round To -2 is applied to the result of step 2. This Round To is applicable
to the list price and the net price, and how it is applied is determined by the profile
option QP: Selling Price Rounding Options:
• If the profile option value is No, then the list price 960, any adjustments, and
the selling price are not rounded.

• If the profile option value is Individual, then the list price, any adjustments, and
the selling price are each individually rounded to two places after the decimal.
So in this case, the new list price is 960.00.


Updating the Multicurrency Conversion List
If you want to change or update conversion criteria such as increasing the conversion
fixed rate from 2.2 to 2.3, you can make your changes in the Multi-Currency Conversion
window. You can update information at both the header and line levels.

• Header Level changes: Be cautious when updating header level
information such as Markup because you will lose historical
information.

• Line Level changes: Be cautious when updating line level
information in the Conversion Criteria Detail region to avoid loss of
historical information. To prevent unexpected conversion behavior
and loss of historical data, enter an end date for the detail line and
enter a new line with the desired changes including a new start
date before updating any setup information.

To update the multicurrency conversion list:
1. Navigate to the Multi-Currency Conversion window.

2. Complete the required changes in the Multi-Currency Conversion List or the
Conversion Criteria Detail regions (header and line levels) using the suggested best
practice.
If you are changing Conversion Criteria Details, and you want to prevent
unexpected conversion behavior and loss of historical data, enter an end date for
the detail line, and enter a new line with the desired changes and a new start date.

3. Save your changes.
All saved changes to a multicurrency conversion list are immediately available to
all price lists and pricing agreements to which the list is attached.


7
Agreements

• Overview of Creating Agreements
• Creating Agreements
• Revising an Existing Agreement
• Finding Agreements
• Deleting Agreements

Overview of Creating Agreements
Oracle Advanced Pricing enables you to establish agreements that you negotiate with
your customers to define the prices, payment terms, and freight terms. You can:
• Define your agreements using customer part numbers and inventory item numbers.

• Make revisions to the original terms and maintain these changes and their reasons
under separate revision numbers.

• Define new prices or attach an already existing price list to the agreement.

• Assign optional price breaks by quantity. Price lists are exclusive by agreement.

• Set effectivity dates for agreement terms.

• Set payment terms including invoice rule and accounting rule.

• Set freight terms including the freight carrier.

• Apply agreement terms to sales orders by reference agreements.

Agreements 7-1

• If you are using the multicurrency feature with agreements, see
Attaching the Multi-Currency Conversion List to a Price List or
Pricing Agreement, page 6-11.

• You can view or update a price list on an agreement only in your
pricing transaction entity. The profile QP: Pricing Transaction
Entity must match the pricing transaction entity of the price list
attached to the agreement.

• You can view or update a price list on an agreement only in your
source system. The profile QP: Source System Code must match the
source system of the price list attached to the agreement.
Otherwise, the price list on the agreement is view-only.

Types of Agreements
There are two types of agreements:
• Standard Price List: Used, for example, to have one price list for all customers but to
default special terms on to a sales order for a specific customer.

• Agreement Price List: Used to offer a negotiated price for an item to a customer.

The following table compares the two agreement management methods:

Standard Price Lists Agreement Price Lists

Agreement lines not allowed. Agreement lines required.

Associated with standard price list (type PRL). Associated with agreement price list (type
AGR).

Maintain and view price list lines through the Maintain and view price list lines through the
Price List window. Agreement window.

Use each standard price list with multiple Use each agreement price list with multiple
standard agreements and price orders pricing agreements. Not usable to price orders
associated or not associated with an not associated with an agreement.
agreement.

Cannot revise price list lines using agreement Can revise price list lines using agreement
window. window.


Standard Price Lists Agreement Price Lists

Agreement number not automatically created Agreement number automatically created as a
as a qualifier for the associated price list. qualifier for the associated price list. You can
specify the pricing agreement on an order.

Customer Merge in Oracle Receivables
When you merge customers in Oracle Receivables, you can merge:
• The information from one customer (the From customer) with the information from
another customer (the To customer).

• The information from one or more customer sites of that customer (the From sites)
with the site information from the other customer (the To sites).

If the From customer is party to agreements, the Oracle Receivables merge process runs
an Oracle Advanced Pricing process to update the following agreements information:
• If you merge customer: The process changes the customer name on the agreement
from the From customer to the To customer. Verify this change in the Pricing
Agreements window, Agreement tab, Customer, and Cust Number fields.

• If you merge sites: The process changes the invoice address from the From
customer site to the To customer site. Verify this change in the Pricing Agreements
window, Payment tab region, Invoice To, and Address fields.

Creating Agreements
Use this process to create pricing agreements.

Note: In Order Management, the Agreement field does not appear by
default on the order header. You must click the Folder icon to display
it.

Security Privileges and Agreements
Pricing Security privileges affect pricing agreements by inheriting the security rules
associated with any price lists. You can select a price list to associate with an agreement
at setup if your privileges authorize view access to the price list. You cannot change the
price list or change its relationship to an agreement if you do not have Maintain access
to the price list.
If you have access issues, consult your Pricing Administrator.

Agreements 7-3

To create a pricing agreement:


2. Enter an agreement name to identify the agreement.

3. In the Agreement Number field, enter a value if one has been assigned to the
agreement.
The Revision Number field defaults to 1. However, this number may change as new
revisions are created (for example, from 1 to 2). The Revision Date defaults to the
current system date.

4. Complete the Customer name and Cust Number fields.

5. In the Agreement Type field, select a value such as Standard Terms and Conditions.

6. Select a contact name.

7. Enter the effective date range for the agreement. If you do not enter an end date, the
agreement will remain active for an indefinite period. However, if you are creating
revisions, you must end the current agreement.

8. In the Sales Person field, enter a name.


9. Enter the customer's purchase order number.

10. Enter a signature date for the purchase order.

The Agreement Source field (view-only) displays the source of an agreement.

In the Pricing tab
11. Select the Pricing tab.

Pricing Agreements window: Pricing tab

12. Select a value in the Price List Type field:

• Select Standard Price List to associate an existing price list with the agreement.

• Select Agreement Price List to associate an existing agreement price list to an
agreement.

13. Select a value in the Price List field:

• For Standard Price Lists, select Standard Price List. The Currency, Rounding
Factor, Description, and Comments fields default from the standard price list
selected. You cannot change these values in the Pricing Agreements window.

• For Agreement Price Lists: You can create a new price list name or select an
existing Pricing Agreement price list.

Agreements 7-5

Agreement price lists are maintained only in the Pricing Agreements window.
Unlike Standard Price Lists, you can adjust Agreement Price Lists.
Complete the following steps if creating an Agreement Price List:
If you choose an existing Agreement Price List, the Currency, Rounding Factor,
Description, Freight Carrier, Freight Terms, and Comments fields default from
the price list. However, if you change the values for any of these fields, the
information is changed for all pricing agreements using this price list.

14. Select a currency.

15. Enter a round to value.

16. Enter a price list description.

Complete the following steps for both Standard and Agreement price lists:

17. Enter a default freight carrier.

18. Enter default freight terms.

19. Enter any comments.

In the Payment tab
20. Select the Payment tab.



21. Select the payment terms:

• When you enter a sales order in Oracle Order Management, and the agreement
uses a standard price list, the payment terms default from that price list. You
can override the price list terms on the agreement.

• When you enter a sales order in Oracle Order Management, and the agreement
uses an agreement price list, the payment terms default from those that you
enter in this field.

22. Enter the bill-to name in the Invoice To field.

23. Enter a bill-to adress in the Address field.

24. Enter the bill-to contact in the Invoice Contact field.

25. In the Rules region, select a default accounting rule.

26. Select the invoicing rule:

• Accounting and invoicing rules are set up in Oracle
Receivables.

Agreements 7-7

• In the Override Flag region, the override check boxes for the
Accounting and Invoicing Rules are for information only.

To create agreement lines:
For Standard Price Lists: The agreement line details default from the Standard Price List
entered in the Price List field in the Pricing tab. You cannot change these fields or enter
additional lines from the agreement lines. You must make changes and additional price
list lines on the price list from the Price List Setup window.
For Agreement Price Lists: If you attached an existing Agreement Price List, the
agreement lines default from that price list. You can change the agreement line details,
and add additional agreement lines. Any changes or additions that you make are
reflected on the other agreements to which this price list is attached.
In the lowest region of the window, enter a product value. If there is a customer item
associated, the customer item number defaults to the Customer Item field. Customer
Item is a pricing attribute.

• Do not change the defaulted values for customer item, address, and
address category in this window. Make changes to these where the
customer item relationship is maintained. Create the accounting
and invoicing rules in Oracle Receivables.

• When you have created a customer item relationship with an
internal inventory item and you enter the inventory item product
value, the customer item, address, and address category defaults.

1. Enter a unit of measure (UOM).

2. Select Primary UOM if this price list line UOM is the primary pricing UOM for the
item. The pricing engine uses the primary pricing unit of measure and the Oracle
Inventory UOM conversion information to price an order whose UOM does not
have a price list line. For example, a price list has two price list lines for item
A11111, one with UOM EA, the primary UOM, and one for boxes. When the pricing
engine receives an order in UOM CS, it accesses the UOM conversion tables to
convert CS to EA.

3. Select Price List Line in Line Type field.

4. Select Unit Price in the Application Method field.

5. Enter a base price in the Value field.

6. Enter the effectivity dates in the Start Date and End Date fields. Enter dates within


the effectivity dates of the agreement.

7. Complete the Comments and Revision number fields.

Note: To create list of reasons, see Oracle Advanced Pricing
Implementation Guide, Lookups.

8. Enter a revision date.

9. Save your work.

Note: You cannot enter an item category in the Product Value field.

To define pricing attributes:
1. Click Pricing Attributes in the Pricing Agreements window to display the Pricing
Attributes window.

Pricing Attributes window

The Product Context, Product Attribute, and Product Value default from the
Agreement Line that you are entering.

2. Complete the Pricing Context, Pricing Attribute, and Value From/To fields.

3. Save your work.

Agreements 7-9

Note: The pricing attributes are joined as AND conditions because
they apply to one price list line.

To create price breaks:
1. Click Price Breaks to display the Price Breaks window.

Note: The Price Breaks button is enabled when you select the
following values:
• Price Break Header in the Line Type field

• Point or Range in the Price Break Type field

Price Breaks window

2. Complete the remaining steps for each price break that you define for the
agreement line:

3. The Pricing Context field value defaults to Volume, and the Pricing Attribute field
value defaults to Item Quantity. Optionally, select a different Pricing Attribute.

4. Complete the Value From and Value To fields. Price ranges for breaks must start
with 0 with no gaps between breaks. If you leave the Value To field of the price
break blank, a value of 999999... (15 digits) automatically defaults. This value is
hidden from the end-user and does not appear in the Value To field.


5. Enter a Price:
• For inventory items and item categories, enter the base list price of the item.

• For service items: If the Application Method is Unit Price, enter the base list
price of the item. If Application Method is Percent Price, enter a percent of
another item's price.

6. Select an Application Method (the default value is Unit Price). For more
information, see Application Method, page 3-4.


• Block Price: Using block pricing, you can apply a lumpsum price rather than a
per unit price to a price list line. Block pricing also allows pricing setups that
price by recurring values within blocks. For information on setting up price
breaks with Block Price, see: Defining Price Breaks with Block Pricing (for
application method Block Price), page 2-21.

Note: Block Price can only be selected if the line type is Price
Break Header (PBH) and Block Price is selected as the
Application Method for the agreement line.

7. Optionally, enter a recurring value for a block price. For example, if the value in the
Recurring Value field is 100, then the range is priced for every 100 items within the
block.

Note: The Recurring Value field is enabled when the following
values are selected:
• Break type is Range.

• The application method of Block Price is selected for both the
agreement line and price break line.

8. Save your work.

Related Topics
Defining Price Breaks for a Price List Line, page 2-18
To create a price break modifier line, page 3-43

Agreements 7-11

Defining Price Breaks with Block Pricing (for application method Block Price), page 2-21

Revising an Existing Agreement
If you must make minor changes to an existing agreement, such as changing the
payment terms, you can simply change the agreement terms and save the changes.
Doing so updates the existing agreement with your new changes.
However, if significant changes are required, and you want to keep a record of previous
agreements, you can create a new revision. This does not overwrite the existing
agreement but creates a new version of the original agreement. This is useful if you
want to track and manage multiple versions of the same agreement.
You must determine when changes warrant a new agreement version, and then
manually create a new revision and revision number. For tracking purposes, a logical
revision numbering system, such as numbering the revisions 2, 3, 4 and so on, will help
you better manage your agreements .
Once you create the new agreement revision, you can update the agreement header
information.

Note: You must end the current revision before creating a new revision.
An agreement can have multiple revisions but the effective dates
cannot overlap. Only one revision can be effective for a given range of
effective dates.

To revise an existing agreement:
1. Find the original agreement that you want to revise.

Note: The original agreement must have an effective end date
entered and saved before you can create a new revision. The end
date can be past, current, or future; however, the date ranges for
any revisions cannot overlap. Only one revision can be in effect for
a given range of effective dates.

2. Click Create Revision to display the Create Revision window.


Create Revision window

The Agreement Name defaults from the original agreement. Although you cannot
change the agreement name, you can change the revision number. The Revision
Date value defaults to the current date.

3. In the Revision Number field, identify the version of the agreement you are
creating. This helps you track and manage different revisions of the agreement.

4. Enter the effective start and end dates for the agreement. Date ranges cannot
overlap, and only one revision can be in effect for a given range of effective dates.

5. In the Revision Reason field, select a reason that describes why you are revising the
agreement.

6. Click Create to display the new agreement in the Pricing Agreements window. The
new revision number displays in the Revision field.

Note: Revisions to the agreement header do not revise the pricing
lines for the agreement. A change to the price list lines affects all
agreements to which the price lines are attached.

Finding Agreements
Use the Find Agreements windows to find agreements or agreement revisions by one or
more of the following criteria: Agreement Name, Agreement Number/Revision, Invoice
To, Price List, Customer, Cust Number, Agreement Type, Contact, Invoice Contact, or
Sales Person.

Agreements 7-13

To find agreements:
1. Navigate to the Find Agreements window.

Find Agreements window

2. Enter your search criteria.

3. When you have completed your entries, click Find to display the search results.

Note: To create a new agreement, click the New button.

Deleting Agreements
You can delete pricing agreements if they have not been used in any previous order
transactions. Once sales order lines are attached to an agreement, you cannot delete the
agreement. If you attempt to delete an agreement with sales order lines attached, a
warning note notifies you that you cannot delete the agreement.

To delete agreements:

2. Find the pricing agreement to delete.

3. From the Edit menu, click Delete to delete the pricing agreement.


8
Archiving and Purging Pricing Entities

• Overview of Archiving and Purging Pricing Entities
• Archiving Pricing Entities
• Purging Pricing Entities

Overview of Archiving and Purging Pricing Entities
Archiving pricing data enables you to copy pricing data from the pricing application
tables to archive tables for long-term data storage.
You can archive price list and modifier lines. The archiving process permanently
removes the lines from the related price list or modifier list into the archive tables for
storage.
When the archived data is no longer required (and does not need to be retained for legal
requirements), then you can use the purge feature to purge the data from the archive
tables.
You can archive and purge price list lines and modifier list lines for the following price
list and modifier list types:
• Agreement Price List

• Standard Price List

• Deal

• Discount List

• Freight and Special Charge List

• Promotion

Archiving and Purging Pricing Entities 8-1

• Surcharge List

Archiving and purging records reduces the number of pricing records that the pricing
engine queries, potentially improving processing performance.

Related Topics

Archiving Pricing Entities
Archiving your pricing data enables you to store pricing setups that are no longer active
or infrequently used. You can use the Archive Pricing Entities window to archive
modifier lines and price list lines. Doing so permanently removes the line information
from the associated price list or modifier list.

Note: Only the lines of a pricing entity can be archived. Price list and
modifier list header information is copied to archive tables but is never
deleted from the pricing application tables.

Archiving copies data from the application tables to archive tables for long-term data
storage. Once the pricing data is copied to the archive tables, it is deleted from the
application tables. When the archived data is no longer required, you can use the Purge
feature to remove the data from the archive tables. Archiving and purging records
reduces the number of pricing records that the pricing engine must query or process,
which potentially results in improved performance.
The following scenarios describe where archiving data can be useful:
• Easier to delete pricing records created in error: if pricing records are created in
error, you can delete these records.

• Archive infrequently used pricing records: As pricing setup records accumulate, the
performance of the query windows and pricing engine may decrease. Archiving
inactive or infrequently used pricing setups reduces the number of pricing records
that the pricing engine queries or processes and potentially improves pricing engine
performance.

Note: You can review the selected records before archiving them.
Once the data is archived, it cannot be retrieved back to the pricing
application tables. If you archive in error, you must recreate the
data for the original header. You can view the archived data using
Pricing database views based on archive tables. A user interface is
not available to view records of archived data.


• Archive to retain historical pricing records: For various legal or statutory reasons,
you may be required to keep pricing records for up to 10 years. If you are currently
using the Inactive box for each price list and modifier to identify expired lists,
consider archiving your records instead. If you do not archive your data, as the
number of pricing records (both active and inactive) increase in the database,
performance could decrease for accessing pricing setups.

Note: You can archive and purge from the pricing source system
(QP) and available source systems. The archiving and purging
windows are available through the Oracle Pricing Manager
responsibility. However, if pricing Security is ON, you must be
assigned Maintain Privileges to the pricing entities before you can
archive and purge them.

• Purge archived records: Archived pricing data can be purged from the archive
tables. You must archive data before you can purge it.

Archiving Considerations
Once the pricing data is archived, it cannot be restored or retrieved to the pricing
application tables. Therefore, before archiving data, it is important to consider the
following archiving guidelines:
• Price list headers and modifier list headers will not be deleted from pricing
applications tables. However, a copy of price list headers and modifier list headers
will be maintained in archive tables for each archive request.

• If archiving encounters problems or cannot be completed, a message is logged in
the concurrent program log with information about the problem.

• If the All Lines check box in the Archive Pricing Entities window is selected, then
you cannot select specific product information, and all the lines in the list will be
archived.

You can use the Archive Pricing Entities window to define your archiving criteria, such
as specifying which price list lines that you want to archive. You can specify a range of
product attribute values for Item Number and Item Category.
After you have made your selections, click View Selected Records to view the records to
be archived. You can either proceed with the archiving or cancel the request.
Archiving Entities Reviewed
The following table lists pricing entities and related archiving notes. Not all pricing
entities can be archived; consult this table for special instructions:


Pricing Entity To Be Archived Archiving Notes

Agreement You cannot view the data before archiving.

Excluded items Modifier has no effect on excluded items;
therefore, if the modifier line is archived, there
is no impact.

Line accumulations For modifiers, accumulated values are stored
in the calling application, not in the modifier
setup. User discretion is required when
archiving setup of modifier lines containing
range breaks.

Modifier lines When archiving modifier lines, if you leave
the Product Context blank in the archive
criteria, all the lines for the selected modifier
that do not have a product defined are
archived (if the line has been end-dated and
falls within the Start/End Date Active range of
the request).

Validations Any conditions that cannot be handled are
logged in the concurrent program log.

Coupons and related lines A coupon line and the attached benefit line are
not archived.

If the archive criteria selected either of the
coupon and benefit lines, both lines are not
archived. To archive, you must delete the
coupon line, and then delete the benefit line.

Price breaks You can archive price breaks. (Set up is
maintained in the archive table).

Price list lines (if the line has been used in a You cannot archive these lines; doing so
formula: Formula Type=Price List Line) would cause data integrity issues.


Pricing Entity To Be Archived Archiving Notes

Modifiers with limits You cannot archive modifiers with limits at
the header level. Modifier lines with limits
attached to them are also not archived. If the
archive criteria selects multiple lines, and a
few lines with limits are attached, only the
lines without limits are archived.

For lines having limits, a message is logged in
the concurrent program log to indicate that
the line was not archived because of limits.

Accrual redemption No impact.

Responsibility Archiving and purging is available through
the Oracle Pricing Manager responsibility.

Note: Pricing entity security cannot be assigned to the archive and
purge features. However, if Pricing Security is on, you must have
Maintain access to an entity to archive or purge it.

To archive pricing entities:
1. Navigate to the Archive Pricing Entities window.


Archive Pricing Entities window

2. In the Archive Name field, enter a name that uniquely identifies the entity to be
archived.

3. In the Entity Type field, select the type to be archived; in the adjacent field, select
the source system (such as Pricing) associated with the entity type.

4. In the Entity field, select the entity to be archived, such as the price list or modifier
list name. If pricing security is ON, you cannot view or select view-only price lists
and modifier lists.

Note: Modifier lists with header limits are restricted from being
archived when the archive request is submitted. In addition, the
following pricing entities are not archived nor do they appear if
you click View Selected Records before submitting the archive:
• Lines with limits

• Coupon/ benefit lines

• Formula lines


5. In the Lines To Archive region, select one of the following:

Note: If you do not select product criteria in the Lines To Archive
region, then all the end-dated lines falling within the date range
that do not have product specified in the price list or modifier list
are archived.

• To archive all lines for the selected entity, you must first clear the Active check
box on the list header. Once the list is inactive, you can select All Lines. If All
Lines is selected, then the remaining fields in the Line To Archive region are
grayed out because all of the lines are archived.

Note: The All Lines check box appears if the value of the Entity
Type field is Agreement Price List because you cannot
inactivate an Agreement Price List.

• To select specific archiving criteria, complete the remaining steps:

Note: For entity types of Standard Price List or Agreement Price
List, your criteria should include Product Context, Product
Attribute, Product Attribute Value From, and End Date Active
(provided the All Lines check box is not selected).

6. A value for the Product Context of Item field automatically defaults; however, you
can clear the field if you do not want to enter any product information.

7. Select a value in the Product Attribute field.

8. Select the Product Attribute Value From and Product Attribute Value To to specify
a range of product attribute values for Item Number and Item Category. For all
other product attributes, you cannot specify ranges. You must select the exact
product attribute value.

9. Select a date range in the Start Date Active and End Date Active field to include
modifier or price list lines that are active only within this date range. If you enter a
Start Date Active and End Date Active, only lines equal to or less than the Start Date
Active and End Date Active are archived. This is useful, for example, to archive
lines for a specific date range, for example, from June to September.

10. If you do not enter an active start date, the range is from infinity to the value that
you enter in the End Date Active field.

Note: You must enter a date in the End Date Active field (unless


you selected the All Lines check box).

11. Select Created By to archive records created by a particular system user.

12. Select Creation Date to archive records that were created on a particular system
date.

13. After selecting the archive criteria, click View Selected Records to display the Price
list or Modifier list window in query mode and review the records that meet the
selected archive criteria.

14. Click Submit to archive the records. The archive is saved using the name specified
in the Archive Name field.

Related Topics
Overview of Archiving and Purging Pricing Entities, page 8-1

Purging Pricing Entities
Purging pricing entities enables you to permanently delete archived pricing data. The
data must be archived first to prevent the accidental purging of important data from the
pricing tables.
Once the data is purged, you cannot retrieve it. Therefore, it is important to ensure that
the data to be purged is not required for legal or statutory retention.

To purge pricing entities:
1. Navigate to the QP Purge Entity window.


QP Purge Entity window

2. In the Source System field, select the system associated with the pricing data to be
purged.

3. Select one of the following combination methods to purge the archives, then
complete the fields for the selected combination:
• Archive Name, Entity Type, Entity: Purges a named archive.

• Entity Type, Entity: Purges all archives of a selected entity type and entity
name.

• Archive Start, End Date: Removes all archives falling within the specified range
of system archive dates. Also purges all the archives of a specified system
archive date using only the End Date Archive value.

4. Click Submit to purge the data.

Related Topics
Overview of Archiving and Purging Pricing Entities, page 8-1


9
Pricing Engine Request Viewer

• Overview of the Pricing Engine Request Viewer
• Viewing Information in the Pricing Engine Request Viewer

Overview of the Pricing Engine Request Viewer
The Pricing Engine Request Viewer window captures the pricing call from any calling
application, such as Oracle Order Management, and displays the inputs and outputs of
the pricing call. This information can help you to diagnose which price list lines were
selected or rejected by the pricing engine and to determine why certain prices and
adjustments were or were not applied.
Only the latest pricing request appears; however, historical data is not maintained
because the Pricing Engine Request Viewer window updates the display information
each time that the pricing engine captures a new transaction. Previous pricing requests
are saved in the pricing tables.
The Pricing Engine Request Viewer window is available from the main Advanced
Pricing menu (Pricing Manager responsibility) or in Oracle Order Management using
the following navigation path: Sales Orders > Tools > Pricing Engine Request Viewer.
Process for the Pricing Engine Request Viewer
The following outlines the activities when a pricing call is made:
1. The calling application makes a call to build qualifiers and builds the contexts
through mapping.

2. The calling application calls the pricing engine with the attributes generated by
attribute mapping.

3. The pricing engine processes the request, and then searches for and evaluates
eligible price list and modifier lines.

Pricing Engine Request Viewer 9-1

4. If the profile option QP Debug is set to Request Viewer On, then the pricing engine
inserts records into the permanent pricing debug tables and generates a unique
request ID, storing the information from the calling application.

5. You can then view the pricing request information by querying the request in the
Pricing Engine Request Viewer from the Order Management Sales Order Pad or
through the Pricing Manager responsibility menu.

Setting Up the User Profile Options
• QP: Debug: Set the value of this profile option to Request Viewer On when you
want the Request Viewer to capture pricing request details into the pricing debug
tables and debug log information into the debug log table. The debug log text file is
also created. The default value is Request Viewer Off.
The setting is active for the transactions for the user who set this profile option -
other users' transactions are not affected.

Note: Setting the profile QP: Debug slows the performance of the
Pricing Engine Request Viewer. The concurrent request Purge
Pricing Engine Requests purges the pricing engine requests. You
should run this program on a regular basis to purge the historical
data from the pricing debug tables. Periodically purging the
historical data improves the performance of the Pricing Engine
Request Viewer window.

• QP: Set Request Name: The profile option QP: Set Request Name is used in
conjunction with the QP: Debug profile option. Set QP: Set Request Name to Yes if
you want the value in the Request Name field prefixed to the OrderID. For more
information on setting up profile options, see Oracle Advanced Pricing Implementation
Manual, Profile Options.

Related Topics
Viewing Information in the Pricing Engine Request Viewer, page 9-2

Viewing Information in the Pricing Engine Request Viewer
The Pricing Engine Request Viewer window displays detailed information about the
price list lines and modifier lines that the pricing engine applied or rejected. In the
Pricing Engine Request Viewer window, you can view the following information:
• Pricing attributes, qualifiers, and product attributes passed to the pricing engine
along with the other data generated by the pricing engine.


• Modifier lines that the pricing engine applied or rejected for benefit adjustments
along with the details of the modifier line. View price request line of the calling
application.

• Relationships between order lines for promotional modifiers, price breaks, and
service lines.

• Formula step values generated by the pricing engine used in formula calculation.

• Controls passed by the calling application to the pricing engine, such as Event,
Rounding, Search and Calculate Flag, and GSA.

• View and query fields in the Pricing Debug Log.
You can view the debug log in the Pricing Engine Request Viewer window, and
query the record within the debug log to display the lines directly. The results are
the 10 previous lines and the remaining lines of the debug file.

You can delete a request by selecting (N) Edit > Delete.
The transaction details appear in one or more of the following regions in the Pricing
Engine Request Viewer window.
Pricing Engine Requests region
This region displays information about the pricing requests and information about
controls sent by the calling application to help you locate the problem.
For Request Type ONT only, the order number associated with the request appears.

Note: Depending on the version of Oracle Advanced Pricing, the order
and line numbers for orders created in prior releases may not appear in
the Pricing Engine Request Viewer window. However, you can view
order and line numbers created in subsequent releases.

Pricing Engine Request Lines region
This regions shows information about the lines being priced, including line number,
unit price, and adjusted unit price. You can view information related to service and
serviceable lines in this region.

Note: For lines of type LINE, the Line No. field displays the appropriate
line number from the Order Entry page. For lines of type ORDER, the
order number associated with that request appears. For requests of type
PRICE, the line number for the request lines of type LINE does not
appear.

The Request Id + Line Index column maintains the master-detail relationship between
the lines and line details. This block is used to change operand value, select/de-select

Pricing Engine Request Viewer 9-3

modifiers, change manual modifiers, and change buckets.
Pricing Engine Request Line Details region
This region displays information about processed price list lines and modifiers lines
selected or rejected by the pricing engine. The Priced box indicates which lines were
finally selected for pricing by the pricing engine. The Applied check box indicates
which lines were considered in calculating the selling price.
This region also displays the information for item upgrades, coupon issue, term
substitution, freight and special charges, and relationships between price breaks.
Pricing Debug window
Click View Debug Log to view the debug log in the Pricing Engine Request Viewer
window. You can then query a record within the debug log to display the lines directly.
The results display the ten previous lines and the remaining lines of the debug file.
Attributes window
Click the Attributes button to display all attributes for a selected line or line detail. The
region displays information about the pricing attributes that the attribute mapping
function passed to the pricing engine. The pricing engine uses these attributes to qualify
a line or an order for price and adjustments:
• Click Attributes from the Request Lines region to display the attributes passed to
the pricing engine.

• Click Attributes from the Request Line Details region to display the attributes
related to the selected price list lines/modifier line.

Pricing Debug Related Lines window
Click Related Lines from the Pricing Engine Request Viewer window to display the
Pricing Debug Related Lines window. The cursor must be in the Engine Request Lines
Details region. You can view the relationship between the Buy and Get items for Other
Item Discounts and Promotional Goods.
Formula Step Values window
When your cursor is in the Pricing Engine Request Lines Detail region, click Step Values
in the Pricing Engine Request Viewer window to display the Formula Step Values
window.

Related Topics
Overview of the Pricing Engine Request Viewer, page 9-1


10
Price Books

• Overview of Price Books
• Creating Price Books
• Viewing Price Books
• Creating Delta Price Books

Overview of Price Books
The price book feature enables you to generate and publish documents called price books
that list products and their prices for a specific customer. You can generate a full price
book that lists all orderable products and their prices, or a delta price book that shows
only those items whose prices changed since the last full price book was published, as
well as any prices for items that were added or deleted. You can publish a price book
either immediately or schedule a future publishing date. You can use the price book
feature to:
• Generate a hard copy or electronic copy of a price book to view and publish price
lists for planning purposes or price management. For example, sales representatives
may want to have a copy of pricing available for the customers on whom they call.

• View and publish list and net prices (the actual unit selling price and any freight
charges) for all the items purchased from a vendor or sold to a customer.

From the Create Price Book page (HTML user interface), you can publish a price book
that lists items and their list and net prices (applicable modifiers, price breaks, or
formulas for items, are reflected in the net price). You can publish the price book in
formats such as EXCEL, PDF, and RTF. You can send the price book by e-mail, print on
a designated printer, or publish it as an XML Message in the OAG Standard (Sync
Catalog 003). You can also view the formatted document by selecting View Document.

Price Books 10-1

Related Topics
Creating Price Books, page 10-2
Creating Delta Price Books, page 10-14

Creating Price Books
You can publish a price book for a specific customer that lists products (items) and their
related list and net prices. You can create a full price book that lists all orderable
products and their prices, or a delta price book that lists items and prices that have
changed since the last full price book was published. You can generate a price book
either immediately or schedule a future publishing date.
The price book can cross multiple price lists to derive the list price for a customer and
can include any associated multicurrency price lists and formula pricing. For an item,
you will see the price list used to derive the list price. Any automatic line level
discounts, surcharges, price breaks, or freight and special charge modifiers appear
below the list price line. If pricing buckets have been defined for any modifiers, the
modifiers appear in the order of the pricing buckets, with the null bucket modifiers
appearing last. Although freight and special charges do not affect the unit selling price
in Advanced Pricing, these charges do affect the Net Price in the price book.
Other applicable pricing entities used to derive prices for the price book include
qualifiers and pricing attributes. Qualifier and pricing attributes help to determine
which list prices and modifiers get applied in the price book. For example, if a pricing
attribute is used in a formula on a price list line, then that pricing attribute needs to be
supplied to derive the list price.
You can enter current, past, or future effective pricing dates for the price book;
however, if you have not created effective date ranges to record product price changes
in the price lists, then only the current price is reflected. When creating the price book,
you can specify internal items, and the price book will display the customer item
number (where available), making it easy for the customer to identify their items.
After you click Apply to publish the price book, a concurrent program automatically
generates and publishes the price book. You can review the status of your concurrent
requests in the Requests window.
Publishing Formats
You can publish the price book in various formats such as EXCEL, PDF, and RTF and
select various publishing options to generate the price book:
• Send Email

• Send to Printer

• Send XML Message


• View Document: View the stored formatted price book from the Reports page, and
view details for a specific price book line.

Using Electronic Messaging to Request and Publish a Price Book
Alternatively, an external user (such as a buyer) can request the price book from a seller
by using the XML electronic message GET_CATALOG_002. In the
GET_CATALOG_002 message, the price book requester must define the selection
criteria for generating the price book. The frequency for publishing the price book can
be for a given period or other terms as negotiated between the seller and buyer in their
Trading Partner Agreement.

Note: The Get_Catalog_002 XML message can only be initiated by
external users.

When the price book request is received, the price book supplier (such as the seller) can
publish a price book using the XML message called SYNC_CATALOG_003. For more
information, see Oracle Advanced Pricing Implementation Guide, Price Books.
Price Book Profile Options
The price book feature uses the following profile options to define the default settings:
• QP: E-mail From Address: This profile option defines the from e-mail address for
any e-mails that are sent from the price book feature.

• QP: External Default Pricing Perspective: This profile option sets the default pricing
perspective for all external users.

• QP: Inbound XML Messaging Responsibility: This profile option defines the
responsibility to be used for inbound XML messages.

• QP: Internal Default Pricing Perspective: This profile option sets the default pricing
perspective for all internal users.

• QP: Pricing Perspective Request Type: This profile option defines the mapping
between a Pricing Perspective (calling application) and the Request Type that it
uses.

For more information on setting up and using the profile options, see Oracle Advanced
Pricing Implementation Guide, Profile Options.

To create a price book:
1. Navigate to the Create Price Book page and select the generation and publishing
criteria for the price book:

Price Books 10-3

Create Price Book page

Note: The available list of values may vary depending on whether
you are an internal or external user. For example, for internal users,
the Customer field displays all parties; however, external users can
view only:
• The customer who is logged in.

• A party related to the logged in customer (defined by a Party
Relationship).

For example, if Nicole Burg, who is a customer and works for
Business World, logs in as an external user, then both Nicole Burg
and Business World appear in the list of values for the Customer
field but not any other unrelated party.
An external user can query, create, or publish only price books
specific to the logged in customer, related customer, or parent
customer, but not for any other customer.

2. Complete your entries in the Create Price Book page:
• Price Book Name: Enter a unique price book name for each customer for which


the price book is generated. The combination of price book name, customer and
price book type (full or delta) must be unique.

• Operating Unit: For internal users, the Operating Unit value is defaulted based
on the Multi-Org Access Control (MOAC) setup.

Note: This field is visible only to internal users. An internal
user can select an operating unit value (if available) other than
the default value.

• Pricing Perspective: The prices generated in the price book are based on the
pricing perspective. The pricing perspective mimics the calling application to
simulate prices coming from an order, service contract, or purchase order. An
internal user can override the default value of the pricing perspective; however,
external users cannot view or change the pricing perspective.
If Purchasing is selected as the pricing perspective, only purchasable products
appear in the price book. However, an external user cannot have a pricing
perspective of Purchasing, and cannot create, query or publish a price book
with Purchasing pricing perspective.

• Oracle Advanced Pricing is not considered a Pricing
Perspective because it is not a calling application such as
Order Management or Purchasing.

• Oracle Purchasing and Oracle Complex Maintenance
Repair and Overhaul products must be licensed for the
installation for these applications to be available in the list
of values for Pricing Perspective.

The following profile options define the default Pricing Perspective values for
all external and internal users:
• QP: Internal Default Pricing Perspective: This profile option sets the default
pricing perspective for all internal users.

• QP: External Default Pricing Perspective: This profile option sets the default
pricing perspective for all external users.

You can override the default value of the pricing perspective; however, external
users cannot change or view the pricing perspective.

• Product Criteria: This is a mandatory field and the valid values are Item, Item
Category, Price List, or All Items. Depending on the value selected, an
additional field appears where you can select a specific item number, item

Price Books 10-5

category or price list name.
• All Items: Select the All Items option to publish all items for the price book.
If All Items is selected, then the price book displays all items and unit of
measure (UOM) combinations. Each item can appear multiple times but
with different UOM. The following UOM are considered:
• Primary UOM of the item.

• UOM in other UOM classes (provided those UOM are present in a price
list).

• UOM in the same UOM class as the item's primary UOM code.

• Item: Select the Item option, and then specify an item number to publish the
prices for a selected item such as AS54888. If you select the Item option,
then the price book displays all item/UOM combinations for the selected
item.

• Item Category: Select an item category, such as computer modems or laser
printers, to publish the prices for that specific item category. If Item
Category is selected, then all items/UOM combinations within category will
appear in the price book. If the item category belongs in a hierarchical
catalog (category set), then all items/UOM combinations in the
subcategories will appear.

• Price List/Price List Name: This option generates the price book for all item
and uom combinations for items on the selected price list. Prices for the
items are derived from the price list where possible (if the appropriate
pricing attributes are specified in the additional criteria) but, if not, will be
derived from other price lists.
In the Price List Name field, you can select from price lists belonging to the
selected operating unit and all global price lists.

Note: The list of values for price lists will be restricted to
price lists with a Source System Code belonging to the
pricing transaction entity of the pricing perspective.

3. Complete your entries in the Price Calculation Criteria region:
• Currency: Select the currency that the price book is to be published in. You can
select from all valid currencies; however, if a price list has been specified in the
product criteria or based on fields, then the following conditions apply:
• For non-multicurrency price lists, the Currency field is set to the price list's


currency; you cannot change it

• For multicurrency price lists, you can select only from those currencies for
which the multicurrency price list has conversions. The price book is
published in the selected currency.

• Set the following multicurrency profile options to enable the pricing book
to work from the calling application you define: QP: Multi Currency Usage
and QP: Multi-Currency Installed.

• Pricing Effective Date: Define the effective date of the prices that you want
published. Current, past, or future effective pricing dates are supported.

Important: If you have not maintained a record of price
changes (by entering effective dates for products in price lists),
then only the current product price is published, regardless of
the price specified in the Pricing Effective Date field.

• Quantity: Enter the assumed quantity per item when prices are published in the
price book (default is 1). The quantity per item is applied regardless of the
Product Criteria selected such as All Items, Item, Item Category, or Price List.
For example, if All Items is selected and the Quantity is 1, then the price is
based on 1 of each item.
If your pricing setup includes price breaks or other volume-based pricing, you
may want to enter a higher quantity per item to see pricing results based on
that quantity ordered.

• Customer: Select the name of the customer for whom you are publishing the
price book. This is a mandatory field. However, you can enter the Customer
Number field before entering the Customer. Because a customer number can
belong to only one customer, the customer associated with the customer
number displays as the default value in the Customer field.

• Customer Number: A customer can have multiple customer numbers
(accounts), for example, to identify separate corporate entities within a
company such as a sales office, a division, or a department. Select a customer
number to publish the price book for a unique selected entity. If you do not
select a customer number, then the price book is published for the selected
customer.
If the selected customer has only one account, then that customer/account
number is defaulted for the Customer Number field and cannot be changed. If a
customer has more than one account, then no defaulting is done for the
Customer Number field. You can choose to leave the Customer Number field
blank.

Price Books 10-7

Note: The Customer and Customer Number fields are not
displayed when the Pricing Perspective is Purchasing.

• Pricing Basis: Select a value to derive list prices from a specific price list, sales
agreement, or agreement. If a price is not found from the specified entity, then
the pricing engine evaluates other price lists to get a price.
Depending on the value selected for this field, an additional field is displayed
where you can select a specific price list, sales agreement, or pricing agreement.
The price list specified for product criteria becomes the price list on which
prices will be based on as well. You cannot select the values sales agreement and
agreement from the Pricing Basis field when the Pricing Perspective is
Purchasing. The list of values for the Sales Agreements and Agreements fields
is restricted to global agreements and sales agreements and the agreements and
sales agreements specific to the current Customer.

Note: The Pricing Basis value defaults as Price List (read-only)
if the Price List option is selected in the Product Criteria field.
The price list specified for the product criteria becomes the
price list for which prices are based on as well.

4. In the Additional Criteria region, you can enter additional pricing criteria such as
pricing and qualifier attributes that can be used to generate the price book.
Attributes such as Customer, Product, Price list, Agreement, and Sales Agreement
that are already defined as main criteria in the create price book steps cannot be
entered as additional criteria.

5. Complete your entries in the Publishing Options region:
• Send Email: Specifies the e-mail addresses to which the price book will be sent.
You can enter multiple e-mail addresses, separated by commas.

Note: The QP: Price Book - E-mail From Address profile option
defines the default e-mail address of the person sending the
price book.

• Send to Printer: Enter the name of the printer where the price book is to be
printed. If no printer is specified, the default printer defined in the XDO
configuration file is used.

• Send XML Message: Select this option to send the price book as a
SYNC_CATALOG_003 XML message to the customer specified in the
Customer Site field. The Sync Catalog 003 message corresponds to the price


book in the XML format.
If you select this option, then the Customer Site field is displayed and a value
must be selected from the list of values.

Note: The Send XML Message publishing option is not
available when the Pricing Perspective is Purchasing.

• Template: Select the template format to be used for generating the price book. If
you select a template and document type and generate the price book, the
formatted document is stored automatically. You can then click View
Document on the Search or Details page to view the generated document
• Price Book Details: Publishes items/item categories and their list and net
prices. Provides additional details about pricing attributes, price breaks,
charges, discounts, and surcharges.

• Price Book Errors: Provides a report about any pricing errors generated by
the pricing engine related to the price book. If errors occurred, you can
correct them before regenerating the price book. Typical errors can include:
• Missing pricing attribute needed for a formula calculation.

• Duplicate price lists lines due to precedence.

• Item and UOM not found on a price list.

Note: If there is no price for an item, then the list price is
blank.

• Price Book Summary: Publishes items/item categories and their list and net
prices.

• Document Type: Select the document type for the price book, such as EXCEL,
PDF, or RTF.

• Publish: Select one of the following options:

Note: The Template and Document Type must be specified if
you select the Send E-mail or Send to Printer publishing
options.

• Immediate: Publishes the book immediately.

Price Books 10-9

• Schedule: Enter the specific date and time for the price book to be published
automatically.

6. After completing your entries, click Apply to generate and publish the price book.
A concurrent program automatically generates and publishes the price book. You
can review your concurrent requests to track the status of your price book request.
Alternatively, you can view the price book (or its current status) by searching for
the price book on the price book Search page. From the search results, view the
request status by clicking View Request Status.

To republish an existing price book:
1. To publish an existing price book, do a search to display the price books in the
Reports page, then click Name to display the price book details.

2. Click the Publishing Options tab, select the publishing options, then click Publish
Price Book. The price book is republished, not regenerated, and overrides existing
formatted documents or templates.

Related Topics
Overview of Price Books, page 10-1
Viewing Price Books, page 10-10

Viewing Price Books
In the Search page, do a search to find information about published full or delta price
books, and view the published price book. From the search results, you can:
• View general information about each price book.

• Identify if errors occurred when the price book was published.

• View information about the current status of the price book request.

• View detailed information about a specific price book by clicking the price book
Name.

• Create a delta price book from an existing full price book by clicking the Create
Delta icon.

• Delete an existing full or delta price book.


Note: The following conditions apply to the search process:

• You can use partial search strings, such as A%, in the search field,
but you cannot use blank queries or search only using the % sign.

• External users can view only the logged in customer and related
parties in the Customer field. The Pricing Perspective and
Operating Unit search fields are not visible to external users.

• If the pricing perspective of Purchasing is selected in the main
search criteria then a) the Customer field is not available in the
additional criteria and b) the list of values for the List Name criteria
contains only price lists but not pricing agreements or sales
agreements.

• If a search is performed with the criteria Pricing Perspective =
Purchasing, then the Customer column is not displayed. Price
books with Purchasing as the pricing perspective will display null
for the Customer column in the Search results.

To view price books:
1. Navigate to the Search page and search to find the price books.

Reports-Search page

The search results display additional information about the price books (selected
fields listed). You can sort the Price Book Name, Customer, and Pricing Effective
Date columns by clicking the column title.

Price Books 10-11

• Name: Displays the price book name.

• The link on the price book name is disabled when the price
book is being generated or published (for example, if the
concurrent request is in progress).

• The delta price book is assigned the same name as the
parent full price book; however, the Type field identifies it
as either a full or delta price book.

• Pricing Effective Date: Displays the effective date of the prices listed in the price
book (not necessarily the date that the price book was generated). For example,
if you published a price book on September 9, 2007, with the pricing effective
date of December 13, 2006, then the Effective Date appears as 13-Dec-2006.

• Pricing Errors: Identifies if errors occurred when the price book was generated
or published. If errors occurred, you can correct them before regenerating or
republishing the price book. Typical errors can include:
• Missing pricing attribute needed for a formula calculation.

• Duplicate price lists lines due to precedence.

• Item and UOM not found on a price list.

Note: If there is no price for an item, then the list price is blank.

• View Request Status: Click a request status icon to display additional
information about the concurrent request and diagnostic information about the
status (such as request date, successful or failed request).

• View Document: View the existing price book (if published as .pdf, .rtf, or .xls)
by clicking the document name. If you select a template and document type and
publish the price book, the formatted document is stored automatically. You
can click the View Document link on the Search page or Details page to view
that document.

• Create Delta: Click Create Delta to publish a delta price book that lists only
those products whose products and prices have changed since the selected full
price book was last published.

To view details about a specific price book:
1. From the price book search results, click the price book name to display the Price


Book Details window.

Note: If the pricing perspective is Purchasing, then the Customer
and Customer Number fields are not displayed in the header
region of the Price Book Details page.

Price Book Details page

2. You can view the following information in the Price Book Details page:
• Price Book Lines tab
You can search for a specific item in the price book by entering a value in the
product field. The search results will be returned in a table and you can click on
the View Hierarchy icon to see the pricing details of the item such as related
modifiers, price breaks, and other details. Customer item number and customer
item descriptions are available if cross-references exist between the inventory
item number and customer item number. (Select to display these columns when
setting up personalization options for the price book.)
In the Price Book Lines tab, the products in the price book appear grouped by
item categories. An item and UOM combination has a unique price but will be
repeated in all the item categories to which the item belongs.

Price Books 10-13

Note: If an internal item is mapped to more than one customer
item for a customer, then no value will display for the
Customer Item Number and Customer Item Description fields
in the Price Book Lines tab.

• Publishing Options tab
Select publishing options to republish the price book. For information on
publishing options, see Creating a Price Book, page 10-2.

• Additional Pricing Criteria tab
Displays any qualifiers or pricing attributes entered as pricing calculation
criteria.

Note: You can define additional criteria information such as
pricing attributes or qualifier inputs in the Additional Criteria
region when you create a price book. For example, if a price is
calculated using a formula and a pricing attribute is used in the
formula calculation, then you can define the pricing attribute in
this region.

To delete a price book:
From the price book search results, select the price book to be deleted, and then click
Delete. When a full price book is deleted, its related delta price book is also deleted. You
cannot delete a full or delta price book whose concurrent request is in progress (such as
create or publish).

Related Topics

Creating Delta Price Books
A full price book lists products (items) and their related list and net prices. However,
you can generate a delta price book to view only the products and prices that have
changed since you published a specific full price book. The delta price book lists:
• Products whose prices have changed since the last full price book was published.

• Eligible products added or deleted since the last full book was published.


The pricing engine evaluates the following dates to determine if changes occurred since
the full price book was generated:
• New Pricing Effective Date: The date that the delta price book is to be generated.
This can be a current or future date.

• Pricing Effective Date: The date when the full price book was generated.

When you generate the delta price book, only the changed items are published.
For example, if Item AS54888 was $5 when the original full price book was generated
(Pricing Effective Date = June 12, 2006) but the item is now $7 (New Pricing Effective
Date = current date), then this item and its new price would be published in the delta
price book.

• When you delete a full price book, its delta is also deleted.

• You cannot change the delta price book name because it defaults
from the full price book name.

• The Price Book Type identifies if the price book is Delta or Full.

To create a delta price book:
1. Navigate to the Create Delta Price Book page.

Price Books 10-15

Create Delta Price Book Page

2. Select the price calculation criteria:
New Pricing Effective Date: Enter the new pricing effective date for the delta price
book. The delta price book compares the prices and products on the new pricing
effective date to those published in the full price book based on the pricing effective
date. Only the prices and products that have changed are published in the delta price
book.

3. Select the publishing options. All other input criteria are identical to those available
in the corresponding full price book.

Related Topics


11
Reports and Concurrent Programs

• Overview of Reports and Concurrent Programs
• Accrual Details Report
• Attribute Mapping Rules Error Report
• Build Attribute Mapping Rules Program
• Build Formula Package Program
• Cross Order Volume Load
• Cross Order Volume Report
• Modifier Details Report
• Price Lists Report
• Pricing Formulas Report
• Purge Pricing Engine Requests Program
• QP: Bulk Import of Price List Program
• QP: Maintains the Denormalized Data in QP Qualifiers
• QP: Pattern Upgrade
• QP: Security Control with Views Conversion
• Qualifier Grouping report
• Update Price Lists with Multicurrency Conversion Criteria
• Update Promotional Limit Balances program

Overview of Reports and Concurrent Programs
Oracle Advanced Pricing provides reports and concurrent programs that enable you to
administer, manage, and review your pricing operations and data to:

Reports and Concurrent Programs 11-1

• Determine what pricing information has been established (for example, active price
lists, formulas and qualifiers).

• Communicate pricing information internally and externally (for example,
publishing price lists to internal and external users).

• Take action based on order or pricing activity (for example, issuing a credit memo
based on reported accruals).

Note: When Pricing Security is ON, security privileges determine
which pricing entities you can view from the list of values. View or
Maintain privileges determine the actions that you can do in
various windows.

Accrual Details Report
The Accrual Details report enables you to run a report to view modifiers that have been
set up for accruals or those with associated Coupon Issue information. Using this
report, you can quickly see which coupons have been issued and the coupon numbers
generated for a modifier.
Report Submission
In the Submit Request window, Name field, select Accrual Details.
Report Parameters

Accrual Details Report

• Modifier Name From/To: Select a range of modifier names to narrow the report to
the names that fall between the specified range. For example, if you specified
modifier names A to F, modifier names G and H will not be included in the report.


• Start/End Date Active: Select the start and end date range of the modifiers to be
included in the report.

• Qualifier Context: Select a qualifier context to narrow the report to only those
modifiers with the selected qualifier context.

• Qualifier Attribute Value From/To: Select specific qualifier attribute to further
define the selected qualifier context.

Attribute Mapping Rules Error Report
This program provides status and error messages to advise you about the following:
• Invalid attribute mapping rules.

• Warnings if the program completes with Attribute Mapping errors.
• Success: Program completes without Attribute Mapping errors.

• Warning: Program completes with one or more Attribute Mapping errors.

• Error: Program cannot complete due to some exception/runtime error.
The report displays an entry in the file log for every attribute mapping rule that
is invalid. The entry includes details, such as the context, attribute, pricing type,
request type, attribute mapping rule, and error message produced by the
invalid mapping.

You can run the report for a single Request Type, such as Order Management (ONT) or
all request types. The number of errors appears on the log after the report is run.
Report Submission
In the Submit Request window, Name field, select Attribute Mapping Rules Error
Report.
Report Parameters


Attribute Mapping Rules Error Report Parameters

Request Type: Select a single Request Type or leave it blank to run report for all request
types.

Build Attribute Mapping Rules Program
This program generates entries into the BUILD_CONTEXTS application program
interface (API). You pre-generate entries into this API so that the pricing engine
evaluates only the qualifier and pricing attributes used in the price lists, modifiers, and
formulas that are relevant to each call rather than all of the attribute mapping rules.

Note: The Build Attribute Mapping Rules program sources the
attributes that are used only in the active pricing setup if the profile
value QP: Build Attributes Mapping Options is set to Yes. If the profile
value QP: Build Attributes Mapping Options is set to No, this program
sources the attributes that are used in both the active and inactive
setup. The default value of the profile QP: Build Attributes Mapping
Options is No; you can update it only at the site level.

Recovery Process
If the process fails:
• The QP_BUILD_SOURCING_PVT package becomes invalid.

• All subsequent pricing calls fail.

To recover,
1. Check the concurrent program log to view any errors. If needed, log in to
SQL/PLUS and check the errors associated with compiling the
QP_BUILD_SOURCING_PVT body. Problems may include:
• You reference an API in an attribute mapping rule and the API is invalid or
does not exist.

• You have a typographical error in an attribute mapping rule that refers to an


API or global structure.

2. Fix the attribute mapping rule in the Attribute Mapping window.

3. Rerun this concurrent process.

Report Submission
Run this program after you:
• Make a change to the mapping rule for a specific qualifier attribute. For example,
run this process after you map the Geography context to a qualifier attribute.

• First use a qualifier in either a modifier or a price list. For example, run this process
after the first time that you use Customer Class as a qualifier for a price list or
modifier.

In the Submit Request window, Name field, select Build Attribute Mapping Rules.
Run the process during a time when most users are not logged on to the system. You
may encounter a record locking problem if this process runs at the same time that the
pricing engine is processing calls.
Report Parameters
None

Build Formula Package Program
To generate the formula package, you should run the Build Formula Package
concurrent program every time that you set up a new formula expression. Every time a
new formula expression is created or updated, a Warning dialog box displays a
message to run the Build Formula Package concurrent program.
This concurrent program builds the Formula Package containing statements that use
bind variables for evaluating the formula value. This generated package is called from
the main engine formula package at run time to calculate the formula value.

Note: If the Formula expression already exists in the current generated
formula package, the Warning box does not appear.

Report Submission
In the Submit Request window, Name field, select Build Formula Package.
Report Parameters
None


Cross Order Volume Load
Cross order volume amount totals are based on the list price (not selling price) of the
order lines. Run the Cross Order Volume Load program to populate the cross order
volume tables. Then you can run the Cross Order Volume report to view the
information from the cross order volume tables. The Cross Order Volume Load
program uses the following criteria when computing cross order volume attributes:
• Accumulates orders for items in the Cross Order Item Amount/Quantity Summary
that have modifiers set up with cross order volume attributes, such as Period 1
Amount, Period 1 Item Quantity, Period 1 Item Amount. Similarly, the pricing
engine gives total Cross Order summaries only if a cross order qualifier has been
used in a modifier. To ensure that all item totals are accumulated and loaded into
the cross order tables, run the Cross Order Volume Load concurrent request after
setting up any modifiers using either:
• a cross order amount qualifier that has not been used previously or

• a cross order item amount/quantity pricing attribute for an item that has not
been used previously

• Has a total based on list price (not selling price).

• Considers orders and order lines only in Booked status.

• Includes recurring charges. (Order lines that have a charge periodicity attribute
associated such as Monthly, Yearly are recurring charges.)

• Does not support across items in an item category.

Note: Cross order item amount and cross order item quantity only
accumulates order line totals per item, not for order lines across
items in an item category.

Example of Cross Order Volume Period Processing
The cross order volume profile options define which order lines to include in the cross
order volumes. For example, consider the following cross order volume period setups:
• Profile option QP: Cross Order Volume Period 1: 30



If you set the profile options as described, then run the Cross Order Volume Load
program with an effective date of December 31, 2005, the pricing engine considers
orders lines with request dates from the following periods:


• Cross order period 1: Order lines with a request date between 1-December and
31-December-2005

• Cross order period 2: Order lines with a request date between 1-November and
31-December-2005

• Cross order period 3: Order lines with a request date between 2-October and
31-December-2005

Report Submission
In the Submit Request window, Name field, select Cross Order Volume Load.
Report Parameters

Cross Order Volume Report Parameters

• Operating Unit: Enter either a single operating unit or leave this field blank for all
operating units.

• Effective Date: Provide the load effective date; otherwise, the program uses the
current date.

Cross Order Volume Report
Run the Cross Order Volume report to view the information from the cross order
volume tables. The report displays the total order amount, total item amounts, and total
item quantities for each customer and period. The report displays the cross order
quantity values (for example, Period 1 Item Quantity) rounded to the nearest whole
unit. Cross order amount values (for example, Period 1 Amount and; Period 1 Item
Amount) are rounded to two decimal places.

Note: The Cross Order Volume report displays only totals for the
operating units to which the responsibility has access. If you have
implemented Multi-Org Access Control, data reported is for the list of
operating units as restricted by MO: Security Profile.

Report Submission


In the Submit Request window, Name field, select Cross Order Volume Report.
Report Parameters
None

Related Topics
Cross Order Volume Load, page 11-6

Modifier Details Report
This report displays modifier information.
Report Submission
In the Submit Request window, Name field, select Modifier Details.
Report Parameters

Modifier Details Report Parameters

• Modifier Number From/To: Enter the range of modifier numbers for which you
want the report generated.

• Modifier Name From/To: Enter the range of modifier names.

• Modifier Version From/To: Enter the range of modifier versions.


• Start Date Active/End Date Active: Enter the range of dates for the active modifiers.

• Active Modifier Only: Select Yes to display only active modifier lists and No to
display all modifier lists.

• Active Modifier Lines Only: Select Yes to display only active modifier lines or No to
display all modifier lines.

• Item Name: Select item name criteria to display modifiers for the item names that
you specify.

• Item Category: Select item category criteria to display modifiers for the item
categories listed.

• Customer Name: Select customer name criteria to display modifiers associated with
the specified customer names.

• Customer Class: Select customer class criteria to display modifiers assigned to the
specified customer classes.

• Price List: Select the price list criteria to display modifiers associated with the
specified price list.

Note: If pricing security is enabled, the report includes only
modifiers for which you have View or Maintain access privileges.

Price Lists Report
This report displays the following price list information:
• Report by price list name.

• Options to print report for active and inactive price lists based on effectivity date. If
multicurrency is enabled, the report prints other currency setup if the price list is
multicurrency enabled.

• Display all other header information. If price list is multicurrency enabled, report
includes header information from the associated multicurrency conversion list.

• Qualifiers attached to price list.

• Secondary price lists attached to price list.

• Detail of list lines attached to price list.

• Detail of item (for example, inventory item, service item).


• Pricing attributes for item.

• Price breaks for item.

• Price formulas attached to price list line.

Report Submission
In the Submit Request window, Name field, select Price Lists.
Report Parameters

Price List Report Parameters

• Price List From/Price List To: Enter a price list or a range of price lists.

• Start Date Active/End Date Active: Enter a date or a range of dates.

• Active Flag: Select Yes to display active price lists only, or select No to display all
price lists. The default value is Yes.

• To Currency Code: Select one Currency To multi-currency conversion list setup
information or None.
If the multi-currency feature is enabled for a price lists, the names of the attached
Currency Conversion Criteria, Base Markup Operator, Base Markup Value, and
Base Markup Formula are returned.

Note: If pricing security is enabled, only price lists for which you have
View or Maintain access privileges are included in the report.

Pricing Formulas Report
This report displays pricing formulas and their details, including factor lists.
Report Submission


In the Submit Request window, Name field, select Pricing Formulas.
Report Parameters

Pricing Formulas Report Parameters

• Formula From/To: Enter an individual formula or range of formulas.

• Price List From/To: Enter an individual price list or a range of price lists.

• Start Date Active/End Date Active: Enter an individual date or a range of dates.

Purge Pricing Engine Requests Program
This program purges all pricing engine requests or selected requests. Run this program
on a regular basis to purge the historical data from the pricing debug tables. This
improves the performance of the Pricing Engine Request Viewer window.
Report Submission
In the Submit Request window, Name field, select Purge Pricing Engine Requests.
Report Parameters

Purge Pricing Engine Requests Parameters

This program has two input parameters:
• Keep Last (N) Days of Requests: The pricing engine purges requests older than the


number of days entered. For example, enter 30 to keep requests created in the last
30 days. Requests older than 30 days are purged.

• Request Name: Enter a Request Name to delete the pricing engine requests that
fully or partially match the name that you enter.

Recovery
None

QP: Bulk Import of Price List Program
The Pricing Data Bulk Loader API is implemented as the concurrent program QP: Bulk
Import of Price List. Using the concurrent program, you define the pricing data to be
imported (bulk loaded), then run the concurrent program to import the price list data
from interface tables into the Oracle Advanced Pricing tables. To improve processing
efficiency, you can schedule the concurrent program to run at optimal times, such as
when no active users are on the system.
The QP: Bulk Import of Price List program enables you to complete the following tasks:
• Do bulk validations and bulk loading.

• Provide all validation error messages in the same run for records that were not
uploaded rather than returning errors one after another.

• Provide the ability to multi-thread the interface loader similar to Order Import with
the ability to multi-thread within the same price list.

You can set the profile option QP: Batch size for Bulk Upload
(QP_BATCH_SIZE_FOR_BULK_UPLOAD) to restrict the number of records that are
read to the PL/SQL tables. This helps to improve the bulk import performance. The
default value for the profile is 1,000, but you can change this value to suit your
hardware configuration. For more information, see the Advanced Pricing Implementation
Guide, Profile Options.
Scenarios for Using the QP: Bulk Import of Price List Program
Your business practices may require that you upload price list data on a regular basis,
such as in the following scenarios:
• When a new price list must be created by uploading a price change file.

• When new products lines are created, new offerings to new channels, acquisitions
of product lines or companies, new product rollout, and when new price lists are
created.

• When you are implementing a new sales territory, to bulk load existing price lists or
to upload pricing from regions that may have their pricing on spreadsheets.


Processes performed by the QP: Bulk Import of Price List Program
The QP: Bulk Import of Price List program completes the following processes:
• Creates and updates price list headers, lines, pricing attributes, qualifiers, and
breaks using the interface tables.

• Deletes price list lines, pricing attributes, qualifiers, and breaks using the interface
tables.

• (Optionally) Uses the Process Parent parameter in the concurrent program to load
list lines even if the pricing attribute validation fails. If the Option is NO, and a
pricing attribute fails, both parent and child lines are not uploaded.

• Stores the interface program ID in the main pricing tables so that you know which
batch ID updated the records.
This program updates only the IDs that are derived from Value To ID conversions
back to the interface tables. If a record generates errors, the record remains in the
interface tables where you can view the IDs.

• Marks a record as being processed so that multiple processes do not pick up the
same record.

• Automatically deletes the successfully uploaded rows from the interface tables.

• Processes a specific set rather than the entire eligible data.

Note: For more information on populating the interface tables for bulk
loader, see Oracle Advanced Pricing Implementation Guide.

Considerations for Running the QP: Bulk Import of Price List Program
Review the following considerations before running the QP: Bulk Import of Price List
program:
• Source System/Pricing Transaction Entity (PTE): The concurrent program retrieves
records only when the source system code and the PTE code match with the same
profile values or null.

• Price lists that are attached to the following entities are not retrieved for bulk loader
processing:
• Sales Agreements (list source code of BSO)

• Service Contracts (list source code of OKS)

• Pricing Agreements (list type code of AGR)

• Importance of Log and Output file: The request output contains the following


information:
• Number of records processed

• Number of successful records

• Error messages (if applicable)

The concurrent request log file provides the processing details. The log file also lists
debug messages if Debug On parameter was set to Yes. If you enter an entity name
that is not unique for the eligible records, none are selected for processing.

• Child lines, parents, and grandparent records must be populated to insert, update,
and delete records: To insert, update, or delete records, ensure that the
corresponding parent and grandparent records (if applicable) are also in the
interface table so they are eligible for retrieval by the concurrent program.

• Errors before resubmit: For records with errors in the interface tables, set the
request_id and process status flag columns to NULL so that these records are
selected in the next run. When the Entity Name is specified as a Report parameter,
you do not need to reset these values.

• Data for error messages in a QP interface table: The table
QP_INTERFACE_ERRORS is populated with the processing error messages that
are then written to the output file of the concurrent request. Occasionally, you must
purge this table of this data.

Report Submission
In the Submit Request window, Name field, select QP: Bulk Import of Price List.
Report Parameters


QP: Bulk Import of Price List Parameters

• Entity: Indicates which pricing entity is to be processed. The default value is PRL
(price list).

• Entity Name: This is an optional parameter. Enter the name of the price list to be
processed. If this field is left blank, the system processes all entities of the selected
entity type that are available for processing in the interface tables.
If you enter a price list name, that price list is considered for import even if it failed
in a previous import and regardless of the other flags (for example, even if
PROCESS_ STATUS_FLAG not equal to P, or PROCESS_FLAG not equal to Y or
REQUEST_ ID not equal to NULL in the QP_INTERFACE_LIST_HEADER record).

• Process ID: This value corresponds to the process_id in the interface tables. The
Process ID groups data in the interface table. You can select criteria to specify which
records to process.
If this field is left blank, all available records for processing are considered subject
to the restrictions entered in the Entity Name field.

• Process Type: This field corresponds to the process type that is listed in the interface
tables such as XML. If specified, the bulk loader processes only the records with
PROCESS_TYPE column matching the value entered here.

• Process Parent: Select Yes (the default) or No to determine if the loader should
process a price list line when validation for a child pricing attribute fails. Valid
values are Yes (the default) and No.

• No of Threads: Enter a number that indicates the total number of child processes or
threads to achieve multithreading for list lines and their child records. The default
value is 1.
Multithreading occurs when the child concurrent processes are initiated after a user


submits the Process Parent request. The parent process first processes the list
header records and then the qualifiers records before spawning child processes. The
child processes upload price list lines and attributes.

Note: Multithreading can impact the length of processing time that
is required; therefore, you should not exceed the number of Central
Processing Units (CPUs) that are available when running the
program. Ideally, you should schedule this process for a slow
processing period or when few users are on the system.

• Turn Debug On: Select Yes or No (default):
• Select No to improve loading performance; however error messages are not
sent to the Debug log.

• Select Yes to have all error messages sent to the Debug Log.
The Debug On parameter controls only the log files. However, error messages,
number of records processed, and other related information is written to the
output file, regardless of the value set for Debug On.

• Enable Duplicate Line Check: The bulk loader can upload thousands of lines into
the pricing (QP) lines table. If Enable Duplicate Line is set to Yes, then the QP: Bulk
Import of Price List checks for duplicates lines and displays an error message if
duplicate lines are found. If it is set to No, then the duplicate check is not done. The
default value is Yes.

QP: Maintains the Denormalized Data in QP Qualifiers
This program populates the denormalized column data in the pricing tables and fixes
data corruption specific to the denormalized columns that occur from a patch
application or other set-up issues. You can run this program on a periodic basis or if the
pricing engine performance decreases.
This program calculates and populates modifier statistics that the pricing engine search
optimizer uses to find modifiers by the most direct method. For each modifier at the list
and line level, the process calculates information related to its:
• Qualifiers: Indicates if the list or line has qualifiers.

• Directness: Indicates how specific (selective) or non-specific (non-selective) its
qualifiers are. More specific qualifiers are more direct.

• Fastest search path: The qualifiers in each modifier list and line that are the most
direct become primary qualifiers; the remainder become secondary qualifiers. The
pricing engine search optimizer searches the primary qualifiers first.


This program automatically runs after you add or change each modifier and
recalculates some statistics for that modifier. In addition, you should run the program
periodically to recalculate all of the statistics for all the modifiers.

Note: The Request log for an automatic run is not saved and cannot be
viewed in My Requests if the QP: Maintains the Denormalized Data in
QP Qualifiers program runs successfully. The log file is saved; you can
view the file only when an exception occurs.

Report Submission
In the Submit Request window, Name field, select QP: Maintains the Denormalized
Data in QP Qualifiers.
Run the program during a time when most users are not logged on to the system. You
may encounter a record locking problem if this program runs at the same time that the
pricing engine is processing calls.
Report Parameters

QP: Maintains the Denormalized Data in QP Qualifiers parameters

• List Header ID (Low/High): Enter the range of values for the modifier lists. The two
parameters can be the same value but neither can be null.

• Update Type: Select the update type such as All, Denormalized Columns, Factor
Pricing Attributes, List Header Phases, Pricing Phases, or Qualification Indicator.

Recovery
None

QP: Pattern Upgrade
Use this program to upgrade the existing pricing setup to patterns. You must run this
concurrent program with empty criteria to upgrade all the existing setup to pattern and
to avoid any discrepancies during pattern creation.


Note: It is not advisable to change between pattern and non-pattern
search algorithm frequently as pattern creation will not happen
properly. This would lead to non-desired results of pattern search.

Report Submission
In the Submit Request window, Name field, select QP: Pattern Upgrade.
Report Parameters
None

QP: Security Control with Views Conversion
This program enables you to turn on pricing security for your entire installation. Before
setting to the program to ON, ensure that you have completed the pricing security
setup steps outlined in the Oracle Advanced Pricing Implementation Manual.

Note: QP: Security Control (read-only): This profile option displays the
current setting of the security option for your entire installation (either
on or off). You cannot directly update this profile option value - only
the concurrent program QP: Security Control with Views Conversion
can turn pricing security on or off.

Report Submission
In the Submit Request window, Name field, select QP: Security Control with Views
Conversion.
Report Parameters
Security Control: Select ON or OFF.
• OFF (default): Once security is turned ON, it should not be turned OFF.

• ON: To turn security ON for your installation. If you are upgrading or freshly
installing the security feature for the first time, ensure that you have completed the
setup and implementation steps described in Oracle Advanced Pricing Implementation
Manual, Pricing Security.

Qualifier Grouping report
This report shows details for qualifier groups including grouping conditions and
effective dates within the group.
Report Submission
In the Submit Request window, Name field, select Qualifier Grouping.
Report Parameters


Qualifier Grouping report parameters

• Qualifier Context: Enter a qualifier context.

• Qualifier Attribute Value From and Qualifier Attribute Value To: Enter an
individual qualifier attribute value or a range of qualifier attribute values.

• Start Date Active and End Date Active: Enter a date or a range of dates.

Update Price Lists with Multicurrency Conversion Criteria
This concurrent program enables you to maintain and use price lists in different
currencies. Complete the following prerequisites before running this program:
1. Set the profile option QP: Multi-Currency-Installed to Yes (Y). The valid values for
the profile are Yes (Y) or No (N). The default value is No.

2. Run the concurrent program Update Price Lists with Multi-Currency Conversion
Criteria only once.

Running this program does the following:
• Adds a new Multi-currency Conversion field to the Advanced Pricing - Price Lists
and Pricing Agreements windows. This field displays the name of the
multicurrency list currently attached to the price list but you can select other
multicurrency lists from this field; however, you can select only one at a time.

• Generates a default multicurrency conversion list based on the Base Currency,
Currency-To, and Rounding Factor values from existing price lists. This default
multicurrency conversion list does not have other currencies or conversion criteria,
only the base currency from the base price list. You must add currencies to the
newly created multicurrency lists or create new multicurrency conversion lists if
you want to include different currencies. You can then attach the multicurrency
conversion list to the respective price list.

The following example shows the setup for five price lists before conversion and the


multicurrency list that is created after the conversion:

Currency Rounding

USD -2

USD -2

USD -3

FRF -1

CAD NULL

The concurrent program creates four currency conversion criteria based on the price list
currency and rounding factor of the price lists.

Currency Currency-To Rounding

USD USD -2

USD USD -3

FRF FRF -1

CAD CAD NULL

Attach the multicurrency conversion list to the respective price list. You can then attach
the multicurrency conversion list to the respective price list. You must add new
currencies to the existing multicurrency lists or create new multicurrency lists with the
currencies required for conversion.

Note: Attaching a multicurrency list to the respective price list is a
mandatory step - without it the pricing engine cannot use the current
price lists as multicurrency price lists. After you run the concurrent
program, you can create additional multicurrency lists or add existing
currencies to the created multicurrency lists.

Report Submission
In the Submit Request window, Name field, select Update Price Lists with
Multi-Currency Conversion Criteria.


Report Parameters

Update Price Lists with Multicurrency Conversion Criteria

Do you want to enable Multi-Currency price lists?: Select Yes to enable multicurrency
price lists.

Note: The program must be run initially only once to activate the
multicurrency feature; otherwise, data corruption may result. After you
have successfully run the concurrent program, all existing price list or
agreement windows will be converted to multicurrency price lists. You
should not return to non multicurrency price lists. Changing the profile
back to N (no) may cause undesired results if conversion criteria have
been used. Oracle does not support changing the setting back to No.

Recovery
None. Once you have successfully run the concurrent program , do not return to
non-multicurrency price lists. All existing price list windows are converted to
multicurrency price lists. Changing the profile option QP: Multi-Currency Installed
back to N (no) may cause undesired results if conversion criteria have been used.

Update Promotional Limit Balances program
Use the Update Promotional Limit Balances program to update promotional limit
balances for selected modifier lines.
Report Submission
In the Submit Request window, Name field, select Update Promotional Limit Balances.
Report Parameters


Update Promotional Limit Balances

• Modifier Number: To update limits for a selected modifier, enter the modifier
number.

• Modifier Line Number: To update limits for a selected modifier line, enter the
modifier line number.

• Limit Number: Enter a limit number.

• Limit balance Identifier: Enter the limit balance identifier.

Related Topics


A
Formula Scenarios

Formula Scenarios
This appendix describes the following formula scenarios.

Scenario 1
Splinters Glass Company manufactures windshields for cars and trucks. It sells both to
wholesale customers and to retail customers.
To its retail customers, Splinters prices windshields based on the dimension of the sheet
of glass according to the formula 3 currency units * Width * Height * Thickness Factor.
The following table shows the thickness factors:

Glass Thickness Thickness Factor

< 5 mm 10%

5 mm - 10 mm 15%

> 10 mm 20%

Splinters sets up Oracle Pricing to use formula and factor-based pricing.

Step 1 - Define attributes:
1. In the attribute manager feature, define three new pricing attributes - width, height,
and thickness - using the context of pricing attributes. For more information on
attribute management and creating attributes, see Oracle Advanced Pricing
Implementation Manual.

2. Save your work and close the window.

Formula Scenarios A-1

Step 2 - Create a pricing formula:
1. Create a formula header.
• Formula Name: Glass Pricing Formula and Formula = 1 * 2 * 3 *4

2. Create a formula line.
• Formula Type: Numeric Constant

• Component: 3

• Step Number: 1

3. Create a second formula line.
• Formula Type: Pricing Attributes

• Pricing Attribute Context: Pricing Attributes

• Pricing Attribute: Width

• Step Number: 2

4. Create a third formula line.
• Formula Type: Pricing Attributes

• Pricing Attribute Context: Pricing Attributes

• Pricing Attribute: Height

• Step Number: 3

5. Create a fourth formula line.
• Formula Type: Factor List

• Component: Thickness Factor

• Step Number: 4

6. Click Factors.

7. In the Base Pricing Attributes region, create a row.
• Base Pricing Attribute: Thickness

A-2 Oracle Advanced Pricing User's Guide

• Comparison Operator: Between

• Value From: 0

• Value To: 5

• Adjustment Factor: 0.10

8. Create a second row in the Base Pricing Attributes region.
• Base Pricing attribute: Thickness


• Value From: 5

• Value To: 10


9. Create a third row in the Base Pricing Attributes region.
• Base Pricing Attribute: Thickness


• Value From: 10



Step 3 - Create a price list for retail customers, create a list line, and
attach the formula:
1. Create a price list.
• Name: Retail

• Select the Qualifiers tabbed region.

2. Add a qualifier.
• Context: Customer

• Attribute: Customer Class

• Value: Retail


3. Create a new list line.
• Item: Windshield

• Dynamic Formula: Glass Pricing Formula

• UOM: Each

• Method: Amount

• Line Type: Price List Line


Scenario 2
For its retail customers, Splinters charges for its windshield warranty protection plan at
10 percent of the cost of the replacement windshield. The formula is 10 percent * price
of the Windshield item on the Replacement price list). Splinters sets up Oracle Pricing to
use formula-based pricing.

Step 1 - Create a new pricing formula:
1. Create a formula header.
• Formula Name: Warranty Pricing Formula

• Formula: 1*2

• Formula Type: Numeric Constant

• Component: 0.10

• Step Number: 1

3. Create a second formula line.
• Formula Type: Price List Line

• Component: Windshield line of Replacement price list

• Step Number: 2


A-4 Oracle Advanced Pricing User's Guide

attach the formula:
1. Create a price list.
• Name: Warranties

2. In the Qualifiers region, add a qualifier.
• Context: Customer

• Attribute: Customer Class

• Value: Retail

3. Create a list line.
• Item: Protection Plan

• UOM: Each

• Dynamic Formula: Warranty Pricing Formula

• Method: Amount

• Line Type: PLL



B
Modifier Scenarios

This appendix covers the following topics:
• Modifier Scenarios
• Discount
• Surcharge
• Price Break
• Other Item Discount
• Coupon Issue
• Item Upgrade
• Terms Substitution
• Freight and Special Charges
• New Price

Modifier Scenarios
The following scenarios illustrate how to meet business needs by creating modifiers.
The scenarios are organized by the following modifier concepts:
• Discount

• Surcharge

• Price break

• Other item discount

• Promotional goods

Modifier Scenarios B-1

• Coupon issue

• Item upgrade

• Terms substitution

• Freight and special charges

• New price

Discount
Scenario 1
If the customer is a preferred customer or customer spends more than 150 currency
units, they receive 10 percent off the order.
1. Create a modifier.
• Modifier Type: Discount

• Modifier Level: Order

• Application Method: Percent

• Value: 10

2. In the Line Qualifiers window, create two line qualifiers.
• Grouping Number: 1

• Qualifier Context: Volume

• Qualifier Attribute: Order Amount

• Operator: Between

• Value From: 150

Qualifier Context: Customer

• Qualifier Attribute: Customer Class

• Operator: =

• Value From: Preferred

B-2 Oracle Advanced Pricing User's Guide

Scenario 2
For any 10 compact discs purchased by April 2000, the customer receives two currency
units off.

• Modifier Level: Line

• End Date: 30 April 2000

• Product Attribute: Item Category

• Product Attribute Value: CD

• Volume Type: Item Quantity

• Break Type: Recurring

• Value From: 10

• Application Method: Lumpsum

• Value: 2

Scenario 3
For every eight currency units spent on cat food, the customer accrues five shopper
points.



• Product Attribute Value: Cat Food

• Volume Type: Item Amount


• Value From: 8

• Select Accrue


• Benefit Quantity: 5

• Benefit UOM: Shopper Point

Scenario 4
Customers mentioning the Summer Special Promotion (an Ask For promotion) get $5
off of any tennis racket except the FastFireIII model.
In Modifiers Summary tab
• Modifier No: SUMMER SPECIAL



• Automatic box: Selected


• Product Attribute Value: Tennis Rackets
In Discounts/Charges tab

• Application Method: Amount

• Value: 5
In Advanced tab

• Ask for box: Select. Instructs the pricing engine to apply this modifier only if
the customer asks for it.

• Click Exclude. In the Exclude Items window, create an excluded item:
• Product Attribute: Item

• Product Value: FastFire III

• Exclude box: Select

Scenario 5
Customers who buy two bottles of shampoo receive one currency unit off of the third
bottle of shampoo.





• Product Attribute Value: Shampoo



• UOM: Each

• Value From: 3


• Value: 1

Surcharge
Scenario 1
Customers in the National Accounts territory who spends less than 1000 currency units
per order receives a 2 percent surcharge.
• Modifier Type: Surcharge



• Value: 10

2. In the Line Qualifiers window, create two line qualifiers for the modifier.





• Value To: 1,000


• Qualifier Context: Customer

• Qualifier Attribute: Customer Class

• Operator: =

• Value From: National Accounts

Scenario 2
Any customer placing a rush order (delivery required within two days) for replacement
motors receives a $50 surcharge.
• Modifier Type: Surcharge



• Product Attribute Value: Motors, Spare


• Value: 50

2. In the Line Qualifiers window, create a qualifier for the modifier. You have created
qualifier attribute Days to Requested Delivery and created the appropriate sourcing
rules for this attribute.

• Qualifier Context: Order

• Qualifier Attribute: Days to Requested Delivery


• Value To: 2


Price Break
Scenario 1
All employees in Company ABC's mobile phone plan receive per minute discounts
based on minutes used, as follows:

Minutes Discount Per Minute ($USD)

0-120 0.05

120-240 0.10

240-420 0.12

> 420 0.15

A customer who uses 150 minutes receives the following discounts:
• $ 0.05 per minute discount on 120 minutes

• $ 0.10 per minute discount on 30 minutes

• Modifier Type: Price Break Header



• Product Attribute Value: Minutes


• Break Type: Range

• Adjustment Type: Discount

• Qualifier Attribute: Customer Name

2. In the Line Qualifiers window, create a qualifier for the price break modifier.



• Operator: =

• Value From: ABC

3. In the Price Break Lines region, enter the break lines.

Value From Value To Application Method Value

0 120 Amount .05

120 240 Amount .10

240 420 Amount .12

420 -- Amount .15

Scenario 2
Customers who buy cases of TY brand products across an order receive a percent rebate
per case as follows:

Cases Rebate per case (%)

0 - 500 2

500 - 1,000 3

> 1,000 5

• Modifier Type: Price Break Header

• Modifier Level: Group of Lines

• Product Attribute: Item Number

• Product Attribute Value: TY



• Break Type: Point

• UOM: Case

• Adjustment Type: Discount

• Select Accrue

2. In the Price Break Lines window, enter the break lines:

Value From Value To Application Method Value

0 500 Percent 2

500 1,000 Percent 3

1,000 -- Percent 5

Other Item Discount
Scenario 1
Customers who buy more than three meters of fabric across an order receive 10 percent
off thermal curtain linings and 5 percent off drapery services.

• Modifier Level: Group of Lines


• Product Attribute Value: Fabric



• UOM: Meter

• Value From: 3

2. In the modifier details, enter the get products.



• Product Value: Thermal Linings


• Value: 10


• Product Value: Drapery Services


• Value: 5

Scenario 2
Customers who buy six chairs and a coffee table or six chairs and two standard lamps,
will get $400 off a dining table assuming the dining table is on the order as well.



• Product Attribute Value: Dining Chair



• UOM: Each

• Value From: 6

2. In the modifier details, enter the related product.
• Group No: 1


• Product Value: Coffee Table

• UOM: Each



• Group No: 2

• Product Value: Standard Lamp

• Pricing Attribute: Item Quantity


• Value From: 2

• UOM: Each

3. In the modifier details, enter the get product.

• Product Value: Dining Table


• Value: 400

Promotional Goods
Scenario 1
Customers who buy one bottle of shampoo receive a free bottle of conditioner.






• UOM: Each

• Value From: 1



• Product Value: Conditioner

• Get Quantity: 1

• Get Price: <price list line for conditioner>

• Get UOM: Each


• Value: 100

Scenario 2
Customers who buy two bottles of shampoo receive 10 percent off the purchase of a
third bottle of shampoo.






• UOM: Each

• Value From: 2


• Product Value: Shampoo

• Get Quantity: 1

• Get Price: <price list line for shampoo>


• Get UOM: Each


• Value: 10

Scenario 3
A customer who spends $45 to $100 on an order line receives a free cosmetic bag.
1. Create a modifier line.


• In the Line Qualifiers window, create a qualifier.

• Grouping Number: -1


• Qualifier Attribute: Line Volume


• Value From: 45

• Value To: 100

2. In the Modifier Summary region, select the product that the customer must order to
get the free cosmetic bag.
• Click Define Details to display the Products tab. In the Get region, define the
item that the customer gets when the Buy item is ordered.

• Get Product Attribute: Item

• Get Product Value: Cosmetic Bag

• Get Quantity: 1

• Get Price: <price list line for cosmetic bag>

• Get UOM: Each



• Value: 100

Coupon Issue
Scenario 1
Customers who buy any products in the Chubo brand receive 10 percent off any item in
the Chubo brand on their next order.
1. Create a modifier list. In the Main tab:
• Type: Promotion

• Number: Coupon15

• Select Active

• Name: Coupon15

• Clear Automatic

2. Create a modifier line for the discount.
In the Modifiers Summary tab.



• Product Attribute Value: Chubo

• In the Discounts/Charges tab


• Value: 10

3. Create a second modifier line for the coupon issue and assign it for the modifier line
created in step 2.
• Modifier Type: Coupon Issue




• Product Attribute Value: Chubo

• Coupon Modifier: <discount modifier from previous step>

Scenario 2
Customers ordering from the website receive a coupon for 10 percent off a future order.
1. Create a modifier line (for Modifier List Type: Promotion).



• Value: 10

2. Create a second modifier line for the coupon issue and assign it to the modifier line
created in step 1.


• Coupon Modifier: <modifier from step 1>

3. In the Line Qualifiers window, create a qualifier for the Coupon Issue modifier line
from step 2. You have created the qualifier attribute Website Domain and created
the appropriate sourcing rules for it.


• Qualifier Attribute: Website Domain

• Operator: =

• Value From: co.uk

Scenario 3
With any order, receive a coupon for two free bags of coffee on a future order.
1. Create a modifier line.


• Modifier Level: Group of Lines, All Items


• Product Value: Coffee

• Get Quantity: 2

• Get Price: <price list line for bag of coffee>

• Get UOM: Bag


• Value: 100

3. Create a second modifier line for the coupon issue and assign it to the modifier
from step 1.


• Coupon Modifier: <modifier from step 1>

Item Upgrade
Scenario 1
Customers who order a standard video recorder before end of April 2000 receive a
deluxe video recorder for the same price.
1. Create a modifier list.
• Type: Promotion or Deal

• Date Type: Requested Ship Date

• End Date: April 31, 2000

2. Assign a modifier line to the modifier list in Step 1. You have defined the item
relationship between the standard video recorder and deluxe video recorder.
• Modifier Type: Item Upgrade




• Product Attribute Value: Video Recorder Standard

• Upgrade Item: Video Recorder Deluxe

Scenario 2
Customers who buy a shirt receive the shirt and a tie for the shirt price.
1. Create a modifier. You have defined the item relationship between the shirt and the
marketing bill shirt and tie pack.
• Modifier Type: Item Upgrade



• Product Attribute Value: Shirt

• Upgrade Item: Marketing item shirt and tie pack

Terms Substitution
Scenario 1
Customers who spend more than 1000 currency units on a sofa pay nothing for
shipping.
1. Create a modifier:
• Modifier Type: Terms Substitution



• Product Attribute Value: Sofa

• Volume Type: Item Amount


• UOM: Each


• Value From: 1,000

• Terms Attribute: Shipping Terms

• Terms Value: No Charge

Scenario 2
Customers who buy more than 100 currency units of one item on an order receive terms
of 2% 30/NET 60.
• Modifier Type: Terms Substitution


• Terms Attribute: Payment Terms

• Terms Value: 2% 30/NET 60

2. In the Line Qualifiers window, create a qualifier.




• Value From: 100

Freight and Special Charges
Scenario 1
For all low priority shipments, calculate shipping charges by order line total weight as
follows:
• 0 - 500 kg: 2.50 currency units

• 501 - 1,000 kg: 3.50 currency units

• > 1,000 kg: 5.00 currency units

Profile Option QP: Line Weight UOM Code is kg.


• Modifier Type: Freight Charge



• Value: 2.50

2. In the Line Qualifiers window, create a qualifier for the modifier from step 1.


• Qualifier Attribute: Shipment Priority

• Operator: =

• Value From: Low



• Qualifier Attribute: Line Weight

• Operator: =

• Value From: 0

• Value To: 500

3. Create a second modifier.



• Value: 3.50

4. In the Line Qualifiers window, create a qualifier for the second modifier from step
3.




• Operator: =

• Value From: Low




• Operator: =

• Value From: 501

• Value To: 1,000

5. Create a third modifier.



• Value: 3.50

6. In the Line Qualifiers window, create a qualifier for the third modifier from step 5.



• Operator: =

• Value From: Low





• Operator: =

• Value From: 1,001

Scenario 2
Calculate freight handling charge as a 10 percent markup of actual handling cost.
1. Create a formula.
• Formula Name: Handling Cost

• Formula: 1 * 2

• Formula Line Type: Pricing Attribute

• Pricing Attribute Context: Pricing Attribute

• Pricing Attribute: Handling Cost Amount

• Step: 1

• Formula Line Type: Constant

• Component: 1.1

• Step: 2




• Formula: <reference formula Handling Cost from step 1>

4. In the Line Qualifiers window, create a qualifier for the third modifier from step 2.


• Qualifier Attribute: Freight Cost Type


• Operator: =

• Value From: Handling

New Price
Scenario 1
The following table states the scenario for this new price modifier example. Following
the table, the text analyzes the scenario:

Incompat. Precedence Bucket Operator Value Engine
Level Selects

1 10 1 NEWPRICE 30 No

1 10 1 NEWPRICE 25 Yes

1 10 1 NEWPRICE 40 No

Within the same incompatibility group, when all of the lines have the same precedence,
the pricing engine performs best price processing. The final selling price is in line 2, 25
currency units. In this scenario, the bucket is not important to the result.

Scenario 2

Incompat. Precedenc Bucket Operator Value Engine Adjusted Amount
Level e Selects

1 10 1 NEWPRIC 30 Yes -970
E

2 10 1 NEWPRIC 25 Yes -975
E

3 10 1 NEWPRIC 40 Yes -960
E

With different incompatibility levels, the pricing engine evaluates the lines according to
buckets. Because all of the lines are in the same bucket, the pricing engine calculates the


adjusted amount from the list price. It calculates the selling price as follows:
• List Price - Sum of the Adjusted Amounts
1,000 - (970 + 975 + 960) = 1,000 - 2095 = -1,905

Scenario 3

Incompat Precedence Bucket Operator Value Engine Adjusted
. Level Selects? Amount

1 10 1 NEWPRICE 30 Yes -970 (Base
price: 1,000)

2 10 2 NEWPRICE 25 Yes -5 (Base
price: 30)

3 10 3 NEWPRICE 40 Yes 15 (Base
price: 25)

With different incompatibility levels, the pricing engine evaluates the lines according to
buckets. Because each line is in a different bucket, the pricing engine calculates the
adjusted amount from the base price of the previous bucket (list price is in bucket 0). It
calculates the selling price as follows:
List Price - Sum of the Adjusted Amounts
1,000 - (970 + 5 - 15) = 1,000 - 960 = 40
As the pricing engine evaluates the eligible list lines, it resolves incompatibilities in all
phases. You can set up your modifiers such that the pricing engine determines most of
the list line eligibility at the search stage. Then, the pricing engine calculates the final
selling price bucket by bucket.


C
Windows and Navigation Paths

Windows and Navigation Paths
Refer to the following sources for further information about windows and applications:
• Oracle Order Management User's Guide

• Oracle Application User's Guide

The Window Names and Navigation Paths table lists the navigation path for each
window or HTML page. Here are the conventions and short names used in the table:
• HTML user interface (UI) and Self Service Web Application (SSWA): Identifies a
navigation path in the HTML user interface.

• []: Square brackets indicate a button name or a link that you must click to display
the window or HTML page.

• [T]: Square brackets around the letter T indicate that you must click a tab.

Window Name Navigation Path

Add Items to Price List Price Lists > Add Items to Price List

Adjust Price List Price Lists > Adjust Price List

Advanced Pricing - Define Modifier Modifiers > Modifier Setup

Advanced Pricing - Define Modifier Modifiers > Modifier Incompatibility Setup >
[Modifiers]

Windows and Navigation Paths C-1


Advanced Pricing: Home Page SSWA > Oracle Pricing User responsibility >
Home

Advanced Pricing - Price Lists Price Lists > Price List Setup

Advanced Pricing - Pricing Formulas Pricing Formulas > Formulas Setup

Advanced Search SSWA > Oracle Pricing User >Price List
Maintenance > [Advanced Search]

Alternate: SSWA > Oracle Pricing
Administrator >Price List Maintenance >
[Advanced Search]

Alternate:

Archive Pricing Entities Archive Purge Pricing Entities > Archive
Entity

Assign Attributes Setup > Attribute Management > Attribute
Linking and Mapping > [Assign Attributes]

Attribute Mapping Setup > Attribute Linking and Mapping >
[Link Attributes] > Link Attributes window >
[Attribute Mapping]

Bulk Change SSWA > Oracle Pricing User > Price List
Maintenance > [Advanced Search] > [Search] >
From Advanced Search page > [Bulk Change]

Alternate: SSWA > Oracle Pricing User or
Oracle Pricing Administrator > Price List
Maintenance > (Do Search) >[Bulk Change]

Bulk Create Privileges SSWA > Oracle Pricing Administrator
Responsibility > Security > Privileges > [Bulk
Create Privileges]

Bulk Update Entity Usage SSWA > Oracle Pricing Administrator
Responsibility > Security> Entity Usage >
[Bulk Update Entity Usage]

C-2 Oracle Advanced Pricing User's Guide


Context Setup Setup > Attribute Mapping > Context and
Attributes

Copy Modifiers Modifiers > Copy Modifiers

Create Delta Price Book (HTML UI) SSWA > Oracle Pricing User > Advanced
Pricing [Home] > Reports [T] > Search >
[Create Delta]

Alternate: SSWA > Oracle Pricing User >
Advanced Pricing [Home] > Reports [T] >
Search (do search) > [Name] > [Create Delta]

Copy Price List Price Lists > Copy Price List

Create Entity Set SSWA > Oracle Pricing Administrator
Responsibility > Security > Entity Sets >
[Create Entity Set]

Create Line page (modifier) (HTML UI) SSWA > Oracle Pricing User responsibility >
Home page > Shortcuts > Create (Modifier
Type) List > (Create modifier) > Next > Update
Discount List: Modifier Lines > [Create Line]

Create Price Book (HTML UI) SSWA > Oracle Pricing User > Advanced
Pricing [Home] > Reports [T] > [Create Price
Book]

Create Price List: General Information SSWA > Oracle Pricing User responsibility >
(HTML UI) Home > Oracle Advanced Pricing: Home page
[Shortcuts: Create Price List]

Alternate: SSWA > Oracle Pricing User
responsibility > Home > Oracle Advanced
Pricing: Home page [Lists tab] > Create List



Create Price List: Qualifiers (HTML UI) SSWA > Oracle Pricing User responsibility >
Home > Oracle Advanced Pricing: Home page
[Shortcuts: Create Price List] > Create Price
List: General Information > [Next]

responsibility > Home > Oracle Advanced
Pricing: Home page [Lists tab] > Create List >
Create Price List: General Information page
[Next]

Debug Log Pricing Engine Request Viewer > [View Debug
Log]

Define Limits Modifiers > Modifier Setup > Define Modifier
(W) > [List Limits] >

Define Modifier Modifiers > Modifier Setup

Define Modifier - Define GSA price Price Lists > GSA Pricing Setup

Define Modifier Details Modifiers > Modifier Setup > [Define Details*]

Descriptive Flexfield Segments Setup > FlexFields

Detail Change (HTML UI) SSWA > Oracle Pricing User > Price List
Maintenance > [Advanced Search] > From
Advanced Search page > [Detail Change]

Alternate: SSWA > Oracle Pricing User or
Oracle Pricing Administrator > Price List
Maintenance > (Do Search) >[Detail Change]

Entity Set Details (HTML UI) SSWA > Oracle Pricing Administrator
Responsibility > Security > Entity Sets > [Set
Id]

Entity Sets SSWA > Oracle Pricing Administrator
Responsibility > Security > Entity Sets

Entity Usage SSWA > Oracle Pricing Administrator
Responsibility > Security > Entity Usage



Event Phases Setup > Event Phases

Exclude Items Modifiers > Modifier Setup > [Exclude]

Express Create Privilege SSWA > Oracle Pricing Administrator
Responsibility > Security > Privileges >
[Express Create Privilege]

Factors Pricing Formulas > Formulas Setup > [Factors]

Find Personal Profile Values Setup > Profiles

Find Modifiers Pricing Organizer

Find Requests View Concurrent Requests

Alternate: View Concurrent Requests > [Find]
> [Find Requests]

Find Formula Factor Lines Pricing Formulas > Formulas Setup >
Advanced Pricing - Pricing Formulas > (Query
Formula Name) > Select Formula line >
[Factors] > Factors window > Select line which
contains the value > [Search icon]

GSA Qualifiers Price Lists > GSA Pricing Setup > [List
Qualifiers]

Incompatibility Groups Modifiers > Modifier Incompatibility Setup

Link Attributes Setup > Attribute Linking and Mapping >
[Link Attributes]

Log file: request id View Concurrent Requests > [Find] > [View
Log...]

Modifier Lists SSWA > Oracle Pricing User > Home > Lists
{T}, Administrator Responsibility > Modifier
Lists



Modifier Lists Search (HTML UI) SSWA > Oracle Pricing User responsibility >
> [List tab] > Modifier Lists

Modifier Organizer Pricing Organizer

More Pricing Attributes Modifiers > Modifier Setup > [Pricing
Attributes]

Multi-Currency Conversion List Price Lists > Multi-Currency Conversion Setup

Parameter Definition (HTML UI) SSWA > Oracle Pricing Administrator
responsibility > Oracle Pricing Administrator
Setup: Parameters > Parameter Definition

Alternate: Pricing Manager responsibility >
Pricing Transaction Entity - Source System
and Request Type

Oracle Pricing Lookups Setup > Lookups

Personal Profile Values Setup > Profiles > [Find]

Price Book (HTML UI) SSWA > Oracle Pricing User > Advanced
Pricing [Home] > Reports [T] > Search

Price Breaks Pricing Agreements > Price Breaks

Alternate: Modifiers > Modifier Setup >
[Define Details*] > Price Breaks

Alternate: Price Lists > Price List Setup >
[Price Breaks]

Price List Maintenance (HTML UI) SSWA > Oracle Pricing Administrator
Responsibility > Price List Maintenance

Alternate:Oracle Pricing User > Price List >
Maintenance

Price Lists Search (HTML UI) SSWA > Oracle Pricing User responsibility >
> [List tab] > Price Lists



Pricing Agreements Pricing Agreements

Pricing Attributes Pricing Agreements > [Pricing Attributes]

Alternate: Price Lists > Price List Setup >
[Pricing Attributes]

Pricing Engine Request Viewer Pricing Engine Request Viewer

Pricing Formulas Pricing Formulas > Formulas Setup

Pricing Organizer Pricing Organizer

Pricing Transaction Entity-Attribute Setup > Attribute Management > Attribute
Linking Linking and Mapping

Privileges SSWA > Oracle Pricing Administrator
Responsibility > Security > Privileges

Privileges Summary SSWA > Oracle Pricing Administrator
Responsibility > Security> Privileges > [Bulk
Create Privileges] > Complete Bulk Create
Privileges Step 1 to 3 > [Submit]

Purge Pricing Entities Archive Purge Pricing Entities > Purge Entity

QUALIFIER - Header Level Qualifiers Modifiers > Modifier Setup > [List Qualifiers]
> [Cancel]

QUALIFIER - Line Level Qualifiers Modifiers > Modifier Setup > [Line Qualifiers]
> [Cancel]

Qualifier Group Qualifier Setup

Qualifier Groups - List Modifiers > Modifier Setup > [List Qualifiers]

Qualifier Groups - Line Modifiers > Modifier Setup > [Line Qualifiers]



Qualifiers (HTML UI) SSWA > Oracle Pricing User responsibility >
Find or create Modifier/Price List > List
Qualifiers > Qualifiers page [Append Group]

responsibility > Find or create modifier
line/price list line> List Qualifiers > Qualifiers
page [Append Group]

Qualifiers: Append Group (HTML UI) SSWA > Oracle Pricing User responsibility >
Qualifiers page [Append Group]

Redeem Accruals Modifiers > Accrual Redemption

Report: request id View Concurrent Requests > [Find] > [View
Output]

Request Detail View Concurrent Requests > [Find] > [View
Details...]

Request Diagnostics View Concurrent Requests > [Find] >
[Diagnostics]

Requests View Concurrent Requests > [Find]

Source Systems Setup > Source Systems

Submit a New Request Reports

Alternate: View Concurrent Requests >
[Submit a New Request...]

Submit Request Reports > OK

Update Formula Prices Pricing Formulas > Update Formula Prices



Update Line (modifier) (HTML UI) SSWA > Oracle Pricing User responsibility >
Lists > Modifier Lists > Modifier Lists Search
page (complete search for modifier) >
[Update] > Modifier Lines (from Navigation
bar) > [Update]

responsibility > Home page (Recently Created
Modifier Lists) > [Update] > Modifier Lines
(from Navigation bar) > [Update]

Update (Modifier Type): Modifier Lines SSWA > Oracle Pricing User responsibility >
(HTML UI) Lists > Modifier Lists > Modifier Lists Search
page (complete search for modifier) >
[Update] > Modifier Lines (from Navigation
bar)

Modifier Lists) > [Update] > Modifier Lines
(from Navigation bar)

Update (Modifier Type): General SSWA > Oracle Pricing User responsibility >
Information (HTML UI) Modifier Lists Search page (after completing a
search) > [Update]

Modifier Lists) > [Update]

Value Sets Setup > Attribute Management > Context and
Attributes > [Value Sets]


Index

pricing entities, 8-2
Symbols attaching
Freight and Special Charge modifier line, 3-32
pricing attributes to modifier lines, 3-51
attribute management, 1-11
A attribute mapping, 1-11
accruals Attribute Mapping Rules Error Report, 11-3
in modifiers, 3-10
redeeming, 3-98 B
accumulated range breaks, for modifier lines
block pricing
creating, 3-48
recurring value, 2-23
adding
buckets (modifiers), 3-9, 3-72
items to a price list, 2-32
Build Attribute Mapping Rules program, 11-4
adjusting. See changing, 1-1
Build Formula Package program, 11-5
adjustment method (modifiers), 3-4
bulk loader
agreement price lists, 2-5
QP: Bulk Import of Price List program, 11-12
agreements
creating, 7-3
C
defining
price breaks, 7-10 changing
pricing attributes, 7-9 prices, 1-4
deleting, 7-14 concurrent programs
finding, 7-13 See reports and concurrent programs
overview, 7-1 copying
revising, 7-12 limits, 3-113
types modifier line, 3-61
Pricing, 7-2 modifiers, 3-58
Standard, 7-2 price list lines, 2-38
appending qualifier groups (HTML UI), 5-8 creating
application method (modifiers), 3-4 agreement revisions, 7-12
archiving agreements, 7-3
modifiers and modifier information, 3-103 formulas, 4-2
overview, 8-1 GSA list qualifiers, 2-28
price lists, 2-62 GSA price list, 2-25

Index-1

limits, 3-111 events (modifiers), 3-9
modifier lines (HTML UI), 3-71 excluding items, in modifiers, 3-53
modifiers (HTML UI), 3-64
price books, 10-2 F
price books, delta, 10-14
finding. See searching, 5-18
price breaks (price list line), 2-18, 7-10
formulas
price breaks for modifiers, 3-43
creating, 4-2
price breaks for modifiers (HTML UI), 3-78
defined, 1-13
price list lines, 2-10
defining factor list details, 4-2
price list lines (HTML UI), 2-49
overview, 4-1
price lists, 2-5
scenarios, A-1
price lists (HTML UI), 2-43
searching for formula factor lines, 4-9
pricing attributes for price list lines, 2-13
updating prices, 4-10, 4-11
pricing attributes in agreements, 7-9
Freight and Special charge List modifier, 3-32
qualifier groups, 5-9
qualifiers, 2-14
G
qualifiers, line level, 3-55
qualifiers, list level, 3-18 General Services Administration (GSA) price
qualifiers (HTML UI), 5-4 lists, creating, 2-25
secondary price lists, 2-13 Global box
cross order volume, in modifiers, 3-12 modifiers, 2-25, 3-15
currency grouping numbers, 5-12
modifiers, 3-65
optional currency, 3-65 H
price lists, 2-2 HTML UI (user interface) in pricing
accessing, 1-10
D Home page, 2-39
defining. See creating, 1-1 modifier lists and modifiers, 3-2
deleting overview, 1-7
agreements, 7-14 price list maintenance feature, 2-62
qualifier groups, 5-19 price lists and price list lines, 2-2, 2-42
qualifiers, 3-20 qualifier groups, 5-8
qualifiers (HTML UI), 5-8 qualifiers, 5-4
secondary price lists (HTML UI), 2-43
delta price books, creating, 10-14 I
discounts/charges (modifier lines), 3-30 incompatibility processing (modifiers), 3-8
duplicating. See copying, 1-1 item upgrade information, entering, 3-34

E L
enforcing limits, 3-109 limits, 3-118
entering adjusting limit amounts, 3-123
item upgrade information, 3-34 balances, 3-118
other item discount and promotions updating, 3-121
information, 3-39 changing amounts, 3-123
price break information, 3-43 copying, 3-113
terms substitution information, 3-35 creating, 3-111

Index-2

enforcing, 3-109 saving, 3-103
overview, 3-109 modifiers, 3-12
viewing transaction details, 3-118 accruals, 3-10
line level qualifiers. See qualifiers, 1-1 accumulated range breaks, 3-48
list price archiving, 2-62, 8-2
determining, 1-4 concepts, 3-2
adjustment (application) method, 3-4
M buckets, 3-9
events, 3-9
Mobile Download box
incompatibility processing, 3-8
setting up for price lists, 2-5
copying, 3-58
modifier lines, 3-21
coupon issue, 3-36
archiving, 3-103, 8-2
creating modifier lists, 3-12
attaching pricing attributes, 3-51
deal, 3-12
copying, 3-61
discount list, 3-12
creating, 3-21
freight and special charge list, 3-12
accumulated range breaks, 3-48
promotion, 3-12
coupon issue, 3-36
surcharge list, 3-12
discounts/charges, 3-30
cross order volume, 3-12
Freight and Special Charge, 3-32
defined, 1-4
item upgrade, 3-34
Freight and Special charge List, 3-32
other item discount, 3-39
Global box, 2-25, 3-15
price break information, 3-43
incompatibility level, 3-72
promotional goods, 3-39
limits, 3-109
term substitution, 3-35
negative selling prices, 3-8
excluding items, 3-53
net amount calculation, 3-78
lumpsum application method, 3-5
overview, 3-1
purging, 3-103, 8-8
promotional limits
modifier lines (HTML UI), 3-71
See limits
Advanced Pricing Home page (HTML), 2-39
promotional modifier as a qualifier , 3-41
archiving, 8-2
purging, 2-62, 3-103, 8-8
controls
qualifier grouping numbers, 5-12
buckets, 3-72
qualifiers (list level), 3-18
defining, 3-72
querying using pricing organizer, 3-103
incompatibility, 3-72
terms substitution , 3-35
modifier level, 3-72
types, 3-4, 3-12
phases, 3-72
using with negative unit selling prices, 3-8
creating, 3-71
modifiers (HTML UI), 3-62, 3-64
discount, 3-75
price break, 3-78
archiving, 8-2
promotional goods, 3-83
concepts, 3-65
surcharge, 3-87
creating, 3-64
purging, 8-8
deal, 3-64
updating, 3-94
discount list, 3-64
modifier lists. See modifiers, 3-1
promotion, 3-64
modifier query
surcharge list, 3-64
querying modifiers, 3-
fields

Index-3

By Request Only, 3-66 pricing security, 1-6
Pricing for Global Use box, 3-65 order volume attribute, using negative numbers,
net amount calculation, 3-44 3-20
optional currency, 3-65 overview
overview, 3-62 formulas, 4-1
purging, 8-8 modifiers, 3-1
qualifier groups, 5-8 Oracle Advanced Pricing, 1-1
qualifiers, 5-4 price books, 10-1
searching, 3-90 price lists, 2-2
types, 3-64 reports and concurrent programs, 11-1
updating, 3-92
modifier scenarios P
coupon issue, B-14
price and modifier adjustments, applying, 1-4
discount, B-2
price books
freight and special charges, B-18
creating
item upgrade, B-16
delta price books, 10-14
new price, B-22
full price book, 10-2
other item discounts (OID), B-9
deleting, 10-10
price break, B-7
overview, 10-1
promotional goods, B-11
publishing options, 10-2
surcharge, B-5
republishing, 10-10
term substitution, B-17
viewing, 10-10
multicurrency
price breaks
overview of changes, 6-2
accumulated, 3-48
multicurrency conversion lists
agreements, 7-10
as qualifier, 6-13
block pricing, 2-21, 2-23
attaching to price lists or agreements, 6-12
break unit pricing, 2-23
creating, 6-6
defining, 2-18
overview, 6-1
modifier type, 3-43
rounding, 6-3
updating, 6-19
attributes, 2-13
changing (Bulk change), 2-
N changing (Detail Change), 2-62
navigation paths and windows, C-1 copying, 2-38
negative numbers in qualifier, 3-20 creating, 2-10
negative prices price breaks, Block price, 2-21
in modifiers, 3-8 price breaks, 2-18
in price lists, 2-2, 2-49 qualifier groups, 2-17
net amount calculation qualifiers, 2-14
in modifiers (Forms-based UI), 3-78 price list lines (HTML UI), 2-49
in modifiers (HTML UI), 3-44 searching, 2-57, 2-63
null values in formulas, 4-4 updating, 2-60
updating with Price List Maintenance, 2-62
O price list maintenance feature (HTML UI)
making detail/bulk changes, 2-62
optional currency, 3-65
overview, 2-62
Oracle Pricing Administrator responsibility, in

Index-4

searching, 2-63 defining, 1-11
price lists, 2-5 pricing components
adding inventory items, 2-30 overview, 1-10
adding items, 2-31 price lists, 1-12
adjusting, 2-30, 2-34 pricing attributes, 1-11
agreement price lists, 2-5 qualifier groups, 1-10
archiving, 2-62 qualifiers, 1-10
changing (Bulk change), 2-62 service items, 2-48
copying, 2-36 pricing engine, 1-4
creating, 2-5 Pricing for Global Use box (modifiers), 3-65
defined, 1-12 pricing formulas.
deleting, 2-62 See formulas
fields pricing organizermodifier queryquerying
Active box, 2-2 modifiers, 3-103
currency, 2-2 pricing security, 1-6
Effective Dates, 2-2 Oracle Pricing Administrator, 1-6
Mobile Download box, 2-5 promotional limits. See limits, 1-1
Round To, 2-2 publishing options
GSA (General Services Administration), 2-25 price books, 10-2
inactive, 2-2 purging
maintaining, 2-30 modifiers and related modifier information, 3-
purging, 2-62 103
secondary price lists, 2-4 pricing entities, 8-8
selecting, 1-4
using price breaks, 2-5 Q
using qualifiers, 5-2
QP: Pattern Upgrade, 11-17
using the Price List Maintenance feature, 2-62
QP: Security Control with Views Conversion , 11-
18
qualifier grouping numbers, 5-12
introduction, 2-2
qualifier groups
price list lineschanging (Bulk change)using the
creating, 5-9
Price List Maintenance feature, 2-62
defined, 1-10
deleting, 3-20, 5-19
qualifiers, 5-4
modifying, 5-19
searching, 2-55, 2-63
searching, 5-18
updating, 2-58
qualifier groups (HTML UI)
updating with Price List maintenance feature,
appending, 5-8
2-62
qualifiers, 5-2
price request structure, 1-4
defined, 1-4, 1-10
price request structure, defining, 1-4
line level, creating, 3-55
pricing
modifiers, creating, 3-18
pricing attributes, 1-4
overview, 5-1
product hierarchy, 1-4
product hierarchy, defined, 1-4
promotional modifier as a qualifier, 3-41
qualifiers, defined, 1-4
using, 5-2
pricing agreements. See agreements, 1-1
using with price lists, 5-8
pricing attributes

Index-5

value, 5-2 deleting (HTML UI), 2-43
qualifiers (HTML UI), 5-4 security privileges
appending a qualifier group, 5-8 modifiers, 3-12
common qualifiers, 5-4 multicurrency lists, 6-1
creating, 5-4 price lists, 2-5
deleting, 5-8 reports, 11-2
qualifier conditions, 5-4 service items, pricing, 2-48
unique qualifiers, 5-4
updating, 5-8 T
Term Substitution modifier line, 3-35
R
redeeming accruals, 3-98 U
reports and concurrent programs
updating
Attribute Mapping Rules Error Report, 11-3
balances, 3-121
Build Attribute Mapping Rules program, 11-4
formula prices, 4-10
Build Formula Package program, 11-5
limit amounts, 3-123
Cross Order Volume Load Report, 11-6
modifier incompatibility, 3-102
Cross Order Volume Report, 11-7
modifier lines (HTML UI), 3-94
Modifier Details report, 11-8
modifiers (HTML UI), 3-92
overview, 11-1
price books, 10-1
price list lines using Price List Maintenance, 2-
Price Lists report, 11-9
62
Pricing Formulas report, 11-10
price list prices, 2-30, 2-35
Purge Pricing Engine Requests program, 11-11
QP_Bulk Import of Price List program, 11-12
prices for price list lines, 2-31
QP_Maintains the Denormalized Data in QP
prices for pricing formula, 4-11
Qualifiers program, 11-16
qualifiers (HTML UI), 5-8
QP: Security Control with Views Conversion ,
11-18
V
Qualifier Grouping report, 11-18
Update Price Lists with multicurrency viewing
Conversion Criteria program, 11-19 limit balances, 3-118
Update Promotional Limit Balances program, limit transaction details, 3-118
11-21 price books, 10-10
republishing price books, 10-10
W
S windows, navigating, C-1
searching windows and navigation paths, C-1
agreements, 7-13
formula factor lines, 4-9
modifier lists (HTML UI), 3-90
modifiers (using pricing organizer), 3-103
secondary price lists, 2-13

Index-6

Adv pricing user_guide

More Related Content

What's hot (20)

Similar to Adv pricing user_guide (20)

Recently uploaded (20)

Adv pricing user_guide